Home

Avaya Business Communications Manager 6.0 - Configuration - Telephony Configuration manual

1. Protocol Services Available Foreign Exchg Inwats 800 Intl 800 Switched Nine Hundred Digital SDS 900 NI SID or All By numberor N A N A N A All DMS 100 SID or All SID By N A N A N A number or All DMS 250 SID or All SID By N A N A SID or By number or All number or All 4ESS N A By numberor Bynumberor Bynumberor By number or All All All All Port details Both trunk and analog modules show port details Ports settings are directly related to the physical ports into which the PSTN lines or telephony devices connect on the media bay modules The station module P ort Details panel and trunk module Port Details panels are illustrated the following figures 88 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Station module Port Details panel Details for Module Internal Set Port Details Ports on Module Telephony resources configuration Port DN Dev 0401 221 M73 316E ice type 24 juipped Unequipped Unequipped quipped equipped quipped quipped quipped Version State OBPAEO dle Unequipped Unequipped Unequipped dle Unequippe Jnequipped Unequipped Unequipped Jnequipped Trunk Port Details panel Port Values tab Details for Module Main MBM 4 Trunk Module Parameters Trunk Port Details Port Ports on Module Line State Version The following table describes the fie
2. Unspr Define whether disconnect supervision also referred to as loop supervision releases an external line when an open switch interval OSI is detected during a call on that line You must set E arth calling this to Supervised if a loop trunk has its Answer mode set to Auto or if you enable Answer with DISA Disconnect supervision is also required to conference two external callers The line must be Loop unguarded equipped with disconnect supervision from the central office for the Supervised option to work Supervised Loop guarded ROE ROI These listing only appear for UK analog lines These appear only for Australia Dial mode Loop GS DID E amp M Pulse Specify whether the system uses dual tone multifrequency Tone DTMF or pulse signaling on the trunk Tone does not appear if Signaling is set to Immediate T1 DID amp T1 E amp M trunk types only Loss package Loop analog only Short CO Select the appropriate loss gain and impedance settings for each Medium CO line Long CO Short PBX Long PBX NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 139 Line configuration overview Properties lines settings Impedance Loop analog only onmis 600 ohm 900 ohm The GATM can be setto a specific impedance level Signaling DID E a
3. WARNING A Whenever you make changes to the address range the DHCP server may become unavailable to clients for a brief period of time When making changes consider doing so ata time that will minimize the effect on users Procedure steps Step 1 2 Action Click Configuration Data Services gt DHCP Server gt Address Ranges tab Click Add beneath the Included Address Ranges table The Add Included Address Range dialog box appears Enter the appropriate values in the From IP address To IP address and Default Gateway fields Click OK The address range is added to the table Variable definitions End Attribute Value Description Included Address Ranges From IP Address lt IP Address format An IP address specifying the lowest IP address ina 10 10 10 10 gt range To IP Address lt IP Address format An IP address specifying the highest IP address ina 10 10 10 10 gt range Deleting a new included address range Complete this procedure to delete an IP address range Procedure steps Step 1 2 366 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Action Select the Address Range you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation dialog box appears Click Yes End DHCP server configuration on BCM main module Adding a reserved address Complete this procedure to add a new reserved address
4. Deleting ports from a VLAN Delete ports from a VLAN on your network when they are no longer required Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem 2 Select the VLAN Interfaces tab 3 In the VLAN Interfaces Summary area selectthe VLAN associated with the ports to be deleted 4 In the Ports column click on the Ports entry that belongs to the selected VLAN A drop down menu of ports associated with the selected VLAN appears Select the port to be deleted Click Delete End 404 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Modifying ports on Modify p Configuring virtual LANs a VLAN orts on a VLAN when required to change the ports on your network Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 Action In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem Select the VLAN Interfaces tab In the VLAN Interfaces Summary area select the VLAN associated with the port or ports to be modified In the Ports column click on the Ports entry that belongs to the selected VLAN A drop down menu of ports associated with the selected VLAN appears Select the port to be modified Click Modify End Variable definitions Variable Value Allow Network Access Enabling this option allows traffic from the LAN VLAN ID Interface network to traverse to another LAN or VLAN T
5. 0 XX This field indicates the current activity for the N A devices or lines attached to the module Media bay module panels The following panel tabs appear when you selecta module table entry on the Telephony Resources panel e Trunk Module Parameters page 81 e Portdetails page 88 The four trunks connected to the core module are also indicated in the table when they are active These trunks are analog trunks For the BCM450 you must configure and provision media bay modules MBM using Dynamic Device Configuration DDC For more information about DDC and MBM configuration see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration System NN40170 501 and Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 Trunk Module Parameters The Trunk Module Parameters tab shows the information that is unique to the type of trunk module selected in the main Modules list Fora BCM450 example see the following figure NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 81 Telephony resources configuration Trunk Module Parameters subpanel Details for Module Main MBM 3 Trunk Module Parameters Trunk Port Details Provision Lines Trunktype Ti a Answer timer boo Disconnect timer 460 Clock source iten T1 Parameters CO fail r1a s47A v Interface levels ison v Framing ESF Line coding eszs pl Internal
6. 352 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP subsystem configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The IP Settings define the basic and advanced IP address and DNS configuration for the BCM main unit The panel tabs links provide a general description of each panel and definitions of each panel field Navigation e Configuring general settings page 353 e Viewing the OAM interface page 357 e Static routes configuration page 359 Configuring general settings The General Settings panel displays the following basic IP settings for the BCM main unit e IP settings options e DNS Settings options e MTU option Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt General Settings 2 Click Modify in the IP Settings pane The Modify IP Settings dialog appears 3 Enter the appropriate values in the following fields e Obtain IP address dynamically e IP address e IP subnet mask e Default gateway Click OK If necessary restart your Business Element Manager to reconnect with the BCM End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 353 IP subsystem configuration Configuring DNS Settings options Enter the DNS Settings options for the BCM to obtain domain name informat
7. NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 51 System telephony networking overview DPNSS networking using BCM 450 Private Network Terminating BCM Site C BCM Site A DN 3333 DN 111 Loc 496 Loc 244 DPNSS Loc 563 BCM Site B BCM Site D DN 2222 DN 2229 Loc 668 Extension 2222 eA Loc 848 g The following figure illustrates this example using BCM50 52 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 DPNSS networking using BCM50 Private Network Terminating BCM Site A DN 111 Loc 244 Meridian M DPNSS Loc 563 BCM Site B DN 2222 Loc 668 System telephony networking overview BCM Site C DN 3333 Loc 496 faa O BCM Site D h DN 2229 Extension 2222 Loc 848 F 0 AES S Calls are dialed and identified to the system as follows e To reach a telephone inside the Private Network atthe BCM site the user dials the DN of choice e To reach a telephone inside the Private Network from another site the user dials HLC DN To reach a telephone outside the Private Network the user dials an Access Code HLC DN e Each node has its own destination dest code which includes the appropriate access and HLC codes to route the call appropriately NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 53 System telephony netwo
8. Default H node Lease time s lt numeric string gt The amount of time before a DHCP lease expires and the device must request a new IP address Default 604800 seconds 184 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BCM DHCP overview IP Terminal DHCP Options tab The IP Terminal DHCP Options settings must be enabled for the IP phones to function properly If the system does not use IP phones or if partial DHCP is enabled this tab does not need to be configured The IP Terminal DHCP Options tab has three subpanels Primary Terminal P roxy Server S1 Secondary Terminal Proxy Server S2 and VLAN Primary Terminal Proxy Server options The Primary Terminal P roxy Server settings specify information that is sent with the DHCP lease giving additional information to IP telephones Secondary Terminal Proxy Server options The Secondary Terminal Proxy Server settings control a fallback option in the event that an IP phone is unable to connect with the Primary Terminal Proxy Server The settings for the Secondary Terminal Proxy Server are the same as those for the Primary Terminal Proxy Server VLAN options If you use a router that supports VLAN you can configure the VLAN IDs that the IP phone should use The system sends this identifier to all IP terminals along with the DHCP information You can also configure a Avaya WLAN handset NN40170 502 Avaya Business Co
9. T1 DID lines configuration DID Direct Inward Dial are lines on a digital ttunk module on a T1 Inbound DID lines are mapped through target lines Prerequisites for T1 DID lines configuration e DTM module is installed and configured e Lines are provisioned 234 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration T1 DID configuration Part A NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 235 Lines configuration T1 DID configuration Part B Subscreen tabs 236 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Configuring T1 DID lines Use the following procedure to configure T1 DID lines Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click on Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt All Lines 2 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel for the following variables e Trunk Type e Name e Control Set e Line Type e Prime Set e Distinct Ring Select a line and click on the Properties tab Configure the trunk line data for the following variables e Dial Mode e Loss Package e Signaling e Line Tuning Digit Click on the Preferences tab Set the preferences for the following variables e Auto privacy e Aux Ringer e ANI Number e Distinct Rings e Voice message center e Redirect To Click on the Restrictions tab Set
10. Attention Voice activity detection on all networked BCMs and IPT systems VAD setting on IPT systems must be consistent to ensure that interacting features such as Transfer and Conference work correctly J itter buffer Auto None Small Medium Large Default Auto Select the size of jitter buffer for your system G 729 payload size ms 10 20 30 40 50 60 Default 30 G 723 payload size ms 30 G 711 payload size ms 10 20 30 40 50 60 Default 30 Assign the maximum required payload size for each codec for the IP calls sentover H 323 trunks As well the Payload size on the IPT must match For H 323 endpoints the suggested payload size is 30 ms Networks that support a mix of SIP and H 323 have less interoperability issues if both protocols use the same payload size Attention Payload size can also be set for Avaya IP Deskphones Incremental payload size lt check box gt If you select the check box the system advertises a variable payload size 40 30 20 10 ms NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 133 IP VoIP trunk configuration H323 Media Parameters field descriptions Attribute Value Description Enable T 38 fax lt check box gt If you select the check box the system supports T 38 fax over IP Attention Fax tones that broadcast through a Attention telephone speaker may disrupt
11. From the Business Name drop down list select the previously configured business name you want to associate with this DN NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 265 Calling line identification configuration Configuring Long Names to telephones Complete this procedure to assign a Long Name to the configured Business Names for CLID for a specific DN Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences 2 In the Capabilities and Preferences tab select the DN for which you want to associate a Long Name with a Business Name The Details for DN panel appears for the DN you selected In the Preferences tab for the selected DN go to the Long Name field In the Long Name field type the Long Name you want to associate with the Business Name you assigned to the DN End CLID configuration for outgoing calls Telephones can transmit a business name telephone name and number outgoing line identifier for outgoing calls over trunks to switches that support outgoing name and number ONN display or between telephones within the system This following describes where you configure these capabilities CLID configuration for outgoing calls navigation e Configuring a business name for outgoing CLID display page 267 e Displaying the internal name and extension page 267 e Setting internal CLID displa
12. The local NAT compensation options are common to all ITSPs However you enable local NAT compensation on an ITSP by ITSP basis as required Once local NAT compensation is configured and enabled the BCM crafts all outgoing requests and responses with the public IP address and portin both SIP headers and the body Specifically the private SIP addresses are changed to the public IP address in the following SIP headers e From e P Asserted Identity PAI e Via To find the local NAT compensation options in Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt Global Settings These settings apply to all ITSP accounts for which NAT compensation is enabled For the corresponding procedure see Configuring local NAT compensation page 306 To enable local NAT compensation for a particular ITSP select the Enable NAT Compensation and media anchoring parameter when you configure the ITSP account Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Public gt Accounts For the corresponding procedure see Configuring an ITSP account page 305 116 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration The Global Settings options are listed and described in the following table SIP Public Global Settings NAT compensation Option Description Discovered Public Address Address Discovery Flag When checked this read o
13. AND MAC AND protocol values in a source field of the IP packet matching values defined in the row Dst capture IP packets with IP addr AND Port AND MAC AND protocol values in a destination field of the packet matching values defined in the row Any capture IP packets with IPaddr AND Port AND MAC AND protocol values in either source or destination fields of the packet matching values defined in the row Port Scope The scope of the port The available options are Single or Range Addr Scope Function The Function attribute in this table defines if the rule presented in this row must be AND d or OR d to resulting equation NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 415 Configuring LAN packet IP capture Modifying a filter Use the following procedure to modify filter options Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Administration gt Utilities gt LAN IP Capture The LAN IP Capture panel appears Select the Filters tab From the LAN IP Capture area click Modify The Modify a VLAN dialog box appears 4 Configure the attributes Click OK End 416 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring LAN packet IP capture Variable definitions Variable Value Protocol The protocol used to capture packets The options available are Ethernet IP TC
14. Destination code public DNs 3 Node B 0 392 Node B 3 Node B 0 395 Node E 5 Node C 0 393 Node C 34 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview Node A destination code table internal termination Route Absorb length Destination code public DNs 5 Node C 0 394 Node D 5 Node C 0 396 Node F Node C destination code table external termination Route Absorb length Destination code public DNs 3 Node B 0 91613764 Node D 3 Node B 0 91613766 Node F 4 PSTN 1 9161376 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 916137 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 91613 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 9161 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 916 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 91 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 9 not internal network This wild card represents a single digit Node C destination code table internal termination Route Absorb length Destination code public DNs 3 Node D 0 394 Node D 3 Node D 0 396 Node F 5 Node A 0 391 Node A 5 Node A 0 392 Node B 5 Node A 0 395 Node E Understanding Avaya Voice Networking MCDN network features When you connect your Avaya BCM systems through PRI SL 1 ETSI QSIG DPNSS or VoIP trunks and activate the MCDN protocol yo
15. Disable REFER Check box Select the check box to disable the support of REFER Disable replaces Check box Select the check box to disable replaces Disable maddr in Check box Select the check box to disable the use of maddr at the c system level ontact Disable OPTIONS Check box Select the check box to disable OPTIONS Caps Caps Session timer Session refresh Disable Select the session timer refresh method from the method UPDATE drop down list INVITE RFC2833 Dynamic payload 0 to 120 This setting is used for DTMF handling using RFC2833 Choose the setting that you need for your system The default setting is 120 Assign 0 to disable RF C2833 functionality on the BCM SIP proxy The SIP Proxy subpanel Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Proxy provides the data used in SIP message headers and provides the actual SIP Proxy server used to route SIP calls On the Outbound Proxy subpanel you can configure a group of outbound proxy servers that provide proxy failover services 120 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration With SIP proxy failover the BCM has a group of SIP proxy servers that provide load balancing of proxy use and detection of non responsive proxies Each proxy is given a weight An outgoing call is directed to one of the proxy servers in the group according to its weight A setting
16. If the checkbox is selected then private SIP trunk routes are not listed in the Call Routing Summary table All private SIP trunk routes are listed in the private SIP Routing Table Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Routing Table Private SIP proxy options are configured at Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private IP trunk settings The following table describes the fields on the IP Trunk Settings panel Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt General gt IP Trunk Settings For the corresponding procedure see Configuring IP trunk settings page 301 IP Trunk Settings field descriptions Attribute Value Description Forward redirected lt check box gt If selected the system sends the originating set OLI over OLI Default Unselected VoIP trunks when a local call is forwarded over a VolP trunk In addition for SIP trunks if this is selected a Diversion header is also added indicating the OLI of the forwarding set If not selected the system forwards only the CLID of the transferred call Send name display lt check box gt If you select the check box the telephone name is sent with Default Selected outgoing calls to the network 100 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP Trunk Settings IP VoIP trunk configuration field descriptions Attribute Va
17. If you are configuring the account parameters manually enter the SIP domain and select Registration required if the account requires registration If Registration required is selected enter the required information in the SIP username and Password fields Click OK The Confirm Password dialog box appears Reenter the password and click OK Click OK when the Add Account dialog box reappears The Add Account dialog box closes and the new account is added to the list of accounts Select the account From the Details of Account frame under the list of accounts use the Basic and Advanced tabs to review the account parameters If required change the parameters To add a user account click the User Accounts tab Click Add The Add account dialog box appears Enter the parameters for the user Click OK End Configuring local NAT compensation Use this procedure to establish local NAT compensation This procedure applies to public SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information and options provided under Local NAT compensation page 116 Procedure steps Step 1 2 Action Navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt General Settings In the Public Network pane click Modify The Discovery Setting dialog box appears 306 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring IP trunks 3 To manually configure the BCM wi
18. You can assign a single device to a loop or multiple devices connected through an NT 1 interface e You can assign a maximum of eight devices to a loop e Any device can only be configured to one loop e S loops do not supply any voltage for ISDN devices requiring power such as video cameras Voltage for these devices must be supplied by an external source on the S loop For detailed descriptions of the BRI module fields refer to BRI ISDN loop properties overview page 147 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 257 BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices programming Procedure steps Step Action 1 On the top panel identify the loop as an S loop Refer to Loop type and general parameters page 148 e Sampling e ONN block state 2 On the bottom panel identify which ISDN DNs to associate to the loop DNs 597 694 additional DNs 565 597 change type to ISDN e Assigned DNs e Loop DN must be on the Assigned DN list If you set this field to None unanswered calls are dropped If the field is left blank Assigned DNs make and receive data calls 3 Configure the ISDN DN records for the devices assigned to the loop See Configuring an ISDN telephone DN record page 258 End Configuring an ISDN telephone DN record ISDN telephones and devices have a limited feature set They do not have programmable buttons or user preferences and do not support call forward feature
19. e Line Type define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure it is put into Bloc A to F e Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None e Pub Received Not applicable e Priv Received Not applicable e Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Configure the trunk line data In the top panel ensure a loop trunk is selected In the bottom panel select the Preferences tab e Aux ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer On the bottom panel under the Restrictions tab e Use remote package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part of a private network ensure you specify a valid remote package Assign the restriction and remote restrictions scheduling Restrictions tab e Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls e Remote Restrictions Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks End 302 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring IP trunks
20. password Force Firmware This button downloads the firmware from the system to the selected telephone Download Deregister Click this button to deregister the selected telephone NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 95 Telephony resources configuration 96 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 It provides conceptual information for IP also referred to as voice over IP or VoIP trunk configuration using the Business Element Manager For the corresponding IP trunk configuration procedures themselves see Configuring IP trunks page 301 Navigation e Introduction to IP trunk configuration page 97 e Local gateway page 98 e Remote gateway page 98 e Options common to all IP trunks page 99 e SIP trunks options common to public and private SIP trunks page 101 e SIP trunks public trunk configuration page 106 e SIP trunks private trunk configuration page 118 e H 323 trunks page 127 Introduction to IP trunk configuration The concept of a trunk in a circuit switched network is well understood A trunk is a physical circuit between two telephone exchanges as compared to a local loop which is a circuit between a telephone exchange and an i
21. 260 460 or 600 Loop T1 ne milliseconds Specify the duration of an Open Switch Interval OS before a call on a supervised external line is considered disconnected This setting must match the setting for the line at the central office CO You must enable disconnect supervision by changing the Line Trunk mode attribute Under the Telephony Services sub heading choose Lines and Line trunk Data Clock Source Primary External T1 PRI BRI T DASS2 Secondary External Internal Designates whether the DTM BRI acts as a primary or secondary timing component for an external timing source or as the internal timing source Attention A BRI module can be programmed with primary secondary clock source however itis recommended that a BR module always be set to Internal ifa DTM exists on the system to be the Primary External clock source Attention Changing the clock source may disconnect calls If you change the clock source for your system you may cause your system DTM interface s to reset resulting in dropped calls Choose a suitable time to change the clock source and use the Page feature to inform users of possible service disruptions Send Name Display Select or clear PRI BRI QSIG When you select this check box the system sends a specified outgoing name display OLI from the calling telephone Appears only for Protocols SL 1 NI DMS 100 DMS 250 or PRI QSIG Remote Capability MWI M1 Embark
22. 4 Click on Send Name Display check box to deselect the field The Send Name Display check box is selected by default End Blocking outgoing name display at the telephone level Outgoing name display can be enabled and disabled from a telephone on a per call basis using Feature 819 For Feature 819 to work correctly you may need to specify an ONN blocking service code The BCM alerts the CO by two methods The method used depends on the type of trunk involved in placing the outgoing call This information is supplied by your service provider Analog trunks use a dialing digit sequence called a Vertical Service Code VSC The VSC differs from region to region and must be programmed Analog trunks with both tone and pulse dialing trunks can have separate VSCs PRI trunks have only one VSC No Specific system programming is required 268 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Calling line identification configuration ETSI note ETSI lines may use the Calling Line Information Restriction CLIR supplementary service to provide this feature ETSI PRI lines do not use a VSC The line always uses Suppression bit to invoke the CLIR supplementary service You can set BRI trunks to either provide ONN using a suppression bit which provides a notice from the system to the central office to withhold CLI or to provide ONN using a VSC which is dialed out in front of the dialed digits o
23. Codec rates reference RTP over IP Payload Packets Overhead Total bytes Bandwidth Overhead Latency bytes frame bytes bytes s msec 640 8 58 698 69800 9 06 80 720 9 58 778 69156 8 06 90 800 10 58 858 68640 7 25 100 G 723 24 3 58 82 21867 173 33 30 20 3 58 78 20800 160 00 30 These are the default values 442 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010
24. IDPX DSM PRI Use this setting to indicate MWI compatibility on the specific loop s that you are using to connect to the central voice mail system on a Meridian 1 that has the MWI package installed with the RCAP setting set to MWI Appears only for SL 1 protocol Host node M1 Embark IDPX DSM DNPSS DPNSS cards connected to E mbark switches have a different way of handling call diversion therefore when you provision a DTM for DPNSS you must indicate what type of switch the lines are connected to When you select the E mbark switch calls are diverted using the Call Forwarding feature instead of call diversion 84 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony resources configuration Module parameters values Attributes Value Module line type Local Number Length DNPSS This number allows the system to determine how many digits to read on an incoming call to determine that the call is meant for this system Maximum Transits Default 31 PRI Indicate the maximum number of times that a call will be transferred within the SL 1 network before the call is dropped Protocol must be set to SL 1 to display this field T1 parameters CO Fail T1 PRI Specify a carrier failure standard T1A 5474 TR62411 Interface levels ISDN PSTN T1 PRI Define a loss plan setting For more information see Interf
25. Procedure job aid A telephone does not show that external voice messages are waiting unless you enable VMSG set the lines assigned to each telephone under Line Assignment Analog telephones connected to an GASM can receive message waiting indicators if the analog line supports CLID MWI indicator settings for analog telephones or for analog telephones attached to ATA2s are set under the ATA heading You can program up to five voice message center numbers but many systems require only one 296 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Centralized voice mail configuration Configuring call forward to voice mail Use this procedure to configure call forward to voice mail Procedure steps Step 1 O ON OD a FF OMD Action Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the Details for DN subpanel select the Allow redirect check box Click the Line Access tab Double click the Fwd No Answer field Enter the voice mail DN Double click the Fwd Busy field Enter the voice mail DN Repeat the previous steps for each of DN you want to call forward to voice mail End Configuring a PRI connection MCDN is supported over a PRI SL 1 line or VoIP trunks between your BCM and other systems such as Meridian 1 or Avaya Business Communications Manager systems The following describes the specific programming for remote voic
26. The ITSP Comments tab shows any comments added against the ITSP user account NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 115 IP VoIP trunk configuration Local NAT compensation When the BCM operates in a network that uses network address translation NAT the inherent issue of SIP and NAT compatibility must be considered Most NAT routers provide some level of SIP application layer gateway ALG capabilities to resolve this issue However SIP ALG implementations are not standardized across the industry If the ITSP does not provide Hosted NAT Traversal HNT and you cannot verify that the SIP ALG capabilities of the NAT router are compatible with the BCM then you must configure local NAT compensation on the BCM to resolve the SIP NAT issue If the NAT router that serves the BCM has integrated SIP ALG capabilities these Capabilities must be disabled when the BCM is providing local NAT compensation Local NAT compensation requires support for port forwarding on the NAT router As a minimum it must be possible to forward the SIP signaling port and a range of media UDP ports to the LAN IP address of the BCM Local NAT compensation options are configured by e entering the public IP address of the NAT router or providing the coordinates of the BCM which then uses the STUN protocol to periodically discover the public IP address of the NAT router e providing the public port of the NAT router
27. and does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them Avaya does not guarantee that these links will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages Warranty Avaya provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty In addition Avaya s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com su pport Please note that if you acquired the product from an authorized reseller the warranty is provided to you by said reseller and not by Avaya Licenses THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE HTTP SUPPORT AVAYA COM LICENSEINFO ARE APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS USES AND OR INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER AS APPLICABLE UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING AVAYA DOES NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER AND AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE BY INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE
28. as required 10 Assign the pool to any telephones you want to allow to use this line 11 Program target lines and assign to telephones 12 Setup the voice mail DN for the system that is being used as the host voice mail system for your network 13 Test the link 14 Refer to the Call Pilot Manager documentation to set up the mailboxes or auto attendant features and other voice mail parameters 298 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System setup configuration for centralized voice mail The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 MCDN is supported over a PRI SL 1 line or VoIP trunks between your BCM50 and other systems such as Meridian 1 or Avaya Business Communications Manager systems The following describes the specific programming for remote voice mail over PRI lines Apart from line configuration MCDN over VoIP has the same system configuration Configuring the PRI connection for voice mail Use the following procedure to configure the PRI connection for voice mail Procedure steps Step 1 10 11 12 13 Action Ensure that the remote voice mail system is set up to accommodate your system on the network Ensure that your dialing plan coordinates with what the other nodes on the network are using Select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan
29. conference If the chairperson does not join within this time frame the system disconnects the participant Maximum conference continuation time min lt 1 999 gt Default 120 minutes This attribute works with the Allow Continue option in the chairperson s COS If the Allow Continue option is enabled the Maximum Conference Continuation Time limits the amount of time that system resources are used after the chairperson leaves the conference When this limit expires the system gives participants a 1 minute warning and then disconnects them If the Allow Continue option is disabled the conference ends when the chairperson leaves the conference Maximum conference limit time hrs lt 1 24 gt Default 12 This attribute limits the amount of time that system resources are used continuously for a single conference This limit prevents a conference from going on indefinitely if multiple abandoned lines exist The limit should be assigned to a reasonable time frame for BCM conferences When this limit expires the system gives participants a 1 minute warning and then disconnects them 338 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Meet Me Conferencing configuration Attribute Value Description Maximum last participant limit time min lt 1 120 gt Default 20 minutes This attribute limits the amount of time that system resour
30. gt Private Network Enter the network system identifier the Meridian system administrator supplied between 1 and 127 if you are networked with a Meridian 1 somewhere in the network select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network panel gt Private network type Installa DTM module to connect to the appropriate PRI SL 1 trunk or enter the keycode for the required number of VoIP trunks Configure the lines you plan to use assigning them to the same line pool Enter the MCDN keycode Choose the MCDN network features that you want to use Select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network Set up routing to target the PRI or VoIP line pool you set up Set up your dialing plan to recognize the network system identifiers of the other nodes on the system so your system can pass them along as required Assign the pool to any telephones you want to allow to use this line Program target lines and assign to telephones Setup the voice mail DN for the system that is being used as the host voice mail system for your network Test the link NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 299 System setup configuration for centralized voice mail 14 Refer to the Call Pilot Manager documentation to set up the mailboxes or auto attendant features and other voice mail parameters 300 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Co
31. programming This feature is located in the Business Element Manager under Configuration gt Applications gt Voice Messaging C ontact Center Line job aids See the following additional information Line pool configuration Line pools are groups of lines Pooling lines allows you to use fewer lines than there are users PRI lines and VoIP lines are always defined into line pools e Line pools must never contain a mixture of lines All lines in a given line pool should go to the same location NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 73 Lines overview e Avoid putting unsupervised loop start lines in a line pool These lines can become unusable especially when a remote user uses the line pool to make an external call e To assign line pool access to telephones select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Line Pools e To assign system wide line pool access codes select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt General not applicable to Bloc pools e A telephone can be administered to search automatically for an idle line from several lines that appear on the telephone Assign a line pool as the prime line When the user lifts the receiver or presses Handsfree any one of the lines if idle can be selected by Automatic Outgoing Line selection e Changes in the settings for trunk type on a system thatis in use can resultin dropped calls e When assigning lin
32. s conference is in progress the conference terminates immediately Procedure job aid COS Default Settings COS ID Name Max Allow Quick Allow Allow Conference Conference Start Continue Announce Language Size Off 1 Name 4 X a fa Primary 2 Name 4 ne Rs Alternate 3 Name 4 _ X 3 Primary 4 Name 4 ues ne X Alternate 5 Name 6 Abe as Primary 6 Name 6 X 7 on Alternate 7 Name 6 X T Primary 8 Name 6 _ b X Alternate 9 Name 8 _ E o Primary 10 Name 8 X 2a TS Alternate 11 Name 8 ED X 7 Primary 12 Name 8 Aa E X Alternate 13 Name 10 t WE EF Primary 14 Name 10 X TE a Alternate NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 343 Meet Me Conferencing configuration COS Default Settings COS ID Name Max Allow Quick Allow Allow Conference Conference Start Continue Announce __ Language Size Off 15 Name 10 Me X a Primary 16 Name 10 es Lee X Alternate Configuring the chairperson COS Complete this procedure to assign a new CoS to the conference chairperson Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access 2 Click the DN to change 3 Click the Meet Me Conferencing tab in the bottom panel 4 Click the Class of Service list 5 Select a new COS value The chairperson has a new COS End Resetting
33. transmit information using the D channel of the BRI line while the B channels of the BRI line remain available for voice and data calls A special adapter links transaction equipment such as cash registers credit card verification rigs and point of sale terminals to the X 25 network which is a data communications network designed to transmit information in the form of small data packets To support the D packet service your ISDN network and financial institution must be equipped with a D packet handler To convert the protocol used by the transaction equipment to the X 25 protocol your ISDN network must also be equipped with an integrated X 25 PAD which works with the following versions of X 25 Datapac 32011 CCITT T3POS ITT and API The ISDN service package you order must include D packet service for example Package P in the United States Microlink with D channel in Canada Your service provider supplies a Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI and DN to support D packet service The TEI is a number between 00 and 63 in Canada the default range is 21 63 Your service provider may also supply you with a DN to program your D packet device The DN for D packet service becomes part of the dialing string used by the D packet to call the packet handler Service provider features BCM supports the following ISDN services and features offered by ISDN service providers e D channel packet service BRI only to support devices such as tran
34. you must select the type of switch DPNSS will be connecting to when you do module programming Before you program Call Forwarding ensure that e Both real channels and virtual channels are provisioned e Destination or line pool codes are programmed for the DPNSS to Embark link Also during programming for Call Forward No Answer and Call Forward on Busy when you enter the Forward to digits the system does a validation check with the switch on the number Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access DPNSS 1 features DPNSS features page 44 lists available features that can be programmed over DPNSS lines DPNSS features Feature BCM450 BCM50 Three party service supported supported Conference calls supported not supported Diversion feature supported Supported Redirection feature supported supported Executive intrusion Supported supported Call offer supported supported 44 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview DPNSS features Feature BCM450 BCM50 Route optimization supported supported Loop avoidance supported supported Message Waiting Indication not supported supported The following parameters can be configured for DPNNS 1 lines e Line type Prime set e CLID set e Auto privacy e Answer mode e Auxiliary ringer e Full autohold Some features are transparent to the user bu
35. 2010 Firewall configuration resources The information in this chapter applies to the BCM50 only Firewall configuration page 373 shows the port configurations that must be allowed on a firewall for the BCM50 to function properly Firewall configuration Port Type Description 5989 TCP Required for running Business Element Manager across a firewall 25 TCP SMTP used for Unified Messaging 143 TCP IMAP used for Unified Messaging 161 UDP SNMP management 162 UDP SNMP traps 389 TCP LDAP used for Unified Messaging 1222 TCP LAN CTE client traffic 1718 TCP H 323 signaling traffic 1719 TCP H 323 signaling traffic 1720 TCP H 323 signaling traffic 5000 UDP QoS monitor probe packets 5060 UDP SIP traffic 7000 UDP Unistim IP set signaling traffic 20000 20255 UDP Voice Path for IP telephony which is used when 28000 range is unavailable 28000 28255 UDP Voice Path for IP trunks NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 373 Firewall configuration resources 374 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dial up resources configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 On the Dial out Interfaces panel you can add configure and control the connection status of both ISDN and Modem dial out interfaces These
36. 30 ms G 711 payload size 10 20 30 40 50 ns 60 Default 20 Upload button Opens a dialogue box to select an IP phone configuration Configuration file and upload it to the BCM system Delete button Opens a dialogue box to select a previously uploaded IP Configuration phone configuration file and delete it NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 93 Telephony resources configuration IP telephone set details After a Avaya 1120 1140 or 20xx IP Deskphones registers with the system this panel displays the terminal parameters The telephone is identified to the system by its IP address so this cannot be changed If you need to change the IP address of a telephone you need to deregister the telephone and then register it again with the new IP address Fora BCM450 example of the IP Terminal Details subpanel the following figure IP Terminal Details Telephony Resources subpanel IP Terminals Details For Module Internal 214 253 1140E IP Terminal Global Settings IP Terminal Details Default Default Default Reset Hotdesking Password Force Firmware Download Deregister The following table describes the fields on this panel IP Terminal fields descriptions Attribute Value Description IP Address lt read only gt If the telephone is using DHCP or partial DHCP this may vary DN lt DN gt This is the DN
37. 324 Enabling a T 38 fax 324 T 38 fax restrictions 325 SIP fax over G 711 configuration 327 SIP fax over G 711 configuration 327 Verifying codecs in Business Element Manager 327 Enabling fax on an analog set port 328 Enabling SIP G 711 fax 328 Restriction filters configuration 331 Configuring restriction filters and exceptions 331 Meet Me Conferencing configuration 335 Conference bridges management 336 Viewing the conference bridges table 336 Configuring CoS in the conference bridges table 336 Class of service and system settings for Meet Me Conferencing configuration 337 Configuring COS for Meet Me Conferencing 337 Chairperson settings configuration 340 Setting up a conference bridge fora chair 341 Configuring the chairpersonCOS 344 Resetting the chairperson s PIN 344 Removing conference privileges from a chairperson 344 Port Ranges configuration 347 RTP over UDP portranges management 348 Adding new RTP over UDP portranges 348 10 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Contents Modifying RTP overUDP portranges 349 Deleting RTP over UDP portranges 349 UDP portranges management 349 Adding new UDP portranges 349 Modifying UDP portranges 350 Deleting UDP portranges 350 Displaying signalling portranges 350 Class of service password configuration for remote access 351 Adding or modifying class of service password values 351 IP subsystem configuration 353 Configuring general settings 3
38. 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 255 BRI T loops configuration 256 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices programming The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 BRI modules support both trunk and station telephone services The following describes the process for configuring station device S loops which support devices that use an ISDN interface You can assign a single device to a loop or multiple devices connected through an NT 1 interface For more information about planning and prerequisites information for programming BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 The following paths indicate where to configure loops through Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Business Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Loops e Telset interface CONFIG gt Hardware gt Module gt TrunkMod gt BRI X gt Loop XXX Navigation e Setting BRI properties for ISDN device connections page 257 e Configuring an ISDN telephone DN record page 258 Setting BRI properties for ISDN device connections BRI S loops support devices that use an ISDN interface See ISDN reference page 427
39. A cold start restores the default filters Filters 02 03 and 04 although not preset with restrictions and overrides are the default filters in the following programming headings NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 193 Call security and remote access overview Default filters for program headings Filter Heading Subheading 02 System DNs Set restrictions 03 Lines Line restriction 04 Lines Remote restriction Default filters other Two profiles have global overrides which do not appear in Business Element Manager restriction programming and cannot be changed Australia 000 13144A UK 999 112 Restriction filter examples Line and set restrictions are shown in Line Restriction example below and Line restriction example Dialed digits must pass both the remote restriction and the line restriction A remote caller can override these filters by dialing the DISA DN and entering a CoS password In Line Restriction example below a caller using line 001 could only dial long distance numbers to area codes 212 and 718 A caller using line 003 could not dial any long distance numbers A caller using line 005 could dial long distance numbers to area codes 212 718 and 415 Attention To restrict dialing from outside the system once a caller gains remote access apply restriction filters to incoming external lines as remote restrictions
40. Add e Enter the required DN in the DN field NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 295 Centralized voice mail configuration 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 e Click OK e Click the Preferences tab e In the Voice message center field enter the center number of the voice center number that you want to assign to the remote voice mail system Repeat the previous step for all the target lines you want to change To configure the telephone records access the DNs panel select Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs In the All DNs table click the DN you associated with the voice mail target line In the Details for DN subpanel click the Line Assignment tab Add the line number of the target line programmed for the telephone Click Add The Add Line Assignment dialog box appears Enter the Line number Click OK Select the Vmsg Set check box Repeat the previous step for each of the DNs you want to assign to the remote voice mail Attention If you are using H 323 VoIP trunks for central voice mail you need to set the following Ensure that the local gateway protocol is set to CSE based on the version of the satellite systems Ensure that the remote gateways are programmed to route using CDP Ensure that the remote gateway protocols are setto CSE based on the version of the satellite system 18 Repeat for each center you want to identify End
41. Announcement options are Tones and Names only Conf Language lt drop down list The attribute specifies the language of the participant entry and exit and warning voice prompts If assigned Primary the voice prompts play in the Primary language assigned in the voice mail system properties If assigned Alternative the voice prompts play in the Alternative language assigned in the voice mail system properties Chairperson settings configuration Perform the following procedures to configure the conference settings for a chairperson Chairperson settings configuration navigation e Setting up a conference bridge for a chair page 341 e Configuring the chairperson COS page 344 e Resetting the chairperson s PIN page 344 e Removing conference privileges from a chairperson page 344 340 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Meet Me Conferencing configuration Setting up a conference bridge for a chair You create a conference bridge for a chairperson to give one conference participant the privilege to chair conferences Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access 2 Click the DN you want to make into a Conference Bridge 3 Click the Create Meet Me Conferencing tab in the bottom panel Chairperson no conference bridge Active Sets Line Access Capabilities and Preferences Restr
42. Attention You can also use VoIP trunks between some or all of the nodes The setup is the same except that you need to create gateway records for each end of the trunk and routing tables to accommodate the gateway codes or you can configure a gatekeeper For more information see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 Routing for tandem networks In tandem networks each node needs to know how to route calls that do not terminate locally To do this you set up routes for each connecting node by defining destination codes for each route If the node is also connected to the public network the usual routing is required for that connection The following tables show the routing tables for Node A and Node C for external and internal terminating calls Attention The PRI and VoIP trunks are en bloc dialing lines so all dialed digits are collected before being dialed out Node A destination code table external termination Route Absorb length Destination code public DNs 4 PSTN 1 91604 3 Node B 0 91403762 Node B 3 Node B 0 91403765 Node E 4 PSTN 1 9140376 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 914037 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 91403 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 9 not internal network This wild card represents a single digit Node A destination code table internal termination Route Absorb length
43. Attribute Value Description Alias Names If you select Gatekeeper Routed Gatekeeper Resolved or Gatekeeper Routed no RAS for Call Signaling enter one or more alias names for the gateway Alias names are comma delimited and can be one of the following types e E 164 numeric identifier containing digits in the range 0 9 Identified by the keyword TEL Example the BCM is assigned an E 164 and an H 323 Identifier Alias Names TEL 76 NAME bcm10 avaya com e NPI TON also referred to as a PartyNumber alias Similar to E164 except that the keyword indicates the NPI numbering plan identification as well as the TON type of number Identified by one of the following keywords PUB Public Unknown Number PRI Private Unknown Number upp Private Level 1 Regional Number UDP cpe Private Local Number CDP e H 323Identifier alphanumeric strings representing names e mail addresses etc Identified by the keyword NAME Example The BCM is assigned a public dialed number prefix of 76 a private CDP number of 45 and an H 323 Identifier alias Alias Names PUB 76 CDP 45 NAME bcm10 avaya com e H 225 Q 931 CallingP artyNumber NetC entrex gatekeeper The NetCentrex gatekeeper uses the H 225 Q 931 CallingP artyN umber to resolve the call originator for billing purposes This number must then contain a unique prefix or location code that is unique across all endpoints that use the NetCentrex gatekeepe
44. Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 125 IP VoIP trunk configuration SIP Authentication Add Local Account a Add Local Account UserID Password Description SIP Authentication Local Accounts field descriptions Attribute Value Description User ID lt alphanumeric gt The administrator supplies each remote domain with a Maximum 50 unique User ID and Password If the local system challenges incoming calls the remote system must provide the User ID and Password combination Password lt alphanumeric gt The administrator supplies each remote domain with a Maximum 50 unique User ID and Password If the local system challenges incoming calls the remote system must provide the User ID and Password combination Description lt alphanumeric gt Description of remote domain Maximum 50 SIP Authentication Add Remote Account Add Remote Account Realm User ID Password Description 126 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration SIP Authentication Remote Accounts field descriptions Attribute Value Description Realm lt domain gt Remote domain name User ID lt alphanumeric gt The administrator supplies each remote domain with a unique User ID and Password If the local system Maximum 50 i f challenges incoming calls the remote s
45. BCM50 DHCP server configures itself to reserve the following range 177 218 21 200 177 218 21 254 You can use Element Manager to check and change this default The Reserved Addresses table lists IP addresses that are reserved for specific clients These IP addresses can be outside any Included Address Ranges Foran overview of DHCP and the DHCP tabs in Business Element Manager see BCM DHCP overview page 179 DHCP subnets configuration navigation e Configuring shared DHCP settings page 363 e Configuring shared DHCP options page 365 e Adding a new included IP address range page 365 e Deleting a new included address range page 366 e Adding a reserved address page 367 e Deleting a reserved address page 367 Configuring shared DHCP settings Configure shared Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP settings to assign an IP address to the VLAN interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Data Services gt DHCP Server 2 Select the General Settings tab NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 363 DHCP server configuration on BCM main module 3 Configure the shared DHCP attributes 4 Click OK End Variable definitions Variable Value DHCP Server Select Enabled IP Phones Only Enabled All Devices or Disabled from the list IP domain name The domain name of the network Lease time s Speci
46. Configuring the host system to receive central voice mail Use this procedure to configure the host system to receive central voice mail Prerequisites e Private network is setup with MCDN between any nodes thatneed to access voice mail on this system e Allsystems are using the CDP dialing plan and you have set up the correct routing to these systems e Call Pilot Manager or auto attendant is set up and is running for the local system e You have obtained a list of DNs from the remote systems that require mailboxes Procedure steps Step Action 1 Obtain the voice mail DN by pressing FEATURE 985 on a system telephone NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 293 Centralized voice mail configuration 2 If this setting matches the DN scheme for your system dialing plan go to step 3 If this setting does not match the DN scheme for your system dialing plan To access the DNs panel select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt General In the Change DN panel select the Change DN button Enter the Old DN and the New DN Click Ok 3 To access the Target Lines panel select Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Target Lines 4 In the Target Lines table locate the target line to be assigned 5 In the Details for Line subpanel click the Assigned DNs tab 6 Click Add 7 Enter the required DN in the DN field 8 Click OK 9 Setup Call Pilot Manager for voice mai
47. Data main panel for the following variables e Trunk Type e Name e Control Set e Line Type e Prime Set e Distinct Ring Select a line and click on the Properties tab Configure the trunk line data for the following variables e Answer Mode e Use Auxiliary Ringer e Full Autohold e Voice message center Select a line and click on the Restrictions tab Set the restrictions and remote package scheduling using the following variables e Use Remote Package e Line Restrictions 242 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Selecta line and click on the Assigned DNs tab Assign the lines to DNs applicable to manual answer only If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines e Appearance type e VMsg set End Variable definitions Variable Name Value Trunk Type DASS2 Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identity a DN if you are using this line for scheduling Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure itis putinto line pool A to O If you use line pools you also need to configure target lines and assign the target lines to DNs Refer to Target lines configuration page 204 Prime Set If you want the line
48. For H323 only MCDN Protocol Choose the protocol that supplies the required call features None default supplies no feature This setting is dictated by the type of remote system If you use MCDN to interwork with other BCMs ora CS1K choose CSE QoS Monitor Enable this feature if you are using fallback to PSTN lines and the network supports QoS monitoring Tx Threshold Indicate the level of transmission at which the signal must be maintained If the signal falls below this level the call falls back to PSTN Click OK End 308 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring IP trunks Configuring a SIP proxy Use the SIP Proxy panel and the Outbound P roxy Table panel to configure a SIP Proxy This procedure applies to private SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under SIP proxy page 120 Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt SIP Trunks gt Private gt Proxy 2 Choose the settings for your system Domain This is a mandatory setting and is used in message headers user domain If the domain name is the name of the server and DNS is configured the BCM routes calls using this server IP address and Outbound P roxy table should be empty If the domain is a logical domain only or if the network provider requests that calls are routed to a different address then the BCM uses a
49. IP address changes the IP phones eventually detect this and reset themselves if they use DHCP If they are manually configured then each phone must be configured to point to the new BCM IP address They get the new VoIP information from the embedded router which provides them with the new IP address for the BCM Main DHCP Server tabs There are four main DHCP server tabs in Business Element Manager e General Settings tab page 183 e IP Terminal DHCP Options tab page 185 e Primary Terminal Proxy Server options page 185 e Secondary Terminal Proxy Server options page 185 General Settings tab The General Settings tab controls the main DHCP settings including WINS and DNS settings General Settings tab DHCP Server a _ General Settings IP Terminal DHCP Options Address Ranges Lease Info Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router O DHCP serveris Disabled IP domain name Primary DNS IP address Secondary DNS IP address WINS server address WINS node type H node v Lease time s 604800 Attention When you make changes consider doing so ata time that minimizes the effect on users NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 183 BCM DHCP overview General Settings tab field descriptions Attribute Value Description Use DHCP Server on Integrated lt Check box gt Default Selected on When you select this check box you connect to the router car
50. Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 To find the SIP configuration panels in Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking The SIP Trunking panel has four tabs Public Private Global Settings and Media Parameters The Public and Private tabs provide access to configuration options specific to public and private trunks respectively They are described under SIP trunks public trunk configuration page 106 and SIP trunks private trunk configuration page 118 The Settings and Media Parameters tabs provide access to configuration options common to both public and private trunks they are covered here If SIP is enabled once a call is established across a SIP trunk public or private the BCM periodically audits the call state and disconnects the trunk if the call is dropped This ensures accurate billing and prevents network instabilities from locking up BCM SIP trunks For configuration procedures see Configuring IP trunks page 301 and IP trunk fallback configuration page 319 For planning information see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 101 IP VoIP trunk configuration Global settings The following table describes the fields of the Global Settings tab For the corresponding procedure see Configuring SIP settings page 30
51. May 2010 229 Lines configuration T1 Digital Ground Start lines config Part A 230 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration T1 Digital Ground Start lines config Part B Properties screen NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 231 Lines configuration Configuring T1 digital ground start lines Use the following procedure to configure T1 digital ground start lines Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click on Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt All Lines 2 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel for the following variables e Line e Trunk Type e Name e Control Set e Line Type e Prime Set e Distinct Ring Select a line and click on the Preferences tab Set the preferences for the following variables e Auto privacy e Dial Mode e Answer Mode Answer with DISA e Aux Ringer e Redirect To e Voice message center Select a line and click on the Restrictions tab Set the restrictions and remote package scheduling using the following variables e Use remote package e Line restrictions 232 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Selecta line and click on the Assigned DNs tab Assign the lines to DNs applicable to manual answer only If you have configured the DNs and know to which tele
52. Name lt alphanumeric gt Specify the name of the DHCP client Client Description lt alphanumeric gt Specify the description that will help to identify the DHCP client to which this IP address is assigned Add lt button gt Click to add a reserved address Delete lt button gt Click to delete a reserved address Lease Info tab The lease info panel is a read only panel describing the current state of DHCP clients currently using the service The Lease Info panel contains the Customer LAN Lease Info Lease Info tab DHCP Server Customer LAN Lease Info IP Address MAC Address Client Name Lease Start Ci General Settings IP Terminal DHCP Options Address Ranges Lease Info Lease Expiration NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 189 BCM DHCP overview Lease Info tab field descriptions Attribute Value Description IP Address lt read only gt The IP address currently supplied to the client MAC Address lt read only gt The MAC address of the client Client Name lt read only gt The client name if the client was given a name in the Reserved Addresses table Otherwise this field is blank Lease Start lt read only date format The date and time the lease began yyyy mm dd hh mm ss gt Lease Expiration lt read only date format The date and time the lease is set to expire yyyy mm dd
53. Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks Appearance Type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this mustbe set to Ring only Model Avaya 7000 Deskphones supported in Europe only VMsg Set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter DPNSS lines configuration DPNSS trunks are used in all international markets Prerequisites for DPNSS lines configuration e DTM module is installed and configured e Lines are provisioned 244 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration DPNSS line configuration process Part A NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 245 Lines configuration DPNSS line configuration process Part B 246 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Configuring DPNSS lines Use the following procedure to configure DPNSS lines Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click on Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines 2 Confirm
54. Package If this line allows remote call ins ensure that you define a remote package Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Restrictions Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks DN Unique Number Appearance Type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button with indicator otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so you must set this to Ring only Model Avaya 7000 Deskphones are supported in Europe only VMsg Set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter 228 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration T1 digital ground start configuration The following section describes how to configure digital ground Start lines Prerequisites for T1 digital ground start lines configuration DTM module is installed and configured e Lines are provisioned NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony
55. Packet If you want to transmit both voice and data and support D channel packet service order package P However BCM does not support the flexible calling for voice and additional call offering features that are included in package P Multi Line Hunt may be ordered with your package When a telephone number the Network DN in the group of numbers assigned by your service providers is busy the Multi Line Hunt feature connects the call to another telephone number in the group BCM supports the feature only on point to point network connections T loop Check with your service provider for more information about Multi Line Hunt Any of the ISDN packages will allow you to use sub addressing but your ISDN TE must be equipped to use sub addressing for the feature to work Ordering ISDN BRI service outside Canada or the United States Outside Canada or the United States order Euro ISDN PRI or BRI service or both from your service provider Set the BCM equipment to the Euro ISDN protocol Supported ISDN protocols The switch used by your service provider must be running the appropriate protocol software and the correct version of that software to support ISDN PRI and BRI Each protocol is different and supports different services Contact your service provider to make sure that your ISDN connection has the protocol you require NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 439 ISDN reference
56. Resolved All call signaling occurs directly between H 323 endpoints The gatekeeper resolves the phone numbers into IP addresses but the gatekeeper is not involved in call signaling Gatekeeper Routed The system uses a gatekeeper for call setup and control In this method call signaling is directed through the gatekeeper Gatekeeper Routed no RAS Use this setting for a NetCentrex gatekeeper The system routes all calls through the gatekeeper but does not use any of the gatekeeper Registration and Admission Services RAS For more information about configuring the gatekeeper for H 323 trunks see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 If your private network contains a Meridian 1 IPT you cannot use Radvision for a gatekeeper e Call signaling port If any VoIP applications requires non standard call signaling ports enter the port number here If you enter port 0 the system uses the first available port e RAS port If the VoIP application requires a non standard RAS port enter the port number here If you enter port 0 the system uses the first available port e Enable H245 tunneling Select or clear the check box to allow or disallow H 245 messages within H 225 You must restart the VoIP Gateway service for the change to take effect NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 315 Configuring IP trunks Gatekeeper Support Fill out thes
57. Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the interface to connect Select the Enable check box In the IP Address Specification tab specify the remote IP address to which to connect In the top panel click Connect End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 377 Dial up resources configuration Disconnecting an ISDN interface Use the following procedure to disconnect an ISDN interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the interface to disconnect 3 Click Disconnect A confirmation dialog box appears 4 Click Yes End ISDN channel parameters configuration This section provides information about configuring ISDN channel parameters ISDN channel parameters configuration navigation e Configuring parameters for an ISDN channel page 378 e Configuring the ISDN Link Parameters page 379 Configuring parameters for an ISDN channel Use the following procedure to configure the parameters for an ISDN channel Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 Click the ISDN interface to configure 3 Select the Channel Characteristics tab 4 Double click the field to modify 5 Make the necessary changes End 378 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephon
58. Restrictions Assigned DNs Auto privacy IV Answer mode Manual X Full autohold Voice message center 1 Aux ringer Distinct rings in use None Redirect to v The following table defines the fields on this panel and indicates the lines Preferences variable definitions Attribute Value Description Legend Loop analog digital loop GS ground start DID DID E amp M E amp M BRI BRI DPNSS DPNSS VoIP VoIP TL Target and DASS2 Note PRI fields are all included under the main panel NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 141 Line configuration overview Preferences variable definitions Auto privacy Loop GS DID E amp M BRI VoIP lt check box gt Define whether one BCM50 user can select a line in use at another telephone to join an existing call Refer to Privacy on off by call page 75 FEATURE 83 Full autohold Loop BRI DPNSS VoIP lt check box gt Enables or disables Full autohold When enabled ifa caller selects an idle line but does not dial any digits that line is automatically placed on hold if you then select another line Full autohold is always in place for T1 E amp M trunks because it has no meaning for incoming only T1 DID trunks The default setting should be changed only if Full autohold is required fo
59. SOFTWARE OR AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO YOU ON BEHALF OF YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS YOU AND END USER AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC OR THE APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE AVAYA Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise no use should be made of the Documentation s and Product s provided by Avaya All content in this documentation s and the product s provided by Avaya including the selection arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases You may not modify copy reproduce republish upload post transmit or distribute in any way any content in whole or in part including any code and software Unauthorized reproduction transmission dissemination storage and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information regarding
60. Third Route fields e Define the start stop time as 0100 under the equivalent R outing Services schedule This setting means that the schedule is active 24 hours a day 2 Assign an overflow route usually the most expensive route to the same Destination Code but for the Normal schedule 3 On the Scheduled Services table choose auto for Service Setting and enable Overflow 4 Use a control telephone to activate or override the feature on the telephones on which you want preferred routing to be active End Procedure job aidNotes for multiple routing overflow feature You mustalso ensure that the route correctly absorbs or passes dialed digits so that the number dialed for each line is the same from the user perspective When a user dials and the telephone cannotaccess the preferred line First Route the system tries each successive defined route Second Route then Third Route If none of these routes have available lines the call reverts to the Normal mode When the call switches from the preferred routing mode First Route Second Route Third Route to Normal mode the telephone display flashes an expensive route warning Overflow routing directs calls using alternate line pools A call can be affected by different line filters when itis handled by overflow routing VoIP trunking uses a similar process for setting up fallback from the VoIP trunk to a PSTN line 278 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Con
61. VLAN tag when it is sent out from the DHCP server However a VLAN tag is added to the packet at the switch port The packets are untagged at the port of the IP phone NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 167 VLAN overview 168 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Professional call recording The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The professional call recording feature records a call from the time that you request to record the call until the call ends The feature supports recording a conference call hosted or joined by a DN Overview This feature does notallow voice and tone prompt to parties involved on a call during establishment of recording session This feature allows recording of established calls on BCM It supports multiple simultaneous recording of the same call A maximum of 80 concurrent recording sessions are supported for BCM450 6 0 with CEC and maximum of 40 concurrent recording sessions are supported for BCM450 6 0 without CEC subject to engineering considerations A maximum of 16 concurrent recording sessions are supported for BCM50 6 0 This feature supports recording of faxes Faxes are treated as voice calls and recorded as audio You need to buy a minimum of one Professional Call Recordi
62. access the user will have to system features Variable definitions End Filter lt plus a two digit user filter gt Attribute Value Description Cos lt CoS 00 CoS 99 gt Enter a combination of numbers that the user needs Read only to dial to get into the system Password lt six digits gt An IP address specifying the lowest IP address ina range Set Restriction Filter None Assign a restriction filter to a Class of Service password The user filter associated with the Class of Service password replaces any normally applicable set restriction line set restriction and remote restriction The defaultsetting None means thatany normally applicable filters set restriction line set restriction or remote restriction still apply Line Restriction Filter None Filter lt plus a two digit line filter gt Assign a specific line restriction to a Class of Service password The line filter associated with the Class of Service password replaces any normally applicable line restriction The default setting None means that any normally applicable line filter still applies Remote Packages None Package lt plus a two digit remote package gt Remote access packages are assigned to lines and class of service CoS passwords Lines used for private networking need remote access packages because calls coming from other nodes on the network are considered remote call ins by your system
63. also ensure that your PSTN fallback line is a PRI SL 1 line to maintain MCDN features on the network Prerequisites for VoIP MCDN network fallback configuration e Dialing plan is configured e MCDN and IP telephony keycodes are installed e M1 must be version 3 0 or newer e M1 and BCM ESN programming must be compatible Configuring the Meridian 1 ina BCM network Use version 3 0 or a newer version of the IPT Ensure that the M1 ESN programming CDP UDP is compatible For more information refer to your M1 documentation NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 283 Private networking Fallback configuration over a VoIP MCDN network Procedure steps Step Action 1 Set up outgoing call configuration for the VoIP gateway 2 Set up a remote gateway for the Meridian 1 3 Ensure the dialing rules CDP or UDP are compatible with the M1 4 Configure the PSTN fallback and enable QoS on both systems 5 If target lines are not already been set up configure the telephones to receive incoming calls through target lines End Procedure job aid The following figure shows an example M1 to BCM450 network diagram M1 to BCM450 network diagram Head Office Warehouse M1 IPT Meridian BCM450 telephone E fal fallback HHE route er K System telephone Intranet VolP trunk Router Router Company server 2004 IP telephone 284 NN40170 502
64. assign an ISDN interface for WAN failover Procedure steps Step Action 1 Create and enable an ISDN interface See Adding an ISDN interface page 376 2 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Global Settings 3 From the Failover interface list select the interface to configure as a WAN backup 4 Click Add on the ISDN Dial Out Line Pool Access subpanel The Add Line Pool dialog box appears 396 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dial up resources configuration Enter a logical name for the interface in the interface name field Enter a line pool the ISDN interface can use to dial out Click OK End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 397 Dial up resources configuration 398 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring virtual LANs The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 This chapter describes how to add modify and delete virtual local area networks VLAN as well as how to add delete and modify ports on a VLAN Navigation e Configure the default gateway IP address page 400 e Configuring LAN interfaces page 400 e Adding a VLAN page 401 e Deleting a VLAN page 402 e Modifying a VLAN page 403 e Adding ports
65. bit When you activate ONN a usercan press FEATURE 819 to block the Service code outgoing name and number on a per call basis Programming note Ensure that all telephones that have this feature available are assigned valid OLI numbers Refer to Programming outgoing number display OLI on page 213 148 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 T loop general settings BRI ISDN loop properties overview The Settings tab allows you to define loop characteristics Note that not all of these settings are required in all BRI markets The following figure illustrates the Settings tab Settings subpanel T loops Details For Loop 301 Settings Clock source Protocol type Overlap receiving Internal S T user v 5 T user The following table describes the fields on this panel Loops subpanel T loops parameter values Attribute Value Description Clock source Primary External Secondary External Internal Default Internal Loop Primary External uses clock from PSTN Secondary External used if system has more than one Internal uses clock on BCM Protocol Type S T user T T user Default S T user When set to S T user the BRI connection to the public network is treated like a line which appears ona set and is the termination end point for the call Key system model When set to T T user the BRI connection to the p
66. call will be blocked at the PBX system and cleared back to the network This prevents calls from creating loops that tie up lines The following figure illustrates how a call might loop through a network if the BCM450 is not set up with ICCL NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 37 System telephony networking overview Call loop on BCM450 without ICCL Meridian 1 Meridian 1 The figure demonstrates how a call might loop through a network if the BCM50 is not set up with ICCL Call loop on BCM50 without ICCL Meridian 1 Trunk Route Optimization Trunk Route Optimization TRO finds the most direct route through the network to send a call between nodes This function occurs during the initial alerting phase of a call 38 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview To set Avaya BCM configurations e Select Configuration gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network and select the check box beside TRO in the MCDN pane e Configure call routing for all optimal routes e Configure call forward All Calls No Answer Busy or Selective Line Redirection to use the optimal routes This feature avoids the following situation A call originating from a Avaya BCM system may be networked to a Meridian system which in turn is networked to another Meridian system which is th
67. calls and restarts FEPS 3 Select the check box to disable the support of PRACK Status lt read only gt Indicates the status of the gateway for example Gateway is running DTMF handling using RFC2833 RF C2833 is an in band mechanism for DTMF signaling This feature enables the BCM SIP gateway to send and receive DTMF using RFC2833 RF C2833 is the only mechanism for reliable DTMF signaling in SIP No standard out of band signaling exists Traditional in band signaling DTMF as a voice is reliable for G 711 only NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 103 IP VoIP trunk configuration Some limitations and restrictions to this feature apply e The BCM does not support RF C2833 over H 323 trunks e IP phones do not support long tones e Long tones feature is not supported on H 323 trunks e RFC2833 long tones received from the network are converted into short tones e IP phones do not support RF C2833 detection e SIP trunks do not support military tones A B C and D e The BCM supports a subset of RFC2833 tones and signals specifically DTMF signals for 9 and e The BCM accepts all three signaling methods RFC 2833 Out Of Band DTMF as tone from SIP endpoints The sender must choose only one method for DTMF Signaling to prevent digit duplication SIP media parameters SIP media parameters allow you to specify the order in which the trunk will sel
68. calls at other telephones using IP trunks in the vicinity of the fax machine Here are some suggestions to minimize the possibility of your IP calls being dropped because of fax tone interference Locate the fax machine away from other telephones Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off if that option is available ForceG 711 for3 1k lt check box gt If you select the check box the system forces the IP trunk Audio Default Unselected to use the G 711 codec for 3 1k audio signals such as modem or TTY machines Attention You can use this setting for fax machines if T 38 fax is not enabled on the trunk 134 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Line configuration overview The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 All the Lines panels show the same type of tabbed panels The information on the tabbed panels may vary however depending on the type of line The following paths indicate where to access the lines information in Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Business Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines The top panel provides a table of lines and the current or default settings The bottom frame contains three tabs The contents of the
69. connection Callback Settings Callback retries lt 1 10 gt The number of attempts made by the BCM to dial out to the remote end during callback Default 3 Callback retry lt 0 360 gt Interval for successive connection attempts for dial out during interval s callback Default 60 seconds PPP Configuration These parameters are passed to PPP stack to manage the PPP connection Idle timeout s lt numeric string gt Idle time period after which PPP will terminate the PPP connection Default 1800 seconds 386 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dial up resources configuration Attribute Value Description Maximum receive lt 128 1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that can be received unt Default 500 Maximum lt 128 1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that will be sent Transmit Unit Default 500 Authentication PAP Supported PPP authentication SUPDOLESENEEK CHAP Default CHAP box gt MSCHAP MSCHAPv2 Dial In Settings Assigned Lines Line lt numeric Line number monitored by the modem for incoming calls A value f of 0 blank string gt Range Min Target Line Max Target Line Default blank Calling Number lt numeric Analog modem uses this Calling Number Calling ID CLID to detect an incoming data call string gt Number of rings lt 1 10 gt Number of rings before the BCM red
70. connection Default 10 11 16 16 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 385 Dial up resources configuration Modem dial in parameters configuration The Modem Dial In parameters tab controls dial in to the BCM for remote access Use this panel to configure the modem for dial in It also displays the connection status of the modem if one is in progress Configuring modem dial in parameters Use the following procedure to configure modem dial in parameters Procedure steps Step Action 1 Select Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Modem Dial In Parameters tab select Enable modem dial in 3 Configure the parameters for modem dial in access Refer to the table below for information about each parameter End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description ae modem lt check box gt Enable or disable modem dial in ial in Default disabled Connection State This is a table that shows the current dial in state if connected User lt read only gt Displays the user that is currently dialed in Local IP Address lt read only gt Displays the local IP address assigned to the dial in connection Remote IP lt read only gt Displays the remote IP address of the dial in connection Address Callback lt read only gt Displays if callback is enabled for this dial in connection Status lt read only gt The status of the dial in
71. destination codes then are configured into schedules where the PSTN line is assigned to the Normal schedule and the IP route is assigned to a schedule that can be activated from a control set Prerequisites for fallback configuration of IP trunks e Define a route for the local PSTN for your own system so users can still dial local PSTN numbers e Ensure the PSTN and IP line pools have been configured before you continue with this section e Ensure that the Fallback to circuit switched setting has been enabled for the IP trunks for which fallback is being configured For more information see Global settings page 102 and H 323 settings page 128 Attention If you already have routes for your PSTN or IP line pools configured you do not need to configure new routes unless you cannot match the dialed digits Fallback traffic routes addition Fallback is a feature that allows a call to progress when an IP trunk is unavailable or is not providing adequate quality of service QoS By enabling Fallback to circuit switched also known as PSTN fallback on the H323 Settings or SIP Settings panels you allow the system to check the availability of an IP trunk then switch the call to a PSTN line if the IP trunk is not available For the PSTN fallback to work on a Suitable bandwidth QoS monitor must be enabled and a transmit threshold must be set Fallback traffic routes addition navigation e Adding a PSTN route to a far end system
72. exists in filters 01 02 and 03 it uses up three entries of the 400 entries available e Removing a restriction from a filter has no effect on the contents of other filters even if the restriction was copied to them e You cannot delete a filter Removing the restrictions programmed on a filter makes itan unrestricted filter but the filter itself is not removed 192 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Call security and remote access overview Default filters North America Filter 00 permits unrestricted dialing and cannot be changed Filter 01 is pre programmed with 10 restrictions and some associated overrides In Filter 01 Restriction 02 and Override 001 allow long distance toll free calls The dialing string 911 which is the number for emergency assistance in North America is included as both a restriction and an override in Filter 01 This arrangement prevents anyone from blocking calls for emergency assistance on lines or sets using the default filter Default restriction filters Filter Restrictions Overrides denied 00 Unrestricted dialing 01 01 0 02 1 02 1866 001 1800 002 1877 003 1888 03 911 001 911 04 411 05 976 06 1976 07 1AAA976 01 08 1900 09 1AAA900 10 5551212 02 99 No restrictions or exceptions programmed Attention Default filters are loaded when the system is initialized
73. for applications and on the those applications currently in use Media channels lt read only gt The number of media channels in use on the system This number can change based on the values entered for applications and on the those applications currently in use DSP resources lt read only gt The number of DSP resources in use on the system This number can change based on the values entered for applications and on the those applications currently in use Application Resource Reservations Application lt read only gt The name of the application Minimum lt read only gt The minimum number of resources reserved at all times for the application If a value of 2 is entered the system will always reserve enough resources for 2 instances of the application Maximum lt numeric value gt The maximum number of applications to allow If the value is setto MAX the system will allow up to the system maximum as long as there are enough resources Licence lt read only gt The number of licenses the system has activated for the application If the value is N A the application does not require licenses System Max lt numeric value gt The maximum instances of an application the BCM can support Change Pending lt read only gt If this box is selected a change is pending to the system Most changes take effectimmediately but in some instances a change ma
74. gatekeeper digits the callis routed via H 323 protocol If the digits do not match the call is routed via SIP protocol Normal route None Select None or Prime set If Prime set is selected and the fallback to Prime set outgoing IP trunk leg of the call ina tandem scenario cannot be completed the call will terminate on the prime set for the line Default None MCDN protocol None These protocols require a keycode SL1 SL1 Use this protocol only for BCM 2 5 systems CSE CSE Use this protocol for BCM 3 0 and later systems This protocol supports Meridian 1 IPT Otherwise use None NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 129 IP VoIP trunk configuration H323 Settings field descriptions Attribute Value Description Gatekeeper lt check box gt If you select the check box all dialed digits match wildcard Default Unselected gatekeeper digits and IP calls will be routed through the gatekeeper Configuration Modify lt button gt Click to modify the parameters Attention If you change any field in the Configuration section all active H 323 calls are dropped You must click Modify to restart the H 323 subsystem Call signaling Direct The routing table in Business Element Manager defines a Gatekeeper destination code digits for each remote system to direct Resolved the calls for that system to route Gatekeeper Routed Gatekeeper Resolved The gat
75. hh mm ss gt 190 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Call security and remote access overview The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 System restrictions are required to ensure that your system is used appropriately and not vulnerable to unauthorized use Call security includes e restriction filters which limit outbound call access e remote access packages which limit system call feature access for users calling in over the Private or Public network e Class of Service codes which require remote system users to enter a password before they can access the system CoS passwords also can have restriction filters applied Call security works in conjunction with your dialing plan Defining restriction filters Restriction filters allow you to restrict the numbers that can be dialed on any external line within BCM Up to 100 restriction filters can be created for the system To restrict dialing within the system you can apply restriction filters to e outgoing external lines as line restrictions e telephones as set restrictions e external lines on specific telephones as line set restrictions Restriction filters can also be specified in Restrictions service for times when the system is operating according to a schedule Dialed digits must pass bot
76. invoke DNS If you leave this attribute empty the system uses the Name attribute Port lt 0 65535 gt If Portis 0 the system uses the well known SIP port 5060 Default 0 Otherwise the system uses the Port number you specify here Load balancing lt 0 10 gt Enter the load balancing weight The system uses this Wei Default 1 attribute to distribute calls among the outbound proxies eight Keep alive None This attribute helps the system determine if an Outbound OPTIONS proxy device is responding Default None If you select None the system assumes the device is active and does not ping the device If you select OPTIONS the system sends a periodic OPTIONS message to the Outbound Proxy If the proxy fails to respond the system bypasses the proxy The following table shows the SIP Trunking Timer settings parameters 122 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration SIP Trunking Timer settings parameters Parameter Description Requirement Default Range Value Session refresh The SIP request method used to Optional UPDATE Disabled method refresh the state of the session UPDATE re INVITE Session E xpires The desired session refresh interval Optional 1800 sec 90 sec Note that this interval may be 86400 sec negotiated upward by the remote 24 hours endpoint or any intermediary proxy Min SE The minimum s
77. is the European standard signaling protocol for multi vendor peer to peer communications between PBX systems and or central offices see ETS Euro network services page 42 The figure ETSI QSIG networking using BCM450 page 41 illustrates an ETSI QSIG network using BCM450 Note that this is exactly the same setup as that shown in the MCDN section for North America The hardware programming for ETSI QSIG is described in Hardware programming for branch offices page 42 All other configurations are the same as those shown in the MCDN section for North America 40 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 ETSI QSIG networking using BCM450 Network 2221 Received 2221 Internal 2221 PRI BRI ETSI QSIG PBX BCM West End Branc PRI public protogol Central Office System telephony networking overview Network 6221 Received 6221 Internal 6221 PRI BRI The following figure illustrates an ETSI QSIG network using BCM50 Note that this is exactly the same setup as that shown in the MCDN section for North America The hardware programming for ETSI QSIG is described in Hardware programming for branch offices page 42 All other configurations are the same as those shown in the MCDN section for North America NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 41 System telephony networking overview ETSI QSIG ne
78. modules do not have any configurable module parameters Interface levels The default Interface levels are the ISDN loss plan settings Also refer to ISDN reference page 427 Check with your telecommunications service provider to determine if your BCM system is connected to a central office CO with digital network loss treatment ISDN I F levels or analog network loss treatment PSTN I F levels The ISDN setting requires digital access lines DAL that have digital network loss treatment On a DAL network the PBX system administers the dB loss not the CO DALs may have ISDN signaling or digital signaling for example T1 The loss plan follows the Draft TIA 464 C loss plan which uses a send loudness rating SLR of 8 dB You must contact your service provider to get DAL network loss treatment on a line with digital signaling The PSTN setting requires analog access lines AAL that have analog network loss treatment and digital signaling On an AAL D network the CO administers the dB loss The loss plan follows the Draft TIA 464 C loss plan The ISDN loss plan uses a send loudness rating SLR of 8 dB and a receive loudness rating RLR of 2 dB The PSTN loss plan uses an SLR of 11 dB and an RLR of 3 GB If you choose the wrong setting the voice signal can be too loud or too soft Internal CSU Internal CSU allows you to turn the internal T1 channel service unit on or off The channel service unit gathers performance statistics f
79. on the userpart of the R URI of the Contact match incoming request and makes a match if the ITSP account contains the SIP trunk user count with the matching contact name userpart of R URI in the incoming request The system uses the corresponding SIP trunk user account of the ITSP if a match is found There can be no two SIP trunk user accounts associated with ITSP accounts with the same contact name To header Called The system finds a match based on the userpart of the To header of the Number Contact match incoming request and finds a match if the ITSP account contains the SIP trunk user count with the matching contact name userpart of the To header in the incoming request The system uses the corresponding SIP trunk user account of the ITSP if a match is found There can be no two SIP trunk user accounts associated with ITSP accounts with the same NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 111 IP VoIP trunk configuration User account parameters Parameter Description From header address The system finds a match based on the hostname of the From header DNS match of the incoming request and makes a match if hostname part of the From header is an IP address appearing in the list of IP addresses resolved into the via DNS lookup of the ITSP account SIP domain name The system uses the parent SIP trunk user account of the ITSP ifa match is found Via hea
80. other telephones e Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off Fax tones can be recorded in a voice mail box In the rare event that fax tones are captured in a voice mail message opening that message from a telephone using a VoIP trunk can cause the connection to fail Voice mail and T 38 FoIP share a maximum of eight fax ports Voice mail supports only two fax ports If you allow fax messaging for the local VoIP gateway you must be aware of the guidelines when you send and receive fax messages over VoIP trunks NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 325 T 38 fax configuration Some fax machines cannot send faxes successfully over VoIP T 38 trunks to the following destinations e Call Pilot Manager mailboxes e Call Pilot Manager mailboxes accessed through auto attendant e Fax Transfer calls transferred to a system fax device through the auto attendant Use the following tips to avoid this problem e Avoid using manual dial on the originating fax machine In some fax machines dialing manually results in a much shorter call time out e If you must dial manually wait until the call is answered before you start the fax session e For Mailbox Call Answering only if you must dial manually enter the digit 8 as soon as you hear the mailbox greeting This ensures that Call Pilot Manager initiates the fax session before the fax machine timer starts Not
81. overview Notes about CoS passwords The CoS password can define the set of line pools that may be accessed and whether or not the user has access to the paging feature The class of service CoS that applies to an incoming remote access call is determined by e the filters that you apply to the incoming trunk e the CoS password that the caller used to gain access to BCM e incases where DISA is notautomatically applied to incoming calls the remote caller can change the class of service by dialing the DISA DN and entering a CoS password Remote users can access system lines line pools the Page feature and remote administration The exact facilities available to you through remote access vary depending on how your installer set up your system Attention Ifthe loop start line used for remote access is not Supervised auto answer does not function and the caller hears ringing instead of a stuttered tone or the system dial tone Attention CoS password security and capacity e Determine the CoS passwords for a system randomly and change them on a regular basis e Users should memorize their CoS passwords and keep them private Typically each user has a separate password However several users can share a password or one user can have several passwords e Delete individual CoS passwords or change group passwords when employees leave the company e A system can have a maximum of 100 six digit CoS passwords 00 to 99 To maintain the
82. page 319 e Adding a PSTN route to a local PSTN lines page 320 e Adding the IP route page 320 Adding a PSTN route to a far end system This route defines the PSTN route to the other system Only numbers not otherwise assigned will be allowed by the system NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 319 IP trunk fallback configuration Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Click the Routes tab Click Add The Add Route dialog box appears Type a number between 001 and 999 Click OK Adding a PSTN route to a local PSTN lines i This route defines the PSTN route to your local PSTN Procedure steps Step 1 4 5 Action In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Select the Routes tab Click Add The Add Route dialog box appears In the Route field type a number between 001 and 999 Click OK Adding the IP route This procedure defines the IP route Procedure steps Step 1 Action In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Select the Routes tab Click Add The Add Route dialog box appears In the Route field type a number between 001 and 999 Click OK End 320 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6
83. procedure to configure target lines You can assign target lines to DNs in bulk using the Renumber button Procedure steps Step 1 2 Action Click on Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Target Lines Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel for the following variables e Line e Trunk Type e Name e Control Set e Line Type e Prime Set e Pub Received e Priv Received e Distinct Ring Select a line and click on the Preferences tab Set the preferences for the following variables e Aux Ringer e If Busy e Voice message center e Redirect To Click on the Assigned DNs tab Assign the lines to DNs applicable to manual answer only If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines e DN e Appearance type e Appearances e Caller ID Set e VMsg set OR 208 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration For BCM 450 you can assign target lines to DNs in bulk You can assign target lines to DNs by selecting the Renumber button on the Target Lines table Enter the Attribute Assign Target Lines Begin line number End line number and DN begin value The system automatically assigns target lines to DNs Variable definitions End V
84. record that defines the system parameters for the telephone Device Type lt read only gt This is the type of IP telephone State lt read only gt Indicates if the device is online FW Version lt read only gt Current version of telephone software 94 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony we address 7 DN _Devce type Stato_ _Fwverson codec _ __ ter buffer 207 179 154 135 May 2010 IP Terminal fields descriptions Telephony resources configuration Attribute Value Description Codec Default Specifying a non default Codec for a telephone allows you G 711 aLaw to override the general setting You might for example G 711 uLaw want to specify a low bandwidth Codec G 729 fora G 711 VAD telephone that is on a remote or busy sub net Ca Attention You can change the codec on a configured IP G 729 VAD esas G 723 telephone only if itis online to the system or if Keep DN G 723 VAD Alive is enabled for an offline telephone J itter Buffer Auto Increase the jitter buffer size for any telephone that has Default poor network connectivity to the system None Attention You can only change the jitter buffer on a Small f ee Medi r configured IP telephone if it is online to the system or if Keep DN Alive is enabled for an offline telephone Large Actions Reset Hotdesking Click this button to reset the hotdesking password for a telephone
85. restriction Note The wildcard A Any can be used as part of the dialstring Procedure job aid The following table shows default filters for North America Filter 00 permits unrestricted dialing and cannot be changed Filter 01 is pre programmed with 10 restrictions and some associated overrides In Filter 01 Restriction 02 and Override 001 allow long distance toll free calls The dialing string 911 which is the number for emergency assistance in North America is included as both a restriction and an override in Filter 01 This arrangement prevents anyone from blocking calls for emergency assistance on lines or sets using the default filter Attention Default filters are loaded when the system is initialized A cold start restores the default filters NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 333 Restriction filters configuration Default Restriction Filters for North America Filter Restrictions denied Overrides 00 Unrestricted dialing 01 01 0 02 1 02 1866 001 1800 002 1877 003 1888 03 911 01 911 04 411 05 976 06 1976 07 1AAA976 01 08 1900 09 1AAA900 10 5551212 02 99 No restrictions or exceptions programmed Filters 02 03 and 04 although not preset with restrictions and overrides are the default filters in these programming headings Filter Heading Sub heading 02 Sys
86. routing configurations that are required to support calls over the network Depending on the type of dialing plan you choose each node must also have a unique location or steering code so the calls can be correctly routed through the nodes of the network MCDN networks also require a Private Network ID which is supplied by the Meridian network administrator to define how the Meridian system identifies each node Creating tandem private networks You can tie a number of Avaya BCM systems together with SL 1 lines This tandem network provides you with the benefits of end to end name display and toll free calling over the SL 1 private link Each Avaya BCM system becomes a node in the network In this type of network you must ensure that each Avaya BCM system known as a node of the network is set up to route calls internally as well as to other nodes on the system This means each node must have a route to the immediately adjacent node and the correct codes to distribute the called numbers Each node must have a unique identification number which is determined by the type of dialing plan chosen for the network NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 33 System telephony networking overview Also you can save costs by having a public network connection to only one or two nodes and routing external calls from other nodes out through the local PSTN thus avoiding toll charges for single calls
87. security of your system the following practices are recommended e Warn a person to whom you give the remote access number to keep the number confidential e Change CoS passwords often e Warn a person to whom you give a CoS password to memorize the password and not to write it down Delete the CoS password of a person who leaves your company Attention Remote users can make long distance calls Remember that a remote user can make long distance calls that are charged to your company They can also access line pools and make page announcements in your office External access tones You can hear some of the following tones when accessing BCM from remote location The following table shows the different types of tones and what they mean NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 199 Call security and remote access overview External access tones Tone What it means System dial tone You can use the system without entering a CoS password Stuttered dial tone Enter your CoS password Busy tone You have dialed a busy line pool access code You hear system dial tone again after five seconds Fast busy tone You have done one of the following Entered an incorrect CoS password Y our call disconnects after five seconds e Taken too long while entering a CoS password Y our call disconnects after five seconds e Tried to use a line pool or feature not permitted by you
88. shows a network of three BCM50 systems Two remote systems connect to a central system NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 29 System telephony networking overview Dialing plan for T1 E amp M routing network of BCM50s New York Toronto gt ou Network 22214 Network 62214 OL Received 2221 Received 62219 LIE y Internal 22218 Internal 6221 S gt j 2 Pool N fAVAYA 2 Santa Claraf Network 42214 Received 42214 Internal 42218 Each system must be running Avaya BCM software Each system must be equipped with target lines and a DTM with at least one T1 E amp M line The call appears on the auto answer line on the Avaya BCM in Santa Clara as 6 221 Because 6 is programmed as a destination code for Toronto on the Santa Clara system another call is placed using route 002 from Santa Clara to Toronto At the Toronto system the digits 6 221 are interpreted as a target line Private received number The call now alerts at DN 6221 in Toronto Attention Network calls that use routes are subject to any restriction filters in effect If the telephone used to make a network call has an appearance of a line used by the route the call will move from the intercom button to the Line button The telephone used to make a network call must have access to the line pool used by the route Network calls are external calls even though they are dialed as if th
89. silence Suppression also known as Voice Activity Detection VAD Silence suppression technology identifies the periods of silence in a conversation and stops sending IP speech packets during those periods Telco studies show that in a typical telephone conversation only about 36 to 40 of a full duplex conversation is active When one person talks the other listens This is half duplex There are important periods of silence during speaker pauses between words and phrases By applying silence suppression average bandwidth use is reduced by the same amount This reduction in average bandwidth requirements develops over a 20 to 30 second period as the conversation switches from one direction to another When a voice is being transmitted it uses the full rate or continuous transmission rate The effects of silence suppression on peak bandwidth requirements differ depending on whether the link is half duplex or full duplex NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 421 Silence suppression reference One call on a half duplex link without silence suppression Corversation Hello Fred this is Susan Do you have a minute Ti CBO ihn Conversation Bandwidth used Channel Link max Zs T Tx Ax Chan Bandwidth Voice frames sent even when speaker is silent When silence suppression is enabled voice packets are only sent when a speaker is talking In a typical voice conve
90. specific trunk 276 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dialing plan routing configuration Procedure steps Step Action 1 Create a route that uses the line pool containing the discounted lines for long distance calling 2 Create a destination code record and enter a valid destination code maximum of 12 digits You must use a valid destination code such as 91 9 indicating PSTN 1 indicating a long distance View existing destination codes before entering a new code The destination code can use a different route depending on the Schedule 3 Under the Normal schedule for the destination code enter the route you specified in Step 1 End Configuring a route for a secondary carrier It can be less expensive to use another long distance carrier at a different time of day Continuing with the example used in Figure X the lines that supply local service in normal mode are also used for long distance service after 6 p m because thatis when rates become competitive For the system to do this automatically you must build another route Procedure steps Step Action 1 Create a route for the trunks and assign it to the Normal schedule 2 If all the required numbers are defined in the dial string clear the External Number field Choose the line pool that contains the local service carrier lines 4 Create a destination code and assign the route to the Night schedule In thi
91. the destination code a maximum of seven digits For each HLC a destination code must be programmed in the system Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Networking e a Directory Number DN assigned to each extension as a line appearance The DN appears as the last string segment in a dialed number In the number 244 1111 1111 is the DN 50 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview A typical Private Number using a private access code and dialed from another site on the network appears in the following table Private Access Code Home Location Code Directory Number Calling Party Number 6 848 2222 6 848 2222 In this networking example a private network is formed when several systems are connected through a Meridian 1 and a terminating BCM450 system Each site has its own HLC and a range of DNs The following figure illustrates this example The following table shows examples of the construction of numbers used when dialing within the example network Note that 6 is the Private Access code Calling site LOC HLC Calling party Called site Dialling string Called party number number Site A 244 2441111 Site B 6 688 2222 668 2222 Site B 668 662 2222 Site D 6 848 2222 848 2222 Site C 848 2222 Site D 2229 2229 Site D 496 496 3333 Public DN 9 563 3245 563 3245
92. the restrictions and remote package scheduling using the following variables e Line restrictions e Remote Restrictions 9 Click on the Assigned DNs tab NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 237 Lines configuration 10 Assign the lines to DNs applicable to manual answer only If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines e Appearance type e VMsg set Variable definitions End Variable Name Value Trunk Type T1 DID Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identity a DN if you are using this line for scheduling Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure itis putinto line pool A to O If you use line pools you also need to configure target lines and assign the target lines to DNs Refer to Target lines configuration page 204 Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Dial Mode The line service dictates whether this needs to be setto Pulse or Tone DTMF dialing These are the only two options available Loss Package Signaling Matc
93. the same or different for the channels TEI lt digits gt These entries identify up to eightterminal identifiers for the devices assigned to the S loops Your BRI service provider supplies these numbers if they are required NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 159 BRI T loops overview D packet Service panel parameter values Attribute Value Description Actions Add SPID digits 1 In the top frame click the loop where you want to define D P acket Service 2 In the bottom frame ensure the Enable D packet service check box is selected 3 In the Associated loop field enter a defined S loop 4 Under the TEI table click Add 5 Enter a TEI 6 Click OK 7 Repeat for all the TEIs you want to assign Delete 1 In the top frame click the loop where you want to delete TEI assignments 2 In the bottom frame click the TEI you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 Click OK S loops assigned DNs The Details for Loop panel for S loops allows you to view which device records are assigned to a loop and to add or delete a record from the loop The following figure illustrates the Details for Loop panel Assigned DNs S loops Details for Loop 501 Seltings LeopDN 457 Assigned DNs wey S56 457 Add The following table defines the fields on the Details for Loop panel 160 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manage
94. the system The following paths indicate where to access restriction filter settings in Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Business Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Security gt Restriction Filters e Telset Interface CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets or CONFIG gt Lines Configuring restriction filters and exceptions Restrictions are used to restrict outbound dialing For example restrictions can be applied to restrict dialing 1 900 numbers The restriction filters panel contains three list boxes You progress from left to right as you populate the information The following describes the panels that are used to enter restriction filters and restriction overrides Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Security gt Restriction Filters NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 331 Restriction filters configuration Restriction Filters Panel Restriction Filters Restricted Digits for Filter 01 Restrictions __ Digits Exceptions for Restriction 1 Exceptions Digits 3 If restricted digits have 4 Add exceptions 1 Select a restriction filter fa exceptions select the digit 2 Add restricted digits to the Restriction filter 2 On the Filters table select the number for the Restriction Filter where you want to add filters Under the Restrictions tabl
95. to a VLAN page 403 e Deleting ports from a VLAN page 404 e Modifying ports on a VLAN page 405 e Adding static routes page 405 e Configuring DSCP Marking for Quality of Service page 406 e Viewing DSCP to Avaya Service Code mapping page 407 e Viewing Avaya Service Code to P Bit Mapping page 407 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 399 Configuring virtual LANs Configure the default gateway IP address Configure the default gateway IP address gateway for network connectivity Prerequisites e Configuring general settings page 353 Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem 2 Select the General Settings tab Itis normally selected by default 3 From the IP Settings area configure the Default gateway Enter the default gateway IP address Attention If you change the default gateway you may lose your connection to the Network Element 4 Click OK End Configuring LAN interfaces Variable Value Default gateway The gateway used by the BCM system Published IP interface The IP address used for BCM applications such as SIP H 323 and IP Set server Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem 2 Select the LAN interfaces tab 3 From the LAN Interface Summary select the LAN interface you want to modif
96. to route the call to a direct dial set that you define with an external number Note If you choose Use prime line ensure that prime line is not assigned to the intercom buttons for your telephones When prime line is assigned as an intercom button it chooses the first available line pool assigned to the telephone to make a call If this line pool does not have the correct lines for routing the call the direct dial call will fail For more information see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 273 Dialing plan configuration general 274 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dialing plan routing configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 This chapter describes how you can configure the lines and loops to allow system users to dial out of the system over a public or private network The following paths indicate where to access the route lines and loops in Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration Business Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Telset interface CONFIG gt Services gt Routing Service gt Routes Prerequisites for dialing plan for routing configura
97. to the network Authorized users can access TIE lines central office lines and features from outside the system Remote users accessing a private network configured over a large geographical area can avoid toll charges Attention You cannot program a DISA DN or Auto DN to a VoIP trunk as they actas auto answer trunks from one private network to the next However you can configure VoIP line pools with remote access packages so that callers can access telephones or the local PSTN on remote nodes on a tandemed network that use VoIP trunks between systems Lines used for networking External trunk lines provide the physical connection between Avaya BCM and other systems in a private or public network The BCM50 numbers physical lines from 061 to 124 Default numbering depends on the type and connection to the BCM50 EXP1 EXP2 VoIP trunks Although a VoIP gateway does not use physical lines itis easier to think of them that way BCM450 supports a dynamically configurable number of IP trunk line numbers from 0 to 130 In the BCM50 lines 001 to 012 are used for VoIP trunk functionality NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 27 System telephony networking overview Avaya BCM networking configurations that use PRI and T1 lines require specific DTM modules e DTMs configured for PRI are used for incoming and outgoing calls two way DID Incoming calls are routed directly to a BCM DN
98. trade name for standard BRI service You can order either regular Microlink service which includes the CLID feature or Centrex Microlink which includes access to additional ISDN network features including Call Forwarding When ordering Microlink service it must be ordered with EKTS turned off If you will be using a point of sale terminal adapter POSTA ask for D packet service to be enabled Ordering ISDN BRI service in the United States In the United States regardless of the CO Central Office type order National ISDN BRI NI 1 with EKTS Electronic Key Telephone System turned off Use the following packages as a guideline for ordering your National ISDN BRI NI 1 However Avaya recommends using packages M or P with the BCM system Contact your service provider for more information about the capability packages it offers Bellcore National ISDN Users Forum NIUF ISDN packages supported by BCM for ordering in U S 438 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 ISDN reference Capability Feature set Optional Point of sal Voice Data features e M Alternate voice CLID X X circuit switched data on both B channels P Alternate voice Flexible calling additional call X X X circuitswitched for voice not offering not data on both supported by supported by B channels BCM Basic BCM calling line D channel D Channel identification packet
99. transfer Scheduled Backup and Scheduled CDR records transfer can use automatic dial out over an ISDN or Modem interface To configure the automatic data transfer the administrator must configure a static route with the auto dial out field selected and associate it with the application When data is sent to the destination address the network recognizes the address of the application and triggers the dial out to establish the connection The packets are then sent over the link to the destination 392 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dial up resources configuration Prerequisites e The dial out interface must be enabled to configure static routes e The disconnect time for the interface must be greater than 60 seconds This is configured on the Link Parameters tab of the selected interface under Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces e Auto dial outroutes cannot be added if the interface is already manually connected unless the interface is already connected with auto dial out routes configured e If an interface is enabled and configured for manual dial out the interface must be disabled before it can be configured for automatic dial out Attention Select the Enable Dial Back Up check box to enable Dial Back up on the router Do not change the other Basic or Advanced Settings Dial up interfaces as primary connections navigation e Adding an automatic dial o
100. want to modify You can modify the following fields IP Address or Host Name FTP User or Destination FTP Folder Delete To delete a network storage location e On the Silent Record a Call Network Storage Locations panel select the Network Storage Location you want to delete e Click Delete The Confirm dialog box appears e Click Yes to delete the selected Network Storage Location 292 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Centralized voice mail configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The BCM50 supports voice mail configuration either from the local source or by accessing a remote voice mail system located on another BCM50 located ona BCM50 or attached to a Meridian 1 system The system can be configured to more than one voice mail system However each telephone can only be configured to one system For more information on planning and configuring centralized voice mail features refer to Business Communication Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40160 200 Voice mail inter op systems configuration navigation e Hostsystem configuration page 293 e Satellite system configuration page 295 Host system configuration The system that hosts the voice mail needs to ensure that incoming calls are directed to the voice mail service
101. 0 114 the S1 and S2 IP addresses also change to 47 166 50 114 If you assign the S1 and S2 IP address manually and the address is different from the BCM customer LAN address these addresses are not updated Changing the default router DHCP configuration The DHCP Server supplies the Avaya specific information required by IP phones This information includes TPS server information and VLAN IDs If the S1 and S2 IP addresses retain their default values the system automatically updates them when the router IP address changes If the S1 and S2 addresses are entered manually they are not automatically updated when the router IP address changes DHCP server on BCM50a and BCM50e The embedded router supplies DHCP information as well as the vendor information for IP phones If the reserved IP address for the BCM matches the S1 or S2 address and changes the VoIP information changes as well If the S1 or S2 IP address have been set manually and are different from the BCM address these addresses are not updated For example a system has a BCM LAN IP address of 47 166 50 108 an S1 IP address of 47 50 22 34 and an S2 IP address of 47 166 50 108 If the BCM LAN IP address changes the S2 IP address changes as well because it matched the BCM LAN IP address The S1 IP address does not change because it was set manually 182 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BCM DHCP overview Whenever the BCM LAN
102. 0 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration T1 E amp M line configuration process Part B Properties screen Preferences tab NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 217 Lines configuration T1 E amp M line configuration process Part C 218 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Configuring T1 E and M lines Use the following procedure to configure T1 E and M lines Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click on Configuration Telephony Lines All Lines 2 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel for the following variables e Line e Trunk Type e Name e Control Set e Line Type e Prime Set e Distinct Ring Select a line and click on the Properties tab Configure the trunk line data for the following variables e Dial Mode e Signaling Click on the Preferences tab Set the preferences for the following variables e Auto privacy e Aux Ringer e ANI Number e DNIS Number e Answer Mode e Voice message center e Distinct Rings e Redirect To Click on the Restrictions tab Set the restrictions and remote package scheduling using the following variables e Use remote package e Line restrictions e Remote Restrictions NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Tele
103. 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Defining a direct dial set 272 Dialing plan routing configuration Configuring a route to allow local calls 275 Configuring a route through dedicated trunk 276 Configuring a route for a secondary carrier 277 Configuring multiple routing overflow feature 277 Programming the PRI routing table 279 Configuring a long distance carrier access code into a destination code 279 Private networking Contents 275 281 Private networking Fallback configuration over a VoIP MCDN network283 Configuring the Meridian 1 ina BCM network 283 Configuring MCDN functionality for PRI fallback line 285 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features configuration287 MCDN network feature configuration 287 Configuring network call redirection information 287 Configuring ISDN call connection limitation 287 Configuring trunk route optimization 288 Configuring trunk anti tromboning 288 ETSI European network services configuration 288 Configuring MCID and network diversion 289 Silent Record a Call configuration Centralized voice mail configuration Host system configuration 293 Configuring the host system to receive central voice mail 293 Satellite system configuration 295 Configuring a satellite system for voice mail 295 Configuring call forward to voice mail 297 Configuring a PRI connection 297 System setup configuration for centralized voice mail Configuring the PRI connection for voice mail 299 Configur
104. 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP trunk fallback configuration Line pools to routes assignment Line pools to routes assignment navigation e Assigning PSTN line pools to routes for a far end system page 321 e Assigning PSTN line pool to local PSTN lines page 321 e Assigning the IP line pool page 321 Assigning PSTN line pools to routes for a far end system Use this procedure to assign PSTN line pools to routes at a far end system Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing 2 Click the route you created between the PSTN line and the other system 3 In the Use pool box type the letter of the line pool for the PSTN lines to the other system 4 In the External Number field enter the dial numbers that access the other system through PSTN 5 In the DN Type box choose Public End Assigning PSTN line pool to local PSTN lines Use this procedure to assign PSTN line pools to local PSTN lines Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click the route you created for your local PSTN line 2 In the Use pool box type the letter of the pool for the PSTN line 3 Leave the External Number field blank 4 In the DN Type box choose Public End Assigning the IP line pool Use this procedure to assign the IP VoIP line pool Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click the route you created for the IP line 2 In the Use pool box type the letter of the line pool for the IP line
105. 03 223 nequippe equippe 0404 224 nequipped nequipped 0405 225 nequippe equipped 0406 226 Unequipped Unequipped 0407 227 Unequipped Unequipped 0408 228 Unequipped Unequipped nequipped equipped VEQUIPpe 202 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 All the Lines panels show the same type of tabbed panels The information on the tabbed panels may vary however depending on the type of line The following paths indicate where to access the lines information in Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Business Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines The top panel provides a table of lines and the current or default settings The bottom frame contains three tabs The contents of the tabs may vary depending on the line selected in the top table e The Properties tabbed panel provides the settings for individual line characteristics e The Restrictions tabbed panel allows you to define which restrictions will be active for individual lines Note that lines that are assigned to the same line pool will automatically assign the same restrictions e The Assigned DNs tabbed panel provides a quick way to assign lines to telephones You must use the D
106. 04 specific site specific option This option uses the reserved for site specific use DHCP options DHCP option values 128 to 254 and must be returned by the DHCP server as part of each DHCP OFFER and ACK message for the IP Phone 2004 to accept these messages as valid The IP Phone 2004 pulls the relevant information out of this option and uses it to configure the IP phone Format of field is Type Length Data Type 1 octet e Five choices 0x80 0x90 0x9d Oxbf Oxfb 128 144 157 191 251 e Providing a choice of five types allows the IP Phone 2004 to work in environments where the initial choice may already be in use by a different vendor Select only one TYPE byte Length 1 octet variable depends on the message content Data length octets e ASCII based e format VLAN A XXX YYY ZZZ where VLAN A uniquely identifies this as the Avaya DHCP VLAN discovery signifies this version of this spec Future enhancements could use B for example ASCII comma is used to separate fields ASCII period is used to signal end of structure 166 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 VLAN overview XXX YYY and ZZZ are ASCll encoded decimal numbers with a range of 0 4095 The number is used to identify the VLAN Ids A maximum of 10 VLAN Ids can be configured NONE means no VLAN default VLAN The DHCP Offer message carrying VLAN information has no
107. 1 aLaw G 711 payload size ms 20 w 7 Fax transport v Provide in band ringback go Procedure job aid Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker can disrupt calls on other telephones using VolP trunks near the fax machine Follow these suggestions to reduce the chance of your VolP calls being dropped because of fax tone interference e Locate the fax machine away from other telephones e Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off Fax tones can be recorded in a voice mailbox In the rare event that fax tones are captured in a voice mail message opening that message from a telephone using a VoIP trunk can cause the connection to fail Voice mail and T 38 FoIP share a maximum of eight fax ports Voice mail supports only two fax ports If you allow fax messaging for the local VoIP gateway you must be aware of the guidelines when you send and receive fax messages over VoIP trunks Some fax machines cannot send faxes successfully over VoIP T 38 trunks to the following destinations e Call Pilot Manager mailboxes e Call Pilot Manager mailboxes accessed through auto attendant e Fax Transfer calls transferred to a system fax device through the auto attendant NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 329 SIP fax over G 711 configuration Use the following tips to avoid this problem e Avoid using manual dial on the originating fax machi
108. 1 to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN State and local requirements for support of Emergency 911 dialing service by Customer Premises Equipment vary Consult your local telecommunications service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations For most installations the following configuration rules should be followed unless local regulations require a modification All PSTN connections must be over PRI 432 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 2 way DID ISDN reference e In order for all sets to be reached from a Public Safety Answering Position PSAP the system must be configured for DID access to all sets In order to reduce confusion the dial digits for each set should be configured to correspond to the set extension number e The OLI digits for each set should be identical to the DID dialed digits for the set e The routing table should route 911 to a PRI line pool e If attendant notification is required the routing table must be set up for all 911 calls to use a dedicated line which has an appearance on the attendant console e The actual digit string 911 is not hard coded into the system More than one emergency number can be supported If transmission of internal extension numbers is not required or desired Avaya recommends that the person in charge of the system maintain a site map or location directory so that emergency personnel can
109. 10 18 11 Address gt NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 391 Dial up resources configuration Configuring the ISDN dial out IP address Use the following procedure to configure the ISDN dial out IP address Procedure steps Step Action 1 Select Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the ISDN Dial In Parameters tab configure the parameters for ISDN dial in access Refer to the table below for information about each parameter End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Local IP Address Specification Remote assigned lt check box gt When selected the BCM obtains its IP address from the remote end Default selected IP address lt IP Address gt When the Remote Assigned parameter is disabled a static IP address must be configured in this parameter Remote IP Address Specification Assign an IP lt check box gt When selected BCM assigns the IP address in the IP Address address field of this section to the remote end of the connection to remote Default cleared IP address lt IP Address gt The local IP address used on the BCM for the dial out connection Default 10 11 16 1 Automatic dial out interface configuration Use the following procedure to create an automatic dial out interface Management applications such as SNMP trap dial out Scheduled Log
110. 10MB for all platforms For more information about configuring LAN packet IP capture see Configuring LAN packet IP capture page 413 Output modes The following Avaya BCM output modes are available e BCM mode Captured files are stored locally on the BCM box at predefined location e USB mode Captured files are stored on an USB drive e Network mode Captured files are stored in specified location on a network file system Rules for capture You can issue request to start or stop capture independently from any interface at any time subject to the following limitations e You cannotissue start capture request from the Business Element Manager if another capture session initiated from the Business Element Manager is in progress e The capture process stops if output file size reaches the limit and file rotation option is off e The capture process stops if capture time expires NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 177 LAN packet IP capture Business Element Manager interface options The following operations are provided through Business Element Manager interface e Start capture Stop capture e List existing capture files e Delete specified capture file e Upload specified capture file You need to specify the upload location The following parameters must always be provided to start a capture e Capture period e Ethernet port name to listen to e Captur
111. 12 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring LAN packet IP capture The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 This chapter describes how to capture an IP packet provisioning the filtering tools and configuring the output types Navigation Starting a capture page 413 Stopping a capture page 414 Adding a filter page 415 Modifying a filter page 416 Deleting a filter page 417 Configuring output type page 418 Starting a capture Use the following procedure to start the capture Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Administration gt Utilities gt LAN IP Capture The LAN IP Capture panel appears Select the Capture tab Itis normally selected by default Configure the parameters in the Capture tab Click Start End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 413 Configuring LAN packet IP capture Variable definitions Variable Value Port The port from where the packets are captured The available options are LAN and OAM Mode Setting in this window defines if capture is going to be in promiscuous mode access to all IP packets on the LAN as opposed to access to IP packets going to or from BCM Output format Select the output format from the list Th
112. 194 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Call security and remote access overview Line restriction example no long Set restriction distance except area code 212 no long 718 214 713 distance except area codes 212 718 no long dis tance Line Set restriction no long dis tance no long distance except area codes 212 718 415 Remote line restriction example Line restrictions Remote restrictions CoS restrictions CoS password Remote call in programming There are three aspects to remote call ins Setting up lines to allow users access to the system Direct Inward System Access DISA creation page 196 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 195 Call security and remote access overview e Setting up Remote Access Packages that determine what services the remote users can access e Setting up CoS passwords for users calling in through the PSTN on lines programmed with DISA see Defining CoS passwords page 198 Direct Inward System Access DISA creation To control access from the public or private network you can configure auto answer trunks to answer with DISA Remote callers hear a stuttered dial tone and must then enter a CoS password that determines what they are allowed to do in the system e Auto answer T1 loop start and T1 E amp M trunks are configured to answer
113. 3 Global Settings field descriptions Attribute Value Description Telephony Settings Fallback to Enabled All Y our choice determines how the system handles calls if the circuit switched Enabled TDM IP network cannot be used Disabled Enabled All All calls are rerouted over specified PSTN Default Enabled All trunks lines e Enabled TDM All TDM digital telephones voice calls are rerouted over specified PSTN trunks lines e Disabled Calls are not rerouted RFC2833 Dynamic Payload 96_127 See DTMF handling using RF C2833 page 103 for details Default 120 The default setting is 120 Assign 0 to disable RFC 2833 functionality on the BCM RTP Keepalives Scope None RTP This setting is used if the BCM is behind a NAT The RTP RTCP available options are Default None e None RTP keep alives are disabled e RTP If selected keep alive parameters are displayed If initial keep alives are enabled the BCM will send an RTP packet when a dialog is established e RTP RTCP Ifselected keep alive parameters are displayed If initial keep alives are enabled the BCM willsend anRTP packetand an RTCP packet when a dialog is established SIP Settings Local Domain lt alphanumeric gt Local domain of the SIP network 102 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Global Settings field descriptions IP VoIP trunk c
114. 313 Configuring IP trunks 4 Click OK to modify the SIP user account End To delete a SIP user account Procedure steps Step Action 1 From the User Accounts subpanel select the user account that you want to delete 2 Click Delete The confirmation window appears 3 Click Yes The selected account is deleted from the User Accounts field End Configuration procedures for H 323 trunks Configuration procedures for H 323 trunks include e Configuring an H 323 route page 314 e Configuring H 323 settings page 315 e Configuring H 323 media parameters page 316 Configuring an H 323 route Complete the following procedure to configure an H 323 route Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under H 323 routing table page 127 Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking gt Routing Table 2 At the bottom of the Routing Table click Add The Add Remote Gateway dialog box appears Enter a Name and Destination Digits for the remote device Enter information about the remote device e IP Address Enter the IP address of the device with which you want to connect e GW Type Choose the variable that identifies the type of system or application being connected to For H323 only e MCDN Protocol Choose the protocol that supplies the required call features None default supplies no feature This setting is dictated by the type of
115. 4 Configure the ISDN Link Parameters End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 379 Dial up resources configuration Variable definitions Attribute Value Description PPP Settings IdleTime out s lt 0 36000 gt The interval after which the ISDN interface disconnects when there is no traffic Default 90 seconds Note A value of 0 makes the connection persistent Maximum receive unit lt 128_1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that can be received Default 1500 Maximum lt 128_1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that can be transmission unit received Default 1500 IP header lt check box gt Enable or disable IP header compression compression Note This feature must be enabled at both ends of the connection Default enabled Software compression lt check box gt Enable or disable software compression When enabled all dial up connections use BSD Scheme for compression Default disabled Access Setting Authentication PAP or CHAP Select the authentication type for the link Default CHAP Dial Out User Name lt drop down list gt Enter the user name used for authenticating to the remote end Global settings panel On the Global Settings panel you can change the dial in access to the network and assign a Line Pool for dial out Allowing network access Use this procedure to enable or disable dial in acc
116. 40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Variable Name Value Appearance Type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this mustbe setto Ring only Model Avaya 7000 Deskphones supported in Europe only VMsg Set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 249 Lines configuration 250 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI T loops configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 BRI modules support both trunk and station telephone services For more information about planning and prerequisites information for configuring BRI T loops see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 Navigation e Configuring BRI T loop parameters page 251 e Configuring provisioned BRI line features page 253 Configuring BRI T loop parameters Complete the following procedu
117. 40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 395 Dial up resources configuration Failover dial up interface if one is configured The dial up interface can be ISDN or an analog modem When the WAN link recovers the dialed failover WAN connection is terminated and the IP traffic is then routed over the primary WAN link The WAN failover feature operates only on BCM50a BCM50e BCM50ba or BCM50be Prerequisites e Dial out interfaces to be used as the Failover Interface must not be provisioned for an automatic dialout service e The following settings must be configured on the router for WAN failover to function PortSpeed 115200 Enable Dial Back Up check box selected e Do not change any other Basic or Advanced router settings WAN Failover configuration on BCM50 with a router card navigation e Assigning a modem interface for WAN failover page 396 e Assign an ISDN interface for WAN failover page 396 Assigning a modem interface for WAN failover Use the following procedure to assign a modem interface for WAN failover Procedure steps Step Action 1 Create and enable a modem interface See Adding a modem interface page 381 2 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Global Settings 3 From the Failover interface list select the interface to configure as a WAN backup End Assign an ISDN interface for WAN failover Use the following procedure to
118. 440 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Codec rates reference The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The information in the table below enables the administrator to determine the number of resources that can be maintained on the available system bandwidth The packet transfer rate must also include the overhead Using Silence Suppression on G 723 and G 729 can reduce the overall bandwidth consumption by 40 The totals in the bytes s column represent one direction only RTP over IP Payload Packets Overhead Total bytes Bandwidth Overhead Latency bytes frame bytes bytes s msec G 729 10 1 58 68 54400 580 00 10 20 2 58 78 31200 290 00 20 30 3 58 88 23467 193 33 30 40 4 58 98 19600 145 00 40 50 5 58 108 17280 116 00 50 60 6 58 118 15733 96 97 60 70 7 58 128 14629 82 86 70 80 8 58 138 13800 72 50 80 90 9 58 148 13156 64 44 90 100 10 58 158 12640 58 00 100 G 711 80 1 58 138 110400 72 50 10 160 2 58 218 87200 36 25 20 240 3 58 298 79467 24 17 30 320 3 58 378 75600 18 13 40 400 5 58 458 73280 14 50 50 480 6 58 538 71733 12 08 60 560 7 58 618 70629 10 36 70 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 441
119. 53 Configuring DNS Settings options 354 Procedure steps 354 Configuring the MTU option 354 Procedure steps 354 Viewing the OAM interface 357 Procedure steps 357 Modifying IP configuration 357 Procedure steps 357 Viewing DHCP lease information 358 Procedure steps 358 Static routes configuration 359 Adding a new IP Static Route 359 Modifying an existing IP Static Route 360 Deleting a static route 360 DHCP server configuration on BCM main module 363 Configuring shared DHCP settings 363 Configuring shared DHCP options 365 Adding a new included IP address range 365 Deleting a new included address range 366 Adding areserved address 367 Deleting a reserved address 367 Configuring the router 369 Accessing the router 369 Configuring flexible DiffServ Code Point 371 Configuring flexible Diff Serv code point 371 Firewall configuration resources 373 Dial up resources configuration 375 ISDN interface management 375 Adding an ISDN interface 376 Enabling an ISDN interface 376 Disabling an ISDN interface 376 Deleting an ISDN interface 377 ISDN interface connection or disconnection 377 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 11 Contents Connecting an ISDN interface 377 Disconnecting an ISDN interface 378 ISDN channel parameters configuration 378 Configuring parameters for an ISDN channel 378 Configuring the ISDN Link Parameters 379 Global settings panel 380 Allowing network access 380 Assi
120. 55 192 and domain information such as europe avaya com The VoIP settings allow any Avaya IP Deskphones that uses DHCP to obtain the BCM50 address and connect to the system In this situation the default VoIP settings are e S1IP address 47 166 50 108 e S1Port 7000 e SIAction 1 e SI Retry count 1 e S21IP address 47 166 50 108 e S2 Port 7000 e S2 Action 1 e S2 Retry count 1 BCM50 with integrated router The default DHCP server status on the main module is Disabled The DHCP server status on the router is assigned to Enabled By default the BCM50 is a DHCP client The BCM50a and BCM50e include a router with a DHCP server By default this DHCP server provides a dynamic IP address to the BCM Customer LAN The embedded router recognizes the MAC address of the BCM and reserves an IP address 192 168 1 2 is the default address When the BCM50 requests a dynamic IP address the embedded router sends the reserved IP address DHCP network scenarios R efer the following scenarios to understand the DHCP server functionalities on the Main Module with or without an external DHCP server DHCP server on the Main Module with no external DHCP server If no external DHCP server is presentin your network and you have Avaya IP Deskphones as well as other DHCP client devices PCs assign the DHCP server status to Enabled All devices In this case the BCM450 DHCP server provides configuration data to all DHCP client devices on your net
121. AVAYA Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony NN40170 502 Document status Standard Document issue 03 03 Document date October 2010 Product release 6 0 J ob function Installation Type Document Language type English Copyright 2010 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Notices While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya assumes no liability for any errors Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes Documentation disclaimer Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya Avaya s agents servants and employees against all claims lawsuits demands and judgments arising out of or in connection with subsequent modifications additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by End User Link disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation s provided by Avaya Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information statement or content provided on these sites
122. Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Private networking Fallback configuration over a VoIP MCDN network Configuring MCDN functionality for PRI fallback line Check MCDN PRI settings on the M1 For more information refer to the M1 documentation Ensure SL 1 MCDN keycodes are entered on the BCM and the PRI line is set up for SL 1 protocol For a detailed description of setting up fallback refer to Private networking Fallback configuration over a VoIP MCDN network page 283 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 285 Private networking Fallback configuration over a VoIP MCDN network 286 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 If the MCDN protocol is added to a PRI SL 1 or VoIP private network the network provides additional network management features and provides available centralized voice mail features to all nodes on the network ETSI Euro lines international markets also have network features available from the central office that can be enabled or disabled MCDN and ETSI network features configuration navigation e MCDN network feature configuration page 287 e E
123. BCM telephone e Follow me Diversion is also a receive only feature It allows the call forwarded destination to remotely change the Avaya BCM call forwarding programming Call Forward All Calls CFAC feature to a different telephone Attention Avaya BCM CFAC must be active and the destination set PBX system must support the feature For example user A forwards all calls to telephone B a temporary office Later user A moves on to location C The user does not have to be at telephone A to forward calls to location C Using telephone B and Follow me Diversion the user can forward calls from A to location C Follow me diversion can be cancelled from the forwarded location e Diversion on Busy and Diversion on No Reply cannot be cancelled from the forwarded telephone These are programmable only by an installer and not by the user 46 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview e f multiple telephones are programmed to take a call the first telephone to respond will act All other telephones responding are ignored Therefore if the first telephone to respond has Diversion enabled this feature will be invoked For restrictions by telephone type e all variations supported on Avaya BCM digital and IP telephones e ATA2 ASM8 all variations supported on an ATA e ISDN all variations supported on ISDN telephones except Diversion on Busy and CFWD
124. BRI S T Media Bay Module configured as BRI is lit your layer 1 is functioning 428 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 ISDN reference e Layer 2 A logical connection between the central office or the far end and the BCM system BCM has one or two of these connections for each BRI link and one for each PRI link Without Layer 2 call processing is not possible e Layer 3 Also a logical connection between the ISDN network your service provider and the BCM system For BRI lines layer 3 is where call processing and service profile identifier SPID information is exchanged This controls which central office services are available to the connection For example a network connection can be programmed to carry data calls Attention Throughout this chapter references are made to Service profile identifiers SPIDs SPIDs are a part of the BRI National ISDN standard SPIDs are not used in the ETSI BRI standard or on PRI The three layers mentioned in this section are important when you are installing maintaining and troubleshooting an ISDN system ISDN bearer capability Bearer capability describes the transmission standard used by the BRI or PRI line so that it can work within a larger ISDN hardware and software network The bearer capability for BRI and PRI is voice speech 3 1 kHz audio fax and data unrestricted 64 kbps restricted 64 kbps or 56 kbps Services and features f
125. Busy For diversion set Diversion for DPNSS in the same way as Call Forward You will need to enter the end DN when prompted You may also need to include the DPNSS 1 routing number Redirection feature Redirection is a DPNSS 1 feature similar to Avaya BCM Transfer Callback With Redirection a call awaiting connection or reconnection is redirected by the originating party to an alternate destination after a time out period Failed calls can also be redirected Priority calls are not redirected Attention The address to redirect depends on the history of the call Calls that have been transferred are redirected to the party that transferred them In all other cases the address to redirect is the one registered at the PBX system originating the redirection Attention Avaya BCM does not support the redirection of Avaya BCM originated calls even over DPNSS 1 The Diversion on No Reply feature takes precedence over Redirection For restrictions by telephone type e For telephones with a single line display the number key acts as MORE and the star key acts as VIEW e ISDN all variations supported on ISDN telephones For setting redirection the timer used for the network Callback feature is also used for redirection Executive intrusion Executive Intrusion El is a DPNSS 1 feature that allows an operator or other calling party to intrude ona line when itis busy An example of the use of this feature is to make an impo
126. C limits e National ISDN 2 NI 2 e DMS 100 custom e DMS 250 e AT amp T 4ESS custom PRI MCDN and IP trunks support CbC Limits to limit the number of incoming or outgoing calls only No selection of CbC Services is provided There are several areas in the interface where you need to configure Call by Call services and the PRI lines that support these services Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration Resources Telephony Resources Set up the DTM module to support PRI Set up the Call by Call services selection for the module Provision the PRI lines Configure the PRI lines Configure target lines if they are not already configured for your system Assign the PRI line pools to telephones Assign the target lines to telephones O ON ODO a F W ND Set up routing for the PRI pools o Set up call by call limits for the line pools va _ Set up routing scheduling for the PRI line pools End 214 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration T1 E and M lines configuration E amp M lines must be digital T1 Prerequisites for T1 E and M lines configuration e DTM module is installed and configured e Lines are provisioned NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 215 Lines configuration T1 E amp M line configuration process Part A il 5o 5o o 216 NN4017
127. CSU IV CSU line build fo dB bd The following table describes the possible fields trunk module parameters and an indication of which types of modules use each setting Module parameters values Attributes Value Module line type Trunk type lt read only gt All Trunks Indicates the type of trunks This field is read only for all modules except DTM modules Trunk mode DS CLID Global Legacy Loop set e DS CLID displays for old North American LS DS or CLID analog trunk modules the old analog MBM or the GATM with North American DIP switch settings e Global displays for the GATM MBM with no regional DIP switches e Legacy displays for all other old analog trunk modules 82 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony resources configuration Module parameters values Attributes Value Module line type Protocol NI 2 DMS 100 PRI DMS 250 AT amp T4ESS SL 1 Euro ETSI Q Sig Choose the trunk protocol used by your service provider The supported protocols are PRI T1 NI NI 1 and NI 2 DMS 100 DMS 250 AT amp T4ESS SL 1 PRI E1 ETS QSIG Euro SL 1 SL 1 and ETSI QSIG require an MCDN keycode to display BRI Protocol can also be selected on BRI T loops under Configuration Telephony Loops Always check the line protocol with the central office NSF Extension None WATS ALL PRI The Network Sp
128. Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI T loops overview SPIDs and network DNs parameter values Attribute Value Description Add Select the appropriate SPID 1 or 2 Under the Details for SPID table click Add Enter a network DN Click OK On the table click in the Call Type field beside the DN you entered Choose the call type for the DN Select the SPID that you want to delete Click Delete Click OK Delete WNF AO BWNF T loops D packet service The D Packet Service panel is the second tab of the loops panels Attention D Packet service is only available if your service provider provides this capability This panel enables you to configure D Packet Service to T loops You must have both T loops and S loops configured on the same module to allow this feature The following figure illustrates the D Packet Service panel D packet service T loops Details for Loop 703 Settings SPIDs D Packet Service Enable D packet service o Associated loop The following table describes each section on the D Packet Service panel D packet Service panel parameter values Attribute Value Description Associated loop X01 X04 Enable this service only if you are installing devices that require this type of service Enabled D packet lt check box gt North American BRI loops can support two B channels Service The SPID may be
129. Configuration Telephony May 2010 ISDN reference The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 This chapter provides some general information about using ISDN lines on your BCM system Detailed information about ISDN is widely available through the internet Your service provider can also provide you with specific information to help you understand what suits your requirements Navigation e Welcome to ISDN page 427 e Services and features for ISDN BRI and PRI page 429 e ISDN hardware page 434 e ISDN standards compatibility page 437 e Planning your ISDN network page 437 e Supported ISDN protocols page 439 Welcome to ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN technology provides a fast accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving voice data images text and other information through the telecom network ISDN uses existing analog telephone wires and multiplex it into separate digital channels which increases bandwidth ISDN uses a Single transport to carry multiple information types What once required separate networks for voice data images or video conferencing is now combined onto one common high speed transport Refer to the following information e Analog versus ISDN page 427 e Types of ISDN service page 428 e Types of ISDN service page 428 Analog versus ISDN ISDN offers signifi
130. Configuration procedures for SIP trunks Configuration procedures for SIP trunks include Configuring SIP settings page 303 for public and private SIP trunks Configuring SIP media parameters page 304 for public and private SIP trunks Importing an ITSP template page 305 for public SIP trunks Configuring an ITSP account page 305 for public SIP trunks Configuring local NAT compensation page 306 for public SIP trunks Configuring a public SIP route page 307 for public SIP trunks Configuring a private SIP route page 308 for private SIP trunks Configuring a SIP proxy page 309 for private SIP trunks Configuring the SIP URI map page 310 for private SIP trunks Configuring SIP authentication page 310 for private SIP trunks Configuring SIP authentication for a SIP user account page 311 for private SIP trunks Configuring SIP settings Complete the following procedure to configure settings that are common to both public and private SIP trunks Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Global Settings Choose the settings that you need for your system e SIP Settings Local Domain Enter the local domain of the SIP network Call signaling port This is the listening port for the BCM The default setting for this field is 5060 You must click Modify to change this setting If you change this setting the system drops all SIP cal
131. H 323 have fewer interoperability issues if both protocols use the same payload size Attention You can also set the payload size for Avaya IP Deskphone Fax transport lt drop down list gt T 38 G 711 Default T 38 T 38 The system exclusively supports T 38 fax over IP G 711 The system exclusively supports G 711 fax over IP NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 105 IP VoIP trunk configuration SIP Media Parameters field descriptions Attribute Value Description audio Force G 711 for3 1k lt check box gt Default Unselected This setting indicates to IP trunks that the bearer capability of these ports is 3 1 K audio Provide in band ringback lt check box gt Default Unselected This setting affects in bound SIP trunk calls If you select the check box the BCM attempts to stream ringback tones or announcements in band to the caller using RTP This setting results in in band ringback It can be useful in tandem scenarios to transfer DTMF if the final leg in the tandem connects to an IVR that plays announcements before connecting the call Attention Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker may disrupt calls at other telephones using IP trunks in the vicinity of the fax machine Here are some suggestions to minimize the possibility of your IP calls being dropped because of fax tone interferenc
132. I loops can support two B channels Service The SPID may be the same or different for the channels TEI lt digits gt These entries identify up to eightterminal identifiers for the devices assigned to the S loops Your BRI service provider supplies these numbers if they are required Actions 152 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI ISDN loop properties overview D packet Service panel parameter values Attribute Value Description Add TEI 1 In the top frame click the loop where you want to define D P acket Service 2 In the bottom frame ensure the Enable D packet service check box is selected In the Associated loop field enter a defined S loop Under the TEIs table click Add Entera TEI Click OK Repeat for all the TEIs you want to assign Delete In the top frame click the loop where you want to delete TEI assignments In the bottom frame click the TEI you want to delete Click Delete Click YES AUNE NO UWB W S loops assigned DNs The Details for Loop panel for S loops allows you to view which device records are assigned to a loop and to add or delete a record from the loop The following figure illustrates the Details for Loop panel For more information about BCM450 feature Dynamic Device Configuration DDC and adding DNs to an S loop see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Con
133. IP address lt IP Address format The IP address of the Proxy Server for IP phones 10 10 10 10 gt Port lt drop down list gt Select the appropriate port BCM Meridian 1 Succession 1000 Centrex SL 100 Other Port number lt number gt The port number on the terminal through which IP phones connect Action lt read only gt The initial action code for the IP telephone Retry count lt number gt The delay before an IP phone retries connecting to the proxy server VLAN VLAN identifiers Specify the Virtual LAN VLAN ID numbers that are given to the IP comma delimited telephones If you want DHCP to automatically assign VLAN IDs to the IP telephones enter the VLAN IDs in the following format VLAN A id1 id3 idn where VLAN A is an identifier that tells the IP telephone that this message is a VLAN discovery message id1 id2 idn are the VLAN ID numbers that DHCP can assign to the IP telephones You can have up to 10 VLAN ID numbers listed The VLAN ID numbers must be from 0 to 4095 For example if you wanted to use VLAN IDs 1100 1200 1300 and 1400 you would enter the following string in this box VLAN A 1100 1200 1300 1400 If you do not want DHCP to automatically assign VLAN IDs to the telephones enter VLAN A none in this text box Attention The AVAYA IP Terminal VLAN ID string must be terminated with a period Attention If you do not know the VLAN ID contact your network administrator Attention For information abo
134. IP keycodes to activate trunking FEPS Functional Endpoint Proxy Server the IP Gateway service restarts automatically after you enter an IP keycode See the Keycode Installation Guide NN40010 301 for details H 323 and SIP trunks are automatically assigned to line pool BlocA Local gateway In the context of internet telephony a local gateway provides the conversion interface between a local voice or fax device and the IP network In the context of BCM the local gateway is the local end point of the IP trunk Local gateway configuration options are described under e IP trunk settings page 100 all IP trunks e Global settings page 102 public and private SIP trunks e SIP trunks public trunk configuration page 106 public SIP trunks e SIP trunks private trunk configuration page 118 private SIP trunks e H 323 settings page 128 H 323 trunks Remote gateway In the context of BCM the remote end point of the IP trunk can be an IP enabled device for example an IP telephone that acts as a remote gateway a gatekeeper H 323 trunks only or a proxy server The IP network can consist of a group of connected peers or itcan have a central H 323 gatekeeper or a SIP proxy server In the peer or direct model there must be a route to every remote device to which you want to make IP calls Routes are listed in routing tables They and the configuration options for adding routes are described under e SIP public rou
135. LID services 262 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Calling line identification configuration Process map NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 263 Calling line identification configuration Setting up alpha tagging for name display Answered calls can display the name incoming number and line name number for calls coming in over lines that allow full CLID Lines are identified by line number as a default However you can provide a more descriptive identifier The Name field is located on the main table under Configuration Telephony Lines Prerequisitesfor setting up alpha tagging for name display e The line assigned to the telephone must have Caller ID setin order for the telephone to display the name Procedure steps Step Action 1 To determine the name to display add a system speed dial for the number and enter a display name Note You can increase the default number of system speed dials from 70 to 255 if you want to provide an extensive CLID list 2 Set the CLID match length setting to the required number 1 to 8 This setting determines how many digits of the dialed number and the system speed dial number must match before a name is displayed 3 Set First display to Name End Configuring Network Name Display elements Complete the following procedures to configure the components of Network Name D
136. Loop type and general parameters 148 T loop general settings 149 T loop SPIDS and network DNs 150 T loops D packetservice 151 S loops assigned DNs 153 BRI T loops overview Process overview 155 T loop general settings 156 T loop SPIDS and network DNs 157 T loops D packet service 159 S loops assigned DNs 160 Router overview ADSL and Ethernet configurations 163 Router features 163 VLAN overview LAN Interfaces 166 Choosing DHCP forVLAN 166 Specifying the site specific options for VLAN 166 Professional call recording Overview 169 Autonomous recording 169 Call Details 170 Adding a Professional Call Recording Rule 170 Feature dependencies and restrictions 173 Limitations 173 Remote modem Overview 175 Remote modem modules 175 Voice mail modem access 175 CTI server enhancements 176 ModemCC enhancements 176 LAN packet IP capture Outputmodes 177 135 147 155 163 165 169 175 177 6 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Contents Rules for capture 177 Business Element Manager interface options 178 BCM DHCP overview 179 DHCP context for the BCM platform 179 DHCP onBCM 179 Main module DHCP client 180 Main module DHCP server 180 DHCP default configuration 180 BCM50 models without the router 180 BCM50 with integrated router 181 DHCP network scenarios 181 BCM configured as DHCP clientis unable to reach external DHCP server 182 BCM using a dynamic address is changed t
137. M Analog Loop e BRI BRI S T e Target lines The Loops panels define the loop numbers and loop attributes that correspond to the DIP switch settings that were configured on the BRI trunk media bay modules installed on your system Check your Programming Record to see which modules are installed and what settings were chosen Available BRI trunk loop attributes are determined by the country profile that is assigned to your system All profiles allow BRI programming however there is a difference between T1 based profiles and for E1 based profiles Once loops are provisioned the system assigns two line numbers per loop These lines are then programmed as you would any other lines BRI loops configuration Line records You can program a loop to support either trunking services to the ISDN network or terminal services to one or more ISDN devices The following sections describe the programming for each type of loop For more information about complete module installation instructions and safety precautions see Avaya Business Communications Manager 450 6 0 Installation System NN40170 303 The line record allows you to e Identify the line and the features on the line 72 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines overview e Assign restrictions for outgoing calls e Assign a voice message center if the line connects to a remote voice mail system either on another node on
138. Meet Me Conferencing keycodes to activate MeetMe Conferencing For more information consult with your Avaya distributor The keycodes specify the maximum number of simultaneous conferencing ports up to a limit of 120 for BCM450 and 18 for BCM50 Activating the keycode enables the administration operation and operational measurements for Meet Me Conferencing The maximum number of participants in one conference is 60 for BCM450 and 18 for BCM50 e Inform users about accessing Meet Me Conferencing Use F985 to find the Meet Me Conferencing DN Inform internal users that they can enter this DN directly or dial the Meet Me Conferencing feature code F930 After DN pool renumbering the Meet Me Conferencing DN retains the same DN value even though it is now outside the range of application DNs You can renumber the Meet Me Conferencing DN to place it within the application DN range For more information about Renumbering DNs see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration System NN40170 501 Configure other methods for external callers Configure the Lines table for external access to the conference and advise chairpersons to include the external phone numbers in meeting invitations For more information about Lines table administration see the Call Pilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide NN40170 300 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 335 Meet Me Conferencing co
139. N records panels to assign line pools to telephones NavigationLines configuration navigation e DN addition to a line record page 204 e Target lines configuration page 204 e PRI lines configuration page 210 e T1E and M lines configuration page 215 e T1 E1 loop start lines configuration page 222 e T1 digital ground start configuration page 229 e T1 DID lines configuration page 234 e DASS2 lines configuration page 239 e DPNSS lines configuration page 244 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 203 Lines configuration DN addition to a line record Add a DN to a line record so that you can assign it and enable call features Adding a DN to a line record Use the following procedure to add a DN to Line record Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click on Configuration Telephony Lines All Lines panel 2 Select the line to which you want to add a DN 3 In the bottom panel select the Assigned DNs tab 4 Click Add 5 Enter the DN number 6 Click OK 7 Select the appearance type 8 Select if the DN will support different appearances 9 Select if the DN will display Caller ID 10 Select if the DN will actas a voice message set 11 Repeat this procedure for all the DN records you want to configure End Variable definitions Variable Value Appearance type Choose Appr only or Appr amp R ing if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Appear
140. O UDP Direction Direction values are Src capture IP packets with IPaddr AND Port AND MAC AND protocol values in a source field of the IP packet matching values defined in the row Dst capture IP packets with IP addr AND Port AND MAC AND protocol values in a destination field of the packet matching values defined in the row Any capture IP packets with IPaddr AND Port AND MAC AND protocol values in either source or destination fields of the packet matching values defined in the row Port Scope The scope of the port The available options are Single or Range Addr Scope Function The Function attribute in this table defines if the rule presented in this row should be AND d or OR d to resulting equation Deleting a filter Use the following procedure to delete the filter Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Administration gt Utilities gt LAN IP Capture The LAN IP Capture panel appears 2 Select the Filters tab From the LAN IP Capture area select the filter to be deleted 4 Click Delete The confirmation window appears 5 Click Yes The selected filter is deleted End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 417 Configuring LAN packet IP capture Configuring output type Use the following procedure to select the output type where you want the captured files to be stored Proc
141. P line In BCM 450 there is a maximum of 130 VoIP NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 69 Lines overview lines In BCM50 VoIP keycodes are 01 to 12 VoIP keycodes are entered on the system starting with line 001 and ending at line 012 System level line identification Ona new system lines and loops are numbered and assigned defaults based on the type of media bay modules that have been connected to the system The exception are the VoIP trunks which require a keycode to activate The panels located at Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines allow you to easily view which lines have been enabled through a media bay module From this heading you can access each line record and assign attributes as you require Line types Under Lines note that line types are divided into five headings The fifth heading contains all line numbers e Active physical lines e Active VoIP lines require keycode e Target lines e Inactive Lines e All Lines Active physical lines In BCM450 the physical line number range is 1 to 360 In BCM50 lines 061 124 are reserved for physical lines Active VoIP lines requires keycode Voice over IP VoIP lines are signaling channels that simulate how CO lines work However VoIP lines transmit data to the IP network over a LAN or IP network rather than over physical lines Once the VoIP trunks are set up you can assign them to line pools and program
142. PoolA toO BlocA to BlocF DN lt telephone DN gt None lt digits associated with a specific target line gt Tips External lines and telephones must be programmed to use one of the Scheduled Services Ringing Restriction and Routing Services For maximum flexibility Avaya recommends that you create two different control telephones one for the lines and one for the telephones You can turn on a service manually or automatically for all external lines from an assigned control telephone However you cannot combine schedules A service can only be active as normal service or one of the six schedules at any one time Several schedules can be active at one time but they must use different services Define how the line is used in relation to other lines in the system Public line can be accessed by more than one telephone Private line can be assigned only to one telephone and the prime telephone for that line Enter the internal number of the telephone Pool A O analog and T1 lines BlocA to BlocF PRI and VoIP lines assigns the line to one of the line pools Ifa line is assigned to a line pool butis not assigned to any telephone that line is available only for outgoing calls Bloc line pools must be used in conjunction with routes and destination codes Target lines cannot be put into line pools Assign a telephone to provide backup answering for calls on the line For an Auto Answer line calls are redirected if
143. Select the Reserved Address you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation dialog box appears Click Yes End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 367 DHCP server configuration on BCM main module 368 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring the router The information in this chapter applies to the Avaya BCM50 only Use the router panel to launch the router on your BCM50a BCM50e For information about configuring the router consult the router documentation Note that the Launch Router button appears only if you have a BCM50a BCM50e Navigation e Accessing the router page 369 Accessing the router Access the router prior to configuring the router Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Launch Router WebGUI Tool The Contivity R outer interface appears in a new window Note that the BCM50 uses the default gateway setting as your router IP address to launch the router WebG UI tool from Business Element Manager If the default gateway is notset to the router IP address you must access the router WebGUI directly from a web browser End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 369 Configuring the router 370 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring flexible DiffServ Code Point The informat
144. Start DN length and Start DN and Public and Private Received length Start DN information is entered when the system is initially setup These numbers can be changed after the system has been setup but only at the risk of compromising other numbering in the system If your system is part of a network these numbers must be coordinated with the other nodes in the network to ensure that the network dialing plans are consistent The Public and Private Received Number lengths take their sequence from the initial DN length but this can be changed to accommodate local dialing requirements the Private length should mirror the DN length except in special circumstances Configuration for incoming calls For incoming calls you can have a central reception point or you can specify target lines to one or more telephones to receive directed calling NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 55 Telephony programming You can arrange your telephones in Hunt groups ringing groups or call groups that use system wide call appearance SWCA assignments to share calls You can also configure lines for use by system users who call in from outside the system You can give them direct access to the system with an Auto DN or you can configure the line so they hear a stuttered dial tone at which point they need to enter a password CoS to gain access DISA DN Incoming call configuration part A Te
145. T Media Bay Module BRIM or a Digital Trunk Media Bay Module DTM card configured for PRI Refer to the following for a description of the BRI and PRI hardware e PRI hardware page 434 e BRI hardware page 434 PRI hardware The Digital Trunk Media Bay Module DTM is configured for PRI In most PRI network configurations you need one DTM configured as PRI to actas the primary clock reference The only time when you may not have a DTM designated as the PRI primary clock reference is in a network where your BCM system is connected back to back with another switch using a PRI link If the other switch is loop timed to your BCM system your DTM PRI can be designated as internal If your BCM has more than one DTM configured as PRI you must assign the first DTM as the primary external the second DTM as the secondary reference BRI hardware The loops on the BRI module can be programmed to support either network or terminal connections This allows you to customize your arrangement of lines voice terminals data terminals and other ISDN equipment The following describes some basic hardware configurations for network and terminal connections for each loop type A BRI module provides four loops Each loop can be individually programmed as e an S reference point connection S loop to ISDN terminal equipment TE or e aT reference point connection T loop to an ISDN network T reference point or to an ISDN network U reference point
146. TSI European network services configuration page 288 MCDN network feature configuration When you connect your BCM systems through PRI SL 1 or VoIP trunks and activate the MCDN protocol your network provides a number of network call features You can use this protocol to network other BCM systems Norstar systems Meridian 1 systems Succession systems and DMS 100 systems Configuring network call redirection information NCRI provides call information in the network when calls are redirected from one system to another NCRI builds on the following BCM features External Call Forward e Call Transfer Call Forward Configuring ISDN call connection limitation The ISDN call connection limitation ICCL feature piggybacks on the call initiation request and acts as a check at transit PBX points to prevent misconfigured routes or calls with errors from blocking channels Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network 2 Locate the MCDN subpanel 3 Select the Network ICCLcheck box 4 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 287 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features configuration From the Modules table select the required module Locate the Details for Module subpanel Click the Trunk Module Parameters tab on oO Ho In the Maximum transits field en
147. Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Create a route that uses a line pool containing local lines only Program a route to use a line pool containing the lines used to access the long distance carriers Type the dialout digits which are the same as the access digits For example if the access code is 10222 the dialout digits are10222 Create a destination code 91 9 for outside access and 1 for long distance You must use a valid destination code NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 279 Dialing plan routing configuration 6 Set Absorbed Length to 1 The digit 9 is only used internally and should be dropped The 1 is needed to direct the call to the public carrier network The destination codes 9 and 91 used in the examples cannot be used together If you need the destination code 91 to direct long distance calls you must create a separate set of codes that use local calling routes These codes would be for example 90 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 and 99 Refer to Grouping destination codes using a wild card on page 259 for information on programming destination codes End 280 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Private networking The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The following chapters
148. The T and S loops must be on the same physical module For the T reference point ina BCM450 or BCM50 system see the following figures T reference point BCM450 system networ connection T reference point BCM50 system network connection Clock source for ISDN Systems with ISDN interfaces need to synchronize clocking with the ISDN network and any ISDN terminal equipment connected to the network Systems synchronize clocking to the first functionally available network connection If there are excessive errors on the reference network connection the next available network connection is used for clock synchronization The clock synchronization process generates alarm codes and event messages Clock synchronization is supported by the DTM and BRI module The BCM derives timing from the network using T reference points loops Terminal equipment on S reference points loops derive timing from the BCM system When you configure the network connections to the BCM you should take into account the system preferences for selecting loops for synchronization e lower numbered loops have preference over higher numbered loops e the loop preference order is 201 202 203 204 etc e the system skips S and analog loops when selecting a network connection for synchronization 436 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 ISDN reference Systems with only S loops actas t
149. abilities are configured If no configuration is done CLID shows up after answering a call unless Feature 811 is used To make CLID appear before answer you must set the Caller ID set on the set programming Digital analog and VoIP lines support CLID for incoming calls and no special programming is required for the feature on these lines for BCM digital or IP phones CLID configuration for outgoing calls navigation e Allowing CLID for telephones page 261 e Setting up alpha tagging for name display page 264 Allowing CLID for telephones Use this procedure t for target lines and analog CLID trunks connected to a GATM Note Only 30 telephones can be assigned CLID for a line Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access 2 Select the DN record for a telephone assigned with analog lines that support CLID 3 On the Line Assignment tab click Add 4 Enter a line number NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 261 Calling line identification configuration Click OK Select the check box beside the Caller ID Set field of the highlighted row R epeat for each line assigned to the telephone N OO Oo Repeat above steps for telephones assigned with these lines End Procedure job aid This process map provides a quick view of the areas of the system that need programming to provide incoming and outgoing C
150. ace levels page 86 Framing ESF SF T1 PRI Select the framing format used by your T1 or PRI service provider Extended Superframe ESF or Superframe SF Contact your T1 or PRI service provider for the proper setting SF or Superframe is sometimes known as D4 Line coding B8ZS AMI T1 PRI Define the encoding signals on a T1 line Select the standard used by your T1 service provider Contact your T1 service provider for the proper setting Internal CSU lt check box gt Turn the internal T1 channel service unit CSU on or off For more information see Internal CSU page 86 CSU line build 0 7 5 or 15 dB T1 PRI Set the gain level of the transmitted signal This setting appears only when the Internal CSU is Enabled DSX1 build 000 100 100 200 T1 PRI 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600 or 600 700 feet Set the distance between BCM and an external channel service unit This setting appears only when the Internal CSU is Disabled Contact your service provider for the proper settings NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 85 Telephony resources configuration Module parameters values Attributes Value Module line type CRC4 lt check box gt E1 PRI Ensure this is enabled or disabled to match the service provider Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC4 setting for the trunk Station
151. ag malicious calls 288 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features configuration Advice of Charge End of Call AOCE AOCE is a supplementary service available from your service provider on ETSI Euro BRI PRI links With this feature the BCM user can view the charges for an outgoing call once the call completes This information is also reported to the Call Detail Reporting Application The information can be provided in currency or charging units depending on how the feature is set up by your service provider To invoke the feature enter FEATURE 818 Configuring MCID and network diversion Perform the following procedure to configure network diversion Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network 2 Locate the ETSI subpanel 3 Select the check boxes of the required options End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description NetworkDiversion lt check box gt Allows calls to be redirected to an outside network MCID lt check box gt Malicious Call Identification When selected the called party can use Feature 897 to request the network to record the identity of an incoming call including e called party number e Calling party number e local time and date of the activity e calling party sub address if provided by the calling user The fea
152. ame has the status of private it may be displayed as Private name if thatis how the service provider has indicated that it should be displayed If the Calling Party Name is unavailable it may be displayed as Unknown name Your system might display the name of the called party on an outgoing call if it is provided by your service provider Your system sends the Business Name concatenated with the set name on an outgoing call but only after the Business Name has been programmed The available features include e Receiving Connected Name e Receiving Calling Name e Receiving Redirected Name e Sending Connected Name e Sending Calling Party Name Consult your customer service representative to determine which of these features is compatible with your service provider NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 431 ISDN reference Name and number blocking North America only When activated FEATURE 819 allows you to block the outgoing name and or number on a per call basis Name and number blocking can be used with a BCM set Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider Call by Call Service Selection for PRI NI2 North America only PRI NI2 lines can be dynamically allocated to different service types with the Call by Call feature PRI NI2 lines do not have to be pre allocated to a given service type Outgoing cal
153. ances Target lines can have more than one appearance so that multiple calls can be accommodated For telephones that have these lines set to Ring only set to None Caller ID Set Select check box to display caller ID for calls coming in over the target line VMsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter Target lines configuration Target lines are virtual lines that allow the mapping of received digits to a line number over PRI channel 204 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Prerequisites for target lines configuration e Ensure that external number is mapped to internal received number if required e Make a list of DNs where the target lines will get assigned NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 205 Lines configuration Configuring target lines main screen Main screen 206 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Configuring target lines subscreens ih Subscreen tabs Yes NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 207 Lines configuration Configuring target lines Use the following
154. anual or automatic answer Auto Auto answer mode allows the trunk to be a shared resource by the system telephones This shared resource is created through routing to target lines or using DISA For auto answer trunks being used to allow remote call in from system users the trunk can be configured to answer with a straight dial tone if DISA has not been enabled It can also be configured to answer with a Stuttered dial tone if DISA is enabled and the caller is expected to enter a CoS password The CoS password defines which system features the caller is permitted to access Manual answer trunks are assigned to one or more telephones The assigned telephones exclusively own the line Note Y ou require Disconnect supervision on the line if loop start trunks are to operate in auto answer mode Answer with Loop GS E amp M BRI DISA lt check box gt Define whether the system prompts a caller for a six digit class of service CoS password This setting appears forT 1 loop start T1 E amp M lines that have auto answer mode and analog trunks Set this option to No for T1 E amp M lines on a private network that have auto answer mode To program DISA ona PRI trunk you need to specify a DISA DN see Direct Inward System Access DISA creation page 196 If busy TL To Prime Define whether a caller receives a busy tone or the call forwards to the prime telephone when the target line is busy Busy tone only wo
155. ariable Name Value Line Line number Trunk Type Target line Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identity a DN if you are using this line for scheduling Line Type Set to Public if the line is to be shared among telephones or DN if the line is only assigned to one telephone Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Confirm the existing number or enter a public received PSTN DID or PRI trunks that the system will recognize as the target telephone group Priv Received If private network trunks PRI or VoIP trunks are configured enter a Private received This number is usually the same as the DN Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Aux Ringer Use if your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer If Busy To automatically direct calls to the prime telephone selectTo prime from the drop down menu or select Busy tone Voice message center If the system is using remote voice mail select the center that is configured with the contact number Redirect To If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a head office answer attendant enter the remote number here Ensure that
156. art option The Quickstart option is disabled and does not appear in the chairperson administration interface Allow Continue lt check box gt If you select this check box the chairperson can enable or disable the Conference Continuation option The chairperson sets the Conference Continuation option during chairperson administration and during conference For more information see Meet Me Conferencing User Guide NN40020 104 If you do not select this check box the chairperson cannot enable the Conference Continuation option The option is disabled and does not appear in the chairperson administration interface or during the conference NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 339 Meet Me Conferencing configuration Attribute Value Description Allow Announce Off lt check box gt The Announcement settings are Tones Names and Off The Off setting allows the chairperson to turn announcements off For more information see Meet Me Conferencing User Guide NN40020 104 If you select this check box the value Off is offered as an Announcement setting within the chairperson administration menu and during conference If you do not select this check box the chairperson cannot change the Announcement option to Off The Announcement option remains visible in the chairperson administration menu and during conference but Off is not offered as a setting The
157. as a DHCP Server In addition to providing IP addresses to devices on the LAN this DHCP server also provides a DHCP address to the OAM port and to the DSP LAN In addition to these two DHCP components BCM also works with other DHCP devices that may already be on the network BCM50 If you have a BCM50 with a router the router also has a DHCP server that provides addresses to devices on the LAN If you use the DHCP server on the embedded router you cannot configure the DHCP settings on the BCM50 This prevents the situation where two configured DHCP servers conflict with one another If you use the DHCP server on the BCM disable the DHCP server on the router NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 179 BCM DHCP overview On BCM50 models without an integrated router the DHCP server is on the main module The following BCM50 configurations use the DHCP server on the main module BCM50 without the router e BCM50 with an integrated router with the setting Use DHCP on Integrated Router not selected Main module DHCP client The main module IP address can be statically assigned or itcan be a DHCP client As a DHCP client the Core Module receives an IP address from another DHCP server on the network If no DHCP server is available the Main Module uses the default IP address 192 168 1 2 Main module DHCP server The main module has a DHCP Server that provides DHCP and vendor specific i
158. ation This procedure applies to private SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under SIP authentication page 124 Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Authentication 310 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring IP trunks 2 On the Local SIP Authentication subpanel choose the settings for your system e Local Authentication If you select this check box the BSCM authentications all incoming calls e Quality of Protection Authentication only results in authentication user name and password encryption Authentication and Integrity results ina whole message integrity check e 401 Reason The BCM sends out this character string in authentication challenges 3 In the Local Accounts table select Add to add a local account for a remote domain Add one entry for each remote domain whose incoming calls you want to authenticate Choose the settings for each remote domain e UserID UserID supplied by the remote domain e Password Password supplied by the remote domain e Description A description of the remote domain 4 In the Remote Accounts table select Add to add a local account for a remote domain Add one entry for each remote domain that requests authentication of your outgoing calls Choose the settings for each remote domain e R
159. atus of the dial in connection Callback Settings Callback retries lt 1 10 gt The number of attempts made by the BCM to dial out to the remote end during callback Default 3 Callback retry lt 0 360 gt Interval for successive connection attempts for dial out during intenval ts callback Default 60 seconds PPP Configuration These parameters are passed to PPP stack to manage the PPP connection Idle timeout s lt numeric string gt Idle time period after which PPP will terminate the PPP connection Default 1800 seconds Maximum receive lt 128 1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that can be received Default unit 500 Maximum lt 128 1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that will be sent Transmit Unit Default 500 Authentication PAP Supported PPP authentication Default CHAP SUpport CHAP Dial In Settings Assigned Lines Line lt numeric Assign a line for ISDN dial in string gt Dial in Number lt numeric This field is reserved for future use The Dial in number is not string gt required Actions Add 1 Click Add on Dial In Settings to add an assigned line 2 Enter the line number and press OK The line is added to the table Delete 1 Click Delete on Dial In Settings to delete an entry 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box The line is deleted from the table Local IP Address Specification 390 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Commu
160. avigate to Configuration gt Administrator Access gt Accounts and Privileges The Accounts and Privileges panel appears Select the View by Accounts tab From the Accounts area select any account The Details for Account panel appears Select the Remote Access tab Configure the Remote Modem Access attributes End Variable definitions Variable Value Enable remote modem access Selectthis check box to enable the remote modem menu and CLIDs access menu External modem CLID Low priority external modem CLID NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 419 Configuring the remote modem 420 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Silence suppression reference The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The following describes using silence suppression on half duplex and full duplex links Silence suppression also known as voice activity detection reduces bandwidth requirements by as much as 50 percent The following explains how silence suppression functions on a Avaya Business Communications Manager network G 711 and G 729 support Silence suppression A key to VoIP Gateways in business applications is reducing WAN bandwidth use Beyond speech compression the best bandwidth reducing technology is
161. bout these telephone types see the Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Installation Devices NN40170 304 model Avaya 7000 Deskphones supported in Europe only Diversion feature Diversion is a DPNSS 1 feature for Avaya BCM that allows users to forward their calls to a third party on the DPNSS 1 network This feature is similar to Call Forward on Avaya BCM but takes advantage of the broader capabilities of DPNSS There are five variations of Diversion Call Diversion Immediate Call Diversion On Busy Call Diversion On No Reply Bypass Call Diversion and Follow me Diversion These variations are described below e Diversion Immediate diverts all calls to an alternate telephone This function is programmed by the user at their telephone e Diversion On Busy diverts all calls to an alternate telephone when a telephone is busy You can program this feature in the Business Element Manager e Diversion On No Reply diverts calls that go unanswered after a specified amount of time You can program this feature in the Business Element Manager e Bypass Call Diversion overrides all call forward features active on a telephone over a DPNSS line An incoming call to the telephone will not be forwarded instead the telephone will continue to ring as if call forward were not active This feature is used to force a call to be answered at thatlocation Bypass Call Diversion is a receive only feature on Avaya BCM and cannot be used from a Avaya
162. call completes This information is also reported to the Call Detail Reporting Application The information can be provided in currency or charging units depending on how the feature is set up by your service provider To invoke the feature the user presses FEATURE 818 DPNSS 1 services The Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS 1 is a networking protocol enhancement that extends the private networking capabilities of existing Avaya BCM systems It is designed to offer greater centralized functionality for operators giving them access to Avaya BCM features over multiple combined networks Attention The DPNSS feature is dependent on which region loaded on your system at startup and that a software keycode was entered to enable the feature For more information see e DPNSS 1 capabilities page 43 e DPNSS 1 features page 44 e Private networking with DPNSS international only page 50 DPNSS 1 allows a Avaya BCM local node acting as a terminating node to communicate with other PBXs over the network For example corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS 1 to other Avaya BCM nodes Avaya BCM the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected Connected Avaya BCM nodes can therefore function like a private network with all features of Avaya BCM accessible Attention Avaya BCM DPNSS 1 works as a terminating node only Avaya BCM to BCM DPNSS is not supported You can use DPNSS 1 featur
163. caller dials a system code and a DN In the example shown above it might be 769 4006 4 The call comes into the trunk which answers and maps the call on the target line assigned to the matching received digits 5 The DN assigned to that target line rings You can assign unanswered or busy telephones to Call Forward to another DN such as a designated attendant or a voice mail system Basic telephony routing In a basic configuration simple access codes for example Line Pool Codes are used to access the PSTN network In a more complex configuration more advanced destination codes are required to access multiple PSTNs private network resources and remote nodes Access to these resources enables advanced features such as tandem routing Tandem calling to a remote PSTN A system connected to a private network that uses dedicated circuits or VoIP circuits can allow a user to dial directly to many other users on different nodes using a coordinating dialing plan Using a private network saves on toll charges and local charges as fewer PSTN accesses are required for internal and external calling Several nodes located on one site initiate their external local calls to a centralized Avaya BCM having aT1 or E1 termination to the PSTN This type of configuration avoids multiple PSTN terminations at other local nodes The same tandeming concepts can be applied to inbound calls DID numbers dialed from the PSTN can be processed and tandem ro
164. calls from other nodes on the private network ensure that you indicate a remote package that provides only the availability that you want external callers to have This attribute is typically used for tandeming calls Default Normal Night Evening Lunch Sched 4 Sched 5 Sched 6 Enter the restriction filter number that applies to each schedule controls outgoing calls Enter the restriction filter that applies to each schedule This setting provides call controls for incoming calls over a private network or from remote user dialing in over PSTN Assigned DNs The Assigned DNs tabbed panel displays the DN properties for lines that are assigned to telephones For more information about how to assign target lines to DNs in bulk using the Renumber button see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 This information can also be configured on the DN record Any information added deleted or modified in this table reflects in the DN record Lines that do not allow single line assignment such as PRI lines and VoIP lines will not display this tabbed panel The Assigned DNs tab is shown in the following figure NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 145 Line configuration overview Add a DN record Details for Line 061 Properties Preferences Restrictions Assigned DNs DN Appearance Type Appeara
165. cantly higher bandwidth and speed than analog transmission because of its end to end digital connectivity on all transmission circuits Being digital allows ISDN lines to provide better quality signaling than analog POTS lines and ISDN out of band data channel signaling offers faster call set up and tear down NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 427 ISDN reference While an analog line carries only a single transmission ata time an ISDN line can carry one or more voice data fax and video transmissions simultaneously An analog modem operating at 14 4K takes about 4 5 minutes to transfer a 1MB data file and a 28 8K modem takes about half that time Using one channel of an ISDN line the transfer time is reduced to only 1 minute and if two ISDN channels are used transfer time is just 30 seconds When transmitting data the connect time for an average ISDN call is about three seconds per call compared to about 21 seconds for the average analog modem call Types of ISDN service Two types of ISDN services lines are available Basic Rate Interface BRI and Primary Rate Interface PRI Each line is made up of separate channels known as B and D channels which transmit information simultaneously e BRI is known as 2B D because it consists of two B channels and one D channel e PRI is known as 23B D in North America or as 30B D in Europe In North America 23B D consists of 23 B
166. ce Size double click the Maximum Conference Size cell of the COS to change 6 Delete the current value Enter a new Maximum Conference Size value To change Allow Quick Start Allow Continue or Allow Announce Off click the check box of the COS to change 9 To change the Conference Language double click the Conference Language cell of the COS to change 10 Click the list 11 Select Primary or Alternate End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 337 Meet Me Conferencing configuration Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Welcome greeting Company greeting ID lt Blank ora Company Greeting number 1 256 gt Default Blank The system plays the Welcome greeting for external callers If the company greeting is blank the system plays the standard greeting Welcome to the Meet Me Conferencing Service If you assign the company greeting the administrator can select any existing Company Greeting to use as a Welcome greeting for this service The administrator records and maintains these greetings using the voice mail administration interface Maximum chairperson wait time min lt 1 120 gt Default 20 minutes This attribute limits the amount of time that system resources can be tied up waiting for a conference to start If the chairperson fails to log on within this limit the system informs participants and terminates the
167. ces are in use when the conference is reduced to a single participant This limit prevents an abandoned line from tying up a port Note If you assign this setting to a value higher than the Maximum Conference Continuation Time ithas no effect because the system disconnects the conference when the Maximum Conference Continuation Time limit expires Authorization check period days lt 0 365 gt Default 60 days This attribute controls the Authorization Check feature If assigned 0 the feature is disabled Otherwise the chairperson must change the PIN locally at least once during this period to maintain access For more information about description of the PIN see Meet Me Conferencing User Guide NN40020 104 Class of Service Controls COS ID lt 1 16 gt The ID of COS Name lt alphanumeric gt The name of the COS Max Conference Size BCM450 lt 4 60 gt BCM50 lt 4 18 gt The largest number of participants including the chairperson that the chairperson can host subject to resource availability Allow Quick Start lt check box gt The QuickStart option allows the conference to start without the chairperson If you select this check box the chairperson enables or disables the Quickstart feature in the chairperson administration menu For more information see Meet Me Conferencing User Guide NN40020 104 If you do not select this check box the chairperson cannot enable the Quickst
168. cess Enabling this option allows traffic from the LAN Interface network to traverse to another LAN or VLAN Default gateway The gateway used by the BCM system IP Address The IP address of the BCM system Name Subnet Mask The value for the VLAN used to determine the VLAN IP range VLAN ID Delete a VLAN from the network when it is no longer required Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem 2 Select the VLAN Interfaces tab 3 In the VLAN Interfaces Summary area select the VLAN to be deleted 4 Click Delete The confirmation window appears 5 Click Yes The selected VLAN is deleted End Variable definitions Variable Value Allow Network Access Enabling this option allows traffic from the LAN Interface network to traverse to another LAN or VLAN Default gateway The gateway used by the BCM system IP Address The IP address of the BCM system Name Subnet Mask The subnet mask value for the VLAN used to determine the VLAN IP range 402 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring virtual LANs Modifying a VLAN Modify the attributes of VLAN when changes are required on the network Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem 2 Select the VLAN Interfaces tab 3 From the VLAN Interfaces Summary area cl
169. cess code contains an Equal Access Identifier Code CAC followed by a Carrier Identification Code CIC The CIC identifies the carrier that handles the call The Carrier Access Code table stores the CAC digit pattern that you define for your region In most cases itis not necessary to change the default values You can define up to five carrier codes e Two entries will be predefined in North America but you can remove these defaults e Each entry consists of an equal access identifier code prefix one to six digits and a carrier identification code length one digit 1 to 9 e Each entry is identified by the prefix digits themselves Direct dial set configuration The Direct dial setting allows you to dial a single system wide digit to call a specific telephone called a direct dial telephone The most common example of a direct dial set is a telephone for an operator a receptionist or an attendant You can program a maximum of five direct dial sets on the system however you can only specify one direct dial number for the system NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 271 Dialing plan configuration general Use the following procedure to identify a direct dial set to Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 system Defining a direct dial set Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt General 2 On the Direct Dial table click the fields beside
170. channels and one D channel T1 carrier In Europe 30B D consists of 30 B channels and one D channel E1 carrier B channels B channels are the bearer channel and are used to carry voice or data information and have speeds of 64 kbps Since each ISDN link BRI or PRI has more than one B channel a user can perform more than one transmission at the same time using a single ISDN link D channels The standard signaling protocol is transmitted over a dedicated data channel called the D channel The D channel carries call setup and feature activation information to the destination and has speeds of 16 kbps BRI and 64 kbps PRI Data information consists of control and signal information and for BRI only packet switched data such as credit card verification ISDN layers ISDN layers refer to the standards established to guide the manufacturers of ISDN equipment and are based on the OSI Open Systems Interconnection model The layers include both physical connections such as wiring and logical connections which are programmed in computer software When equipment is designed to the ISDN standard for one of the layers it works with equipment for the layers above and below it Three layers are atwork in ISDN for BCM To support ISDN service all three layers must be working properly e Layer1 A physical connection that supports fundamental signaling passed between the ISDN network your service provider and the BCM system When the LED ona
171. configuration PRI line configuration process part A NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 211 Lines configuration PRI line configuration process part B Restrictions subscreen SS Configuring PRI lines Use this procedure to configure PRI lines These lines cannot be assigned to DNs as line assignments They are assigned only as line pools Instead configure target lines for each telephone and assign the target line to the telephones For more information see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 212 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click on Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt All Lines 2 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel for the following variables Line Trunk Type Name Control Set Line Type Prime Set Distinct Ring Select a line and click on the Restrictions tab 4 Set the restrictions for the following variables Use Remote Package Line Restrictions Remote Restrictions End Variable definitions Variable Name Value Line Line number Trunk Type PRI Setup the PRI Protocol Telephony Resources panel first Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identity a DN if you are using this line for scheduling L
172. d interface to configure the DHCP parameters ed eae carte aa When you clear this check box you configure DHCP parameters on y i the CSC card This field does not appear on BCM models with no integrated router Note When the DHCP server runs on the CSC card the DHCP server on the router must be disabled You see a warning message if you clear this check box DHCP Server Disabled DHCP server mode is Enabled IP Phones The default for this field is Disabled Only Enabled All Devices IP domain name lt alphanumeric character string gt The domain name of the network Primary DNS IP lt IP Address format The IP address of the primary DNS to be used by DHCP clients address 10 10 10 10 gt Secondary lt IP Address format The IP address of the secondary DNS to be used by DHCP clients DNS IP 10 10 10 10 gt address WINS server lt IP Address format The address of the Windows Internet Server which resolves IP address 10 10 10 10 gt addresses on a DHCP network WINS node type lt drop down menu gt The type of WINS node e B node The BCM450 first checks the HMHOSTS cache then uses broadcast for name registration and resolution e P node The BCM450 registers with a NetBIOS Name server at startup e M node Mixes B and P node The BCM450 uses the B node method and if that fails uses the P node method e H node Uses both B and P node methods B node is used only as a last resort
173. d M lines 219 T1 E1 loop start lines configuration 222 Configuring T1 E1 loop start lines 226 T1 digital ground start configuration 229 Configuring T1 digital ground start lines 232 T1 DID lines configuration 234 Configuring T1 DID lines 237 DASS2 lines configuration 239 Configuring DASS2 lines 242 DPNSS lines configuration 244 Configuring DPNSS lines 247 BRI T loops configuration 251 Configuring BRI T loop parameters 251 Configuring provisioned BRI line features 253 BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices programming 257 Setting BRI properties for ISDN device connections 257 Configuring an ISDN telephone DN record 258 Calling line identification configuration 261 CLID configuration for incoming calls 261 Allowing CLID for telephones 261 Setting up alpha tagging forname display 264 Configuring Network Name Display elements 264 Configuring Business Names 265 Configuring Business Names to telephones 265 Configuring Long Names to telephones 266 CLID configuration for outgoing calls 266 Configuring a business name for outgoing CLID display 267 Displaying the internal name and extension 267 Setting internal CLID display on calling set 267 Configuring Outgoing Call Identification 267 Blocking outgoing name display at the trunk level 268 Blocking outgoing name display at the telephone level 268 Dialing plan configuration general 271 Carrier codes management 271 Direct dial set configuration 271 8 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6
174. d for an application limit Current maximum The current maximum assigned for an application assigned limit Note Indicates any pending changes Types of resources There are four types of resources managed by the Application Resources panel e Signalling channels e VDI channels e Media channels e DSP resources Different applications require different resources For example each media gateway requires one DSP Resource and one media channel but does not require any signalling channels or VDI channels Use the Application Resources Reservations table to see what resources are required by each application Whenever an entry contains N A the application does not use that resource Total and Reserved Resources The total and reserved resource options display the current levels of total and reserved resources The total resource table displays the total resources on the system while the reserved resource table displays what resources are currently allocated or in use NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 65 Applications Resources overview Since the total number of resources for signalling channels VDI channels and media channels exceeds the maximum capacity for the BCM you do not need to manage the resources based on these channels For example IP Trunks are the only application that use VDI channels and even if the BCM450 maximum of 130 IP trunks are in use the
175. der address DNS match The system finds a match based on the IP address of the topmost Via header of the incoming request and finds a match if the hostname part of topmost Via header is an IP address appearing in the list of IP addresses resolved into the via DNS lookup of ITSP account SIP domain name The system uses the parent SIP trunk user account of the ITSP ifa match is found From header Proxy address match The system finds a match based on the hostname of the From header of the incoming request and finds a match if the hostname part of the From header is an IP address appearing in the list of IP addresses resolved into the via DNS lookup of the ITSP account outbound proxy name Alternatively it will find a match if the hostname is an FQDN string match on outbound proxy name Via header Proxy address match The system finds a match based on the hostname of the topmost Via header of the incoming request and finds a match if the hostname part of the Via header is an IP address appearing in the list of IP addresses resolved into via DNS lookup of the ITSP account outbound proxy name Alternatively it will find a match if the hostname is FQDN string match on outbound proxy name To header Local Domain match The system finds a match based on the hostname of the To header of the incoming request and finds a match if hostname part of the To header matches the ITSP account local domain field The system uses the pa
176. describe configuration for private networking e Private networking Fallback configuration over a VoIP MCDN network page 283 e Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features configuration page 287 For more information on the planning and configuration of the following private networking features refer to Business Communication Manager 450 1 0 Planning and Engineering NN40160 200 e Basic parameters e MCDN over PRI and VoIP e MCDN and ETSI e PRI and VoIP tandem networks e DPNSS network services e Using destination codes e PRI call by call services NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 281 Private networking 282 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Private networking Fallback configuration over a VoIP MCDN network The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The Voice over IP VoIP MCDN networking protocol between a Meridian 1 and one or more BCMs works the same way as it does over PRI lines You still require the MCDN and IP telephony software keys and compatible dialing plans on all networked systems The one difference between MCDN over PRI and MCDN over VoIP is that the VoIP trunks require specific Remote Gateway settings unless there is a Gatekeeper configured to route traffic on the IP network You must
177. directed Priority calls cannot be redirected NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 197 Call security and remote access overview If you use Meet Me Conferencing Avaya recommends you increase the maximum number of resources from 10 to 15 Remote access on a private network Systems connected to the private network deliver the last dialed digits to the destination BCM system for interpretation The destination BCM system matches the digits to a target line or interprets the digits as a remote feature request BCM then routes the call to the specified target line or activates the remote feature By default T1 E amp M trunks are set to answer with DISA For auto answer T1 E amp M trunks connected to a private network change the default so that the trunks are not answered with DISA If an auto answer T1 E amp M trunk is configured to answer with DISA the system tries to interpret any received digits as a CoS password The DISA DN and the Auto DN allow auto answer private network and DID calls in the same way that calls on auto answer loop start and auto answer T1 E amp M trunks can be answered with or without DISA For more information about DNs see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 Answer with DISA cannotbe administered to a PRI trunk Instead you can program the dialed digits to match those of a specific target line DN the DISA DN or the A
178. distributed Linux OS source code for those Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support Web site http support avaya com Copyright Trademarks The trademarks logos and service marks Marks displayed in this site the documentation s and product s provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya its affiliates or other third parties Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party which may own the Mark Nothing contained in this site the documentation s and product s should be construed as granting by implication estoppel or otherwise any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc All non Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners Downloading documents For the most current versions of documentation see the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Contact Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product The support telephone number is 1 800 242 2121 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support Contents Content
179. e Locate the fax machine away from other telephones Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off if that option is available SIP trunks public trunk configuration Typically a public SIP trunk is implemented by an Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP over the public Internet Configuring a public SIP trunk on the BCM involves creating an optional ITSP template account configuration and the configuration of a route You also need to configure the options common to all IP trunks Options common to all IP trunks page 99 and common to public and private SIP trunks SIP trunks options common to public and private SIP trunks page 101 To find the SIP public trunk configuration panels in Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking and click the P ublic tab There are three tabs under the Public tab e Routing Table for viewing and configuring public SIP routes e Accounts for creating ITSP accounts e ITSP Templates for importing ITSP templates and creating accounts using templates ITSP accounts 106 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 You must configure an account for each ITSP and you must configure the account before you can add a route for that ITSP You can also add user accounts to an ITSP account IP VoIP trunk configuration To configure an account you must
180. e Enter the digit 8 for Norstar Voice Mail User Interface NVMUI only To enable fax call answering when using Call Pilot Manager User Interface CPUI enter 707 e Increase the call duration by adding a timed pause to the end of the dialing string This addition allows the call to ring at the destination before the fax machine call duration timer starts Refer to your fax machine documentation for more information on how to insert pauses into dial strings e Because the problem is related to the delay in initiating the fax session reduce the number of rings for fax mailboxes Call Forward No Answer CFNA 326 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 SIP fax over G 711 configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 This feature allows fax to be transmitted using G 711 over SIP trunks in networks that contain SIP endpoint devices that do not support T 38 fax Configure IP trunks and gateways before you set up the G 711 fax protocol For more information about configuring VoIP trunks refer to Lines configuration page 203 To configure this feature designate the analog ports to which fax machines are connected as Modem rather than Telephone This indicates to IP trunks that the bearer capability of these ports is 3 1 K audio You can choose between T 38 or G 711 to trans
181. e click Add Enter the digits that you want to restrict if they precede a dial string going out of the system Click OK Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all filters you want to add To apply overrides to a filter on the Restricted table click the restricted digit to which you want to add overrides 8 Under the Exceptions table click Add 332 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Restriction filters configuration 9 Enter the number that you want to allow when this restriction is in effect 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 for all overrides you want to add to this filter 11 Repeat steps 7 to 10 for all the filters to which you want to add overrides Next steps include assigning filters to lines DN records and class of service COS passwords for remote access End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Filters Table Filter lt 0 99 gt This is the list number for the filter This is the number that you will use on the configuration panels that require restriction filter entries Restrictions Table Digits lt dialstring digit s gt For each filter enter the restriction digit dial string based on what the restriction is for The dial string is the number that is restricted from being dialed on the system Exceptions Table Digits lt dialstring digit s gt For each restriction digit enter any numbers that should dial out despite the
182. e IP to Address field of this section to the remote end of the connection remote Default disabled IP Address lt IP When the Assign IP address to remote is enabled the BCM Addresses assigns to the remote end of the connection the IP address specified in this field Default 10 10 14 2 388 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dial up resources configuration ISDN dial in parameters configuration The ISDN Dial In Parameters controls Dial in to the BCM for remote access This panel is used to configure the ISDN for Dial in It also displays the connection status of the ISDN connections if any are in progress ISDN lines used for ISDN dial in can be assigned to telephone sets for voice The ISDN setup message specifies whether the call is data or voice and the BCM handles it accordingly Attention ISDN Dial in will be disabled if both ISDN auto dialout interfaces are enabled Prerequisites for ISDN dial in parameters configuration e Callback is configured in User Accounts For more information see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Administration and Security NN40170 603 The Callback settings must be configured in order for callback to occur ISDN dial in parameters configuration navigation e Configuring ISDN dial in access page 389 e Configuring the ISDN dial out IP address page 392 Configuring ISDN dial in access Use the following procedure to config
183. e Registrar P ort This field acts as a listening port of the registrar ifthe portis different from the default SIP port e Expiry This field provides the registration expiry interval the client requests from the registrar Registrar can reject the expiry if the expiry is too short or honor the expiry request or deliver a possibly shorter interval 4 Click OK to add the SIP user account End 312 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring IP trunks To modify a SIP user account Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Authentication 2 From the User Accounts subpanel click Modify to modify a existing user account parameters 3 You cannot modify the Domain and CLID field You can change the other parameters Description Enter the description that you want in this field SIP username Enter the SIP user name provided by the SIP trunking service provider Auth name Enter the authentication user name used in authentication challenges SIP trunking service provider provides this parameter Authentication name can be different from SIP user name Auth password Enter the password used for registration and outgoing calls Realm In field is only used when outbound proxy with separate authentication credentials is used to route calls to the target domain CLID Override This is an opti
184. e available options are Raw and Text Start Time A read only window which is initialized by system current time when capture is initiated by hitting the Start button Duration sec Length of time to execute capture Stopping a capture Use the following procedure to stop a capture Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Administration gt Utilities gt LAN IP Capture The LAN IP Capture panel appears 2 Select the Capture tab Itis normally selected by default 3 Click Stop End Variable definitions Variable Value End Time A read only window which is populated with current system time when capture is stopped for any reason 414 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring LAN packet IP capture Adding a filter Use the following procedure to add a filter to build a set of rules to be used to capture IP packets Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Administration gt Utilities gt LAN IP Capture The LAN IP Capture panel appears Select the Filters tab Click Add The Add Rule dialog box appears Configure the attributes Click OK End Variable definitions Variable Value Protocol The protocol used to capture packets The options available are Ethernet IP TCO UDP Direction Direction values are Src capture IP packets with IPaddr AND Port
185. e destination for the call If the call routes through the first Meridian M1 to reach the second Meridian M2 two trunks are required for the call An optimal choice is a straight connection to M2 This finds these connections and overrides the less efficient setup The following figure shows two call paths The first route through the Meridian demonstrates how a call might route if TRO is not active The second route that bypasses the Meridian demonstrates how TRO selects the optimum routing for a call Call paths from BCM 450 with and without TRO Meridian 1 fo Elephone B Meridian 1 LC 7 m Se Original call no TRO m me Forwarded call no TRO Telephone A seco Mie Call path with TRO Telephone C The following figure shows two call paths The first route through the Meridian demonstrates how a call might route if TRO is not active The second route that bypasses the Meridian demonstrates how TRO selects the optimum routing for a call NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 39 System telephony networking overview Call paths from BCM50 with and without TRO Meridian 1 P Elephone B f wW Ta Y Meridian 1 mm PRI SL 1 C 7 mm 1S ee Po PRI SL 1 _ m Se Original call no TRO m mp Forwarded call no TRO aoe i Call path with TRO Telephone C Telephone A Networking with ETSI QSIG international systems only ETSI QSIG
186. e fields ifa Gatekeeper controls the network For more information about VoIP interoperability gatekeeper configuration see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 Primary Gatekeeper IP This is the IP address of the primary gatekeeper Backup Gatekeepers NetCentrex gatekeeper does not supportRAS therefore you must enter backup gatekeepers in this field Gatekeepers that use RAS can provide a list of backup gatekeepers for the end point to use if the primary gatekeeper fails Alias names Enter all the alias names required to direct call signals to your system Gateway protocol Select SL 1 for BCM 2 5 systems CSE for BCM 3 0 and newer systems or select None Registration TTLs Specifies the KeepAlive interval Gateway TTLs This protocol should match all other systems on the network Status This field displays the current status of the gatekeeper 3 Suggested next steps Ensure router settings firewalls and system ports are set correctly to support IP traffic over the trunks Ensure private network dialing plan and access settings match the rest of the private network Assign the VoIP line pools to system telephones End Configuring H 323 media parameters Use this procedure to configure H 323 media parameters Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under H 323 media parameters page 132 Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate t
187. e for each type of resource Reserved Resources The Reserved Resources options show the resources currently reserved or in use Application Resource Reservations Use the Application Resource Reservations table allow you to set minimum and maximum values for telephony resources The table contains 10 columns 8 of which are read only For information about determining the appropriate values for each type of application see Setting values for application resources page 66 Details for application The Details for Application panel changes whenever you select a different row from the Application Resource Reservations table The panel reflects the current minimum and maximum limits in instances where changes do not happen immediately NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 61 Applications Resources overview Application Resources panel for the BCM450 Application Resources Total Resources Reserved Resources Signalling channels 580 Signalling channels VDI channels 194 VDI channels Media channels 1042 Media channels DSP resources 180 DSP resources Application Resource Reservations Application Minimum Maximum Licence System Max Change Pending Restore Defaults 62 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Applications Resources overview Application Resources panel on the BCM50 Applicati
188. e mail over PRI lines Apart from line configuration MCDN over VoIP has the same system configuration Procedure steps Step 1 Action Ensure that the remote voice mail system is set up to accommodate your system on the network To ensure that your dialing plan coordinates with what the other nodes on the network are using select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private network To enter the network system identifier the Meridian system administrator supplied between 1 and 127 if you are networked with a Meridian 1 select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network In the Private Network Settings pane select a value for Private network type Install a DTM module to connect to the appropriate PRI SL 1 trunk or enter the keycode for the required number of VoIP trunks Configure the lines you plan to use assigning them to the same line pool Refer to Lines configuration page 203 Enter the MCDN keycode Select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network In the MCDN pane choose the MCDN network features that you want to use Set up routing to target the PRI or VoIP line pool you set up NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 297 Centralized voice mail configuration 9 Setup your dialing plan to recognize the network system identifiers of the other nodes on the system so your system can pass them along
189. e mode e Output format for captured packets file or stream e Destination IP address and port to forward captured stream to e Output file name e Output file size 178 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BCM DHCP overview Navigation The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The following explains how DHCP can be set up in a variety of configurations on the Avaya BCM based on your needs your existing network and the version of the Avaya BCM that you have For procedures on how to configure DHCP for BCM see DHCP server configuration on BCM main module page 363 e DHCP context for the BCM platform page 179 e DHCP default configuration page 180 DHCP context for the BCM platform Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a protocol used to assign IP addresses to devices on an IP network dynamically With DHCP each device obtains a new IP address every time it connects to the network DHCP allows a server to keep track of the IP addresses for all IP devices on the network On the BCM DHCP reduces the complexity of configuring IP devices particularly IP phones Notonly do IP phones receive an IP address through DHCP they also receive additional information such as gateway and port information DHCP on BCM BCM uses DHCP ina variety of ways The core of BCM h
190. e multiple gateways you could use a unique first number followed by the destination digits to provide some consistency such as 82 83 84 85 to reach gateways with destinations digits of 2 3 4 and 5 Attention The number you choose also depends on the type of dialing plan the network uses Networks and CDP dialing plans have unique system codes However with networks using UDP this is not always the case therefore you need to be careful with the routing to ensure that the codes you choose are unique to the route This also affects the number of digits that have to be added or absorbed It is helpful to use the Programming Records to plan network routing so you can determine if there will be any conflicts with the destination codes you want to use 322 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 T 38 fax configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 T 38 fax is a Fax over IP FolP gateway protocol that allows standard T 30 or Group3 fax machines to make calls over IP based networks The T 38 fax protocol functions transparently with standard fax machines because it emulates a normal T 30 fax connection Each endpoint of the IP trunk becomes a T 38 gateway Prerequisites for T 38 fax configuration e Configured and functional IP trunks and gateways e Two or four MS PEC I
191. e selected in the Where to send recording field 6 Select the checkbox corresponding to the Don t include key presses field if you do not want the record any key pressing sounds If you want to record the key pressing sounds disable the checkbox NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 171 Professional call recording 7 In the Manual stop record behavior field select the option as required The options are e Disabled This option applies only when the call recording rule is set to Manual through F995 e Abort recording Stop the recording immediately but keep the first part of the call The email will contain from the time that the user used F995 to start the recording until they entered F996 to stop the recording e Stop and keep recording Stop the recording immediately and discard the recording entirely 8 In the Follow call logic field select the call following logic to be applied The values available in the drop down list are as follows e Disabled No calls are to be followed e Forwarded Calls Only Follow a call only when itis forwarded to a secondary set e Follow All Calls Follow all calls through the call forwarding functionality on the BCM The following are the supported modes e TAT TRO In many cases the follow call option will handle trunk route optimizations e SIP Refer When calls are transferred from one SIP trunk to a second SIP trunk e F70 calls t
192. e the number of SIP trunks on the system would exceed the available resources there is generally no need to modify the resources for this application However if you want to limit the number of SIP trunk connections you can change the maximum value BCM450 supports a maximum of 130 SIP trunks BCM50 supports a maximum of 12 SIP trunks Digital Trunks Because there is no circumstance where the number of digital trunks on the system would exceed the available resources there is generally no need to modify the resources for this application However if you want to limit the number of digital trunk connections you can change the maximum value BCM450 supports a maximum of 130 digital trunks BCM50 supports a maximum of 2 digital trunks 68 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines overview The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 Telephony signals into the system within the system and out of the system are carried over channels For consistency these channels are all called lines or trunks This designation includes circuit switched lines PSTN connect to the system through media bay modules Voice over IP VoIP trunks connect through the LAN or IP network target lines internal channels connect PRI T1 and VoIP trunks to specific devices intercom lines connect all inter
193. e trunk T1 E amp M DID trunks T1 DID trunks PRI trunks and VoIP trunks A CAUTION AURisk of service loss If you change the received length for your system the Public number entry for the targetlines will clear ifthe new received length is less than the number entered in this field If the new received length has more digits than the number entered in this field you need to change the entry manually if changes are required NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 71 Lines overview CO trunks as physical lines BRI loops Physical lines are the central office CO trunks assigned to the trunk media bay modules For more information about which lines are enabled see Avaya Business Communications Manager 450 6 0 Installation System NN40170 303 You can change the line types to suit your system For instance BRI and DTM modules can be designated to a number of line types depending on the type of line service provided through the central office CO However the line numbers are associated for specific tasks or to specific DS 30 bus numbers The line record allows you to program settings for lines that affect how the lines operate in the network and with other switches as well as how the system uses the line Trunk types e VoIP e DTM digital TI types Loop E amp M DID Ground or fixed data channel PRI DASS2 DPNSS e CTM North America GAT
194. ealm domain The remote domain e UserID The User ID supplied by your BCM for authentication with the remote domain e Password The Password supplied by your BCM for authentication with the remote domain e Description A description of the remote domain End Configuring SIP authentication for a SIP user account Use the following procedures to add or modify a SIP user account These procedures apply to private SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under SIP authentication page 124 To add a SIP user account Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Authentication 2 From the User Accounts subpanel click Add to add the user account parameters The Add Auth Account panel appears 3 Configure the parameters of the Add Auth Account panel e Description Enter the description that you want in this field NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 311 Configuring IP trunks e Domain Enter the targetSIP domain to which the SIP user account belongs e Parent Select the check box if you want the SIP user account as parent account If you select the parent check box the CLID field disappears e CLID Enter the CLID number if you want to use the SIP user account as the child account e SIP username Enter the SIP user name provided by the SIP t
195. ecific Facilities NSF information element is used to requesta particular service from the network Settings are based on the type of switch to which the line connects Suggested settings DMS 100 250 NONE Siemens ESWD Lucent5ESS WATS GTD5 DMS 10 ALL When you select NONE the NSF extension bit is not set for any service When you select WATS the NSF extension bit is set for unbanded OUTWATS calls When you select ALL the NSF extension is always set for all CbC services Appears only for NI protocol Protocol type User Network PRI When you select SL 1 protocol an additional setting Protocol type appears SL 1 protocol is a private networking protocol Use this protocol to designate a BCM node as a Network controller The default setting is User client In public network configurations the CO is generally considered the Network side or controller Applies to SL 1 protocol only B channel selection sequence Ascending Sequential PRI Descending Sequential Defines how B channel resources are selected for call processing Answer timer 1 2 3 4 or 5 sec E amp M PRI Set the minimum duration of an answer signal before a call is considered to be answered NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 83 Telephony resources configuration Module parameters values Attributes Value Module line type Disconnect 60 100
196. ect IP telephony system controls for codecs jitter buffers silence suppression and payload size The parameters to enable T 38 Fax signals are also included The following table describes the fields of the SIP Media Parameters tab For the corresponding procedure see Configuring SIP media parameters page 304 SIP Media Parameters field descriptions Attribute Value Description Preferred Codecs Preferred None Select the codecs in the order in which you want the system G 711 uLaw to attempt to use them aa Attention Codecs on all networked BCMs must be consistent to ensure that interacting features such as ria Transfer and Conference work correctly Attention The G 723 codec can be used between IP endpoints If other types of connections are required ensure one of the other codecs is also selected Actions Selecta codec 1 From the Available list select the codec you want to add to the Selected list 2 Click the right pointing arrow to move the codec to the Selected list Deselect a codec 1 From the Selected list select a codec that you want to remove from the Selected list 2 Click the left pointing arrow to move the codec back to the Available list Reorder the 1 In the Selected list select a codec Selected list 2 Click the appropriate arrow to move the codec up or down in the Selected list 104 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telepho
197. edia gateway resources Media gateways require DSP resources Because there is often a slight delay in allocating the DSP resources you may want to set the minimum to 2 or more This will ensure that there is generally no delay in setting up the media gateway Voice mail and Contact Center resources These resources require DSP resources Because there is often a slight delay in allocating DSP resources you may want to set the minimum to 2 or more This setting generally ensures that there is no delay in setting up the application If you use Meet Me Conferencing Avaya recommends you increase the maximum number of resources from 10 to 15 Fax In BCM450 fax has a maximum of 8 ports In BCM50 fax has a maximum of 2 ports Each fax port uses three DSP resources so if you find that your system is always running low on resources you may want to limit your maximum fax ports Conf Parties In BCM450 the total number of parties across all simultaneous conferences cannot exceed 124 In BCM50 the total number of parties across all simultaneous conferences cannot exceed 18 and a single conference can contain up to 18 parties Conf Mixers A conference mixer allows several conference parties to be mixed into a conference BCM supports up to 9 simultaneous conferences NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 67 Applications Resources overview SIP Trunks Because there is no circumstance wher
198. edure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Administration gt Utilities gt LAN IP Capture The LAN IP Capture panel appears Select the Configuration tab Select the Output type either BCM USB or Network that you want from list Configure the attributes End Variable definitions Variable Value File Name Name of the file which used to store captured packets in specified location File Size The size of the captured file File List List of the captured files available for browsing and performing download or delete operations Download Location The location on the local PC to upload selected captured file Network Folder The network name or IP address of the machine Visible only for Network format Directory The directory where captured files are stored to User Name and Password Used for authentication Visible only for Network formats 418 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring the remote modem The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 This chapter describes how to configure the modem remotely Navigation e Configuring the remote modem page 419 Configuring the remote modem Use the following procedure to configure the modem remotely Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager n
199. ekeeper resolves the phone Gatekeeper Routed numbers into IP addresses but the gatekeeper is not no RAS involved in call signaling All call signaling occurs directly between H 323 endpoints Gatekeeper Routed Uses a gatekeeper for call setup and control In this method call signaling is directed through the gatekeeper Gatekeeper Routed no RAS Use this setting fora NetCentrex gatekeeper With this setting the system routes all calls through the gatekeeper but uses none of the gatekeeper Registration and Admission Services RAS Enable H245 lt check box gt If you select the check box the IP Gateway tunnels H 245 tunneling Default Unselected messages within H 225 You must restart the IP Gateway service for the change to take effect Primary Gatekeeper lt IP Address gt If Gatekeeper Routed Gatekeeper Resolved or IP Gatekeeper Routed no RAS are selected under Call Signaling type the IP address of the machine that is running the gatekeeper Backup lt IP Address gt NetCentrex gatekeeper does not support RAS therefore Gatekeeper s lt IP Address gt any backup gatekeepers must be entered in this field Attention Gatekeepers that use RAS can provide a list of backup gatekeepers for the end point to use in the event of the primary gatekeeper failure 130 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration H323 Settings field descriptions
200. el Silent Record a Call Network Storage Locations SFTP Dest Table Dest ID FTP Method IP or Name FTP User FTP Password Destination f Variable Definitions Attribute Value Description Dest ID Number automatically The unique location destination ID generated when you add a within the table storage location starting at 1 FTP Method Secure FTP SFTP SFTP is FTP over SSL Regular FTP FTP Default SFTP IP or Name lt IP address gt or lt host name gt IP Address or Host name of FTP server FTP User lt alphanumeric gt FTP Username FTP Password lt alphanumeric gt FTP User password NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 291 Silent Record a Call configuration Variable Definitions Attribute Value Description Destination FTP Folder lt alphanumeric gt Location of recorded WAV files Actions Add To add a network storage location e On the Silent Record a Call Network Storage Locations panel click Add The Add Network Location dialog box appears e Setthe FTP Method e Enter the IP Address or Host Name e Enter your FTP User name e Enter your FTP User password e Enter the Destination FTP Folder path e Press Ok The Network Storage Location appears in the table Modify To modify a network storage location e On the Silent Record a Call Network Storage Locations panel select the Network Storage Location you
201. elected Actions Select a codec 1 From the Available list select the codec you want to add to the Selected list 2 Click the right pointing arrow to move the codec to the Selected list Deselect a codec 1 From the Selected list select a codec that you want to remove from the Selected list 2 Click the left pointing arrow to move the codec back to the Available list Reorder the codec 1 In the Selected list select a codec Selected list 2 Click the appropriate arrow to move the codec up or down in the Selected list Settings 132 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration H323 Media Parameters field descriptions Attribute Value Description Enable Voice Activity Detection lt check box gt Default Unselected Voice activity detection also known as silence suppression identifies periods of silence in a conversation and stops sending IP speech packets during those periods In a typical telephone conversation most of the conversation is half duplex meaning that one person is speaking while the other is listening For more information see Silence suppression reference page 421 If voice activity detection is selected no voice packets are sent from the listener end This greatly reduces bandwidth requirements G 723 1 and G 729 support voice activity detection G 711 does not support voice activity detection
202. en a voice is being transmitted it uses the full rate transmission rate Since the sender and receiver do not share the same channel the peak bandwidth requirement per channel is still equal to the full transmission rate The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirements for one call on a full duplex link with silence suppression enabled The spare bandwidth made available by silence suppression is used for lower priority data applications that can tolerate increased delay and jitter One call on a full duplex link with silence suppression Conversation Hello Fred This is Susan Do you have a minute SIPPING Sap SSS LW lt Conversatio a Bandwidth used Sure Fix Channel Bandwidth I i i Ww QQ Qh Channel Link max Time Tx Channel Bandwidth Me Independent Tx afid Ax bandwidth not shared by half duplex calls Bandwidth available for data apps 424 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Silence suppression reference When several calls are made over a full duplex link all calls share the same transmit path and they share the same receive path Since the calls are independent the peak bandwidth must account for the possibility that all speakers at one end of the link may talk at the same time Therefore the peak bandwidth for n calls is n the full transmission rate The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirements for two calls on a full duplex lin
203. ending on the type of trunk supplied from the central office CO Incoming lines do not need to have an appearance on the telephone Target lines are for incoming calls only Two way single lines such as analog lines allow the user to make an outgoing call by pressing the idle assigned line button or if the line is part of a line pool by entering a line pool access code or destination code to access the line pool These lines can also be redirected on a per trunk basis through Business Element Manager or from the telephone by using FEATURE 84 PRI lines are always configured into line pools These lines require a destination code for outgoing calls Incoming calls use target line assignments Voice over IP VoIP trunks use the data network to provide line service in and out of the system VoIP trunk configuration is described in the VoIP trunks use target lines for incoming calls and require line pool codes or destination codes for outgoing Calls NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 75 Lines overview e You can assign a line a maximum of 93 times Incoming calls For incoming calls you can have a central answering position or you can specify lines to one or more telephones to receive directed calling You can arrange your telephones in Hunt groups ringing groups or call groups that use system wide call appearance SWCA assignments to share calls You can also configure li
204. epends on the type of module that is selected on the Telephony Resources table The provisioning subpanels are as follows e The Provision Line tab panel is used for all trunks except DPNSS and BRI loops e The DPNSS module displays the Provision Virtual Channels tab panel e BRI loops require an extra step so the Provision Loops tab panel appears when a BRI module is selected The following table describes the fields on these panels 90 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony resources configuration Provisioning panels Attribute Value Description Provision Lines tab Line lt line number gt This is a list of the lines assigned to the module Provisioned lt check box gt If the check box is selected beside a line that line is available for call traffic Provision Virtual Channels tab Virtual Channel lt read only gt A virtual channel assigned to the DPNSS module Provisioned lt check box gt If the check box is selected beside a channel that channel is available for call traffic Provision Loops tab Loop lt loop number gt These are the loop numbers assigned to the selected BRI module Modules have four loops but only loops designated as T loops require provisioning Provisioned lt check box gt If the check box is selected beside a loop that loop has lines that can be provisioned Line lt line number gt Each loo
205. ephony May 2010 157 BRI T loops overview SPIDs and network DNs T loops North America only Details for Loop 701 Settings SPIDs SPIDs _ g SPID Digits Number of B channels The following table defines the fields on the SP IDs tab and indicates the lines SPIDs and network DNs parameter values Attribute Value Description SPID Digits lt digits gt Supplied by your service provider System running with North American country profiles support additional BRI services offered by ISDN service providers and defined by network SPID The SPID allows you to enter a network connection that provides a path for voice or data services Number of B channels 1 2 North American BRI loops can support two B channels The SPID can be the same or different for the channels Actions Add SPID digits 1 Select the appropriate SPID 1 or 2 2 Click Add 3 Enter the SPID digits supplied by your ISDN service provider 4 Click OK 5 On the table click the Number of B channels field beside the number you entered 6 Choose the number of B channels allowed for this SPID Delete 1 Select the SPID that you want to delete 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK Network DNs table DN lt system DN gt This ISDN DN acts as the contact point for the loop to the system Call Type Voice Defines the type of calls supported on the loop Data Both Actions 158 NN40170 502 Avaya Business
206. er B is busy or not answering the call automatically gets transferred to a Meridian Mail number user C across an MCDN link between the BCM450 system and the Meridian 1 system where the mailboxes are set up Network call redirection path on BCM450 Meridian 1 with Meridian Mail Elephone A Se Original call e i Call forwarded to Meridian Mail Elephone B 36 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview The following figure shows an example where user A calls user B on the same BCM50 If user B is busy or not answering the call automatically gets transferred to a Meridian Mail number user C across an MCDN link between the BCM50 system and the Meridian 1 system where the mailboxes are set up Network call redirection path on BCM50 Meridian 1 with Meridian Mail Elephone A m Se Original call o e Call forwarded to Meridian Mail Blephone B ISDN Call Connection Limitation The ICCL ISDN Call Connection Limitation feature piggybacks on the call initiation request and acts as a check at transit PBX points to prevent misconfigured routes or calls with errors from blocking channels This feature adds a transit tandem counter to a call setup message This counter is compared at each transit PBX with a value programmed into the transit PBX ina range from 0 to 31 If the call setup counter is higher than the PBX value the
207. ersation Tx Buenos noches Juan Muy bien y tu Fx LaL Hola Isabella Como esta Hello Fred This is Susan Do you have a minute Fred here ie 4 Bandwidth used WA N ZAK_KJQKQX CW US AP oN Time Peak channel bandwidth is n average Bandwidth shared by half duplex calls bandwidth per call E o we 2 ace tE ed Silence suppression on full duplex links On full duplex links the transmit path and the receive path are separate channels with bandwidths usually quoted in terms of individual channels The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirements for one call on a full duplex link without silence suppression Voice packets are transmitted even when a speaker is silent Therefore the peak bandwidth and the average bandwidth used equals the full transmission rate for both the transmit and the receive channel NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 423 Silence suppression reference One call on a full duplex link without silence suppression Conversation Hello Fred This is Susan Do you have a minute So WW W W W WWW gt s W Wf 7 Fred h H Conversation Bandwidth d andwi used Channel Link max Rix Channel Bandwidth ime ChannelLink max Voice frames sent even when speaker is silent Tx Channel Bandwidth When silence suppression is enabled voice packets are only sent when a speaker is talking Wh
208. es for calling line identification CLID A Business Name can be a maximum of 15 characters in length For more information about configuring Network Name Display elements see Configuring Network Name Display elements page 264 For more information about multiple Business Names and Long Names see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 15 New in this release 16 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Introduction The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 This guide describes how to configure and assign features and provide basic programming for the Avaya BCM The flowchart below identifies the steps required to configure your system for inbound and outbound traffic For more information about network planning information planning and configuration prerequisites and planning checklists see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 Purpose The concepts operations and tasks described in this guide relate to the Avaya BCM software This guide provides task based information about how to assign features and provide basic programming for the Avaya BCM Use Business Element Manager Startup Profile and Tel
209. es into a single zip file and so reduce the number of imports The ITSP template workbook as well as an archive of templates for a number of popular ITSPs are available as downloads To download and print selected technical publications and release notes directly from the Internet go to www avaya com support They are included with the Commissioning documents for BCM50 or BCM450 The archive is updated periodically as new ITSPs are added ITSP Templates Basic tab When you have imported an ITSP template select the template in the ITSP Templates panel The Basic Advanced and Comments tabs appear in the lower pane These tabs show read only details about the ITSP template The ITSP Basic tab shows the SIP domain proxy and registrar details you configured in Accounts gt Details for account gt Basic ITSP Templates Advanced tab When you have imported an ITSP template select the template in the ITSP Templates panel The Basic Advanced and Comments tabs appear in the lower pane These tabs show read only details about the ITSP template The ITSP Advanced tab shows the Keepalives Session time and other advanced details you configured in Accounts gt Details for account gt Advanced ITSP Templates Comments tab When you have imported an ITSP template select the template in the ITSP Templates panel The Basic Advanced and Comments tabs appear in the lower pane These tabs show read only details about the ITSP template
210. es line pools and target lines to the telephones For more information about assigning lines line pools and target lines to telephones see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 End Configuring provisioned BRI line features There are two lines for every ISDN BRI loop that is designated as a T loop Unlike PRI lines these lines can be setto either manual or automatic answer when using for remote call ins The following paths indicate where to access the line configuration menu through Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Business Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines gt Inactive Lines gt All Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 253 BRI T loops configuration Prerequisites Before you start this procedure e You must install and configure the BRI module e You must configure the BRI loops as T loops e You must configure the BRI loop lines Procedure steps Step Action 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel Trunk Type BRI ST determined by profile and type of BRI module Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line with schedulin
211. es on any Avaya BCM telephone On most Avaya BCM telephones you must use specific keys and or enter a number code to access the features DPNSS 1 capabilities A single Avaya BCM node acting as a terminating node on the network supports the following capabilities over DPNSS 1 lines e Direct Dial Inward DDI for incoming calls NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 43 System telephony networking overview e Originating Line Identification OLI for incoming and outgoing calls Forincoming calls the Calling Line Identification CLI CLID information is displayed to the user on telephones with line display This must be configured in programming For outgoing calls the directory number of the originating party is sent out as OLI e Terminal Line Identification TLI for incoming and outgoing calls Referred to as Called Line Identification e Selective Line Redirect SLR and External Call Forward ECF implemented on calls between DPNSS 1 and BRI PRI DASS2 and analog lines e These remote access features are supported on DPNSS DDI line pool access code destination codes and remote page feature codes Keycodes are required to enable DPNSS 1 DPNSS to Embark connections DPNSS lines connected to an Embark switch perform call redirection diversion using the Call F orward feature to create a tandem link back to the switch Since this is different from other switches
212. es to line pools consider your network configuration You can create a unified dialing plan by assigning lines to the same location to the same line pool on each of your systems For example if system A and system B each have TIE lines to system C assign the TIE lines to pool D on each of the systems You cannot assign target lines to a line pool as they are incoming only Loss packages Use the loss package settings to select the appropriate loss gain and impedance settings for each line The setting is based on the terminating switch type and the distance between BCM and the terminating switch When measuring the distance from BCM to CO and from BCM to PBX systems use 600 ohms as the termination resistance setting Loss package settings Loss Receive Transmit Impedance Distance to switch cable loss Package Loss Loss terminating switch Short CO 0 dB 3 dB Short Short lt 2 dB BCM50 to CO Medium CO 0dB 0 dB TIA EIA 464 Medium gt 2 dB and lt 6 dB BCM50 to CO Long CO 3 dB 0 dB TIA EIA 464 Long gt 6 dB BCM50 to CO Short PBX 0 dB 0 dB Short Short lt 2 dB BCM50 to PBX Long PBX 3 dB 0 dB TIA EIA 464 Long gt 2 dB BCM50 to PBX A loss of 4 dB corresponds to a cable length of approximately 2700 m 9000 ft Attention Loss packages are not supported on the 4X16 combo 74 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines overview Privacy on off by call You can config
213. escribes the fields found on the Trunk Line Data main panel Trunk Line Data main panel Attribute Value Description Line This list contains all the Configure only those lines that are active on the possible line numbers forthe system Click the Active check box and ensure system including target lines thatthe Inactive check box is empty Trunk Type Loop PRI VolP Target There are three main categories of lines PSTN based lines analog T1 PRI BRI Voice over IP VolP trunks which connect through the LAN or WAN Target lines which are internal channels that provide direct dial capability Name lt maximum of seven Identify the line in a way that is meaningful to alphanumeric characters gt your system such as by the type of line and line pool or the DN itis attached to in the case of target lines Control Set DN lt control telephone DN gt Enter a telephone DN for a telephone that you want to use to turn service off or on for other Default 221 default Start DN telephones using this line The control telephone must have the line assigned or must be assigned to the line pool the line is in 136 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Trunk Line Data main panel Line configuration overview Attribute Value Description Line Type Prime set Pub Received Target lines only Public Private to lt telephone DN gt
214. ess to the entire network Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Global Settings tab 2 Click on the Allow Network Access check box to allow network access End 380 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dial up resources configuration Assigning a Line Pool for ISDN dial out Use this procedure to assign a Line Pool for ISDN dial out Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Global Settings tab 2 Click Add The Add Line Pool dialog box appears Enter a line pool the ISDN interface can use to dial out 4 Click OK End Modem interface management BCM supports one V 34 modem connection to and from the BCM450 Modem interface management navigation e Adding a modem interface page 381 e Enabling a modem interface page 381 e Disabling a modem interface page 382 e Deleting a modem interface page 382 Adding a modem interface Use this procedure to add a modem interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Dial out Interfaces tab 2 Click Add The Add Dial Up Interface dialog box appears 3 Select Modem from the Interface type drop down list 4 Enter a logical name in the Interface name field 5 Select the Automatic dialout check box to use this interface for scheduled service 6 Click OK The
215. ession includes the following e DN ofthe Caller e DN ofthe person being called e Time of the call with time zone information e Length of the recording e Line being used in the call depends on the call Call details when recording a conference includes the following e Number of participants in a conference call e Entry and exit times of all conference call participants Adding a Professional Call Recording Rule The following procedure describes the process for enabling or disabling a bus This means that if there is more than one module assigned to the DS 30 bus all modules will be disabled The following procedure describes how to add a Professional Call Recording Rule 170 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Professional call recording Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Recording 2 Click Add to add a rule The Add Recording Rule dialog box appears 3 Type the DN of the calls to be recorded in the DN field In the Call Option field select the type of calls to be recorded The values in the drop down are as follows e Incoming calls All the incoming calls to the specified DN e Outgoing calls All the outgoing calls from the specified DN e All calls All calls to and from the specified DN e External calls All external calls to and from the specified DN e Internal calls All internal calls to and from the specif
216. ession refresh Optional 90 sec 90 sec interval that BCM will allow 86400 sec 24 hours Refresher Indicates which endpoint will Optional Local Local perform the session refresh Remote SIP URI map Use the SIP URI map Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt URI Map to configure the subdomain name associated with each SIP URI Session Initiated Protocol Uniform Resource Identifier These fields correspond to the Public Network Private Network and Routing settings configured at the Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan section of the Business Element Manager These strings must be coordinated with the other nodes in the network For the corresponding procedure see Configuring the SIP URI map page 310 On the Public Network screen a Public network dialing plan setting of e Public Unknown corresponds to the SIP URI map of Unknown Unknown e Local Subscriber corresponds to the SIP URI map of e 164 Subscriber e National corresponds to the SIP URI map of e 164 N ational On the Routing screen a DN type setting of e Public Unknown corresponds to the SIP URI map of Unknown Unknown e International does not correspond to the SIP URI map A is prepended to the number e National corresponds to the SIP URI map of e 164 N ational e Special International corresponds to the SIP URI map of Private Special e Local Subscriber corresponds to the SIP URI map of e 164 Sub
217. estrictions and Remote Access Package restrictions are part of the configuration for controlling calls out of the system line restrictions and into the system from a private network node or from a remote user calling in over the PSTN lines Remote Access Packages The following paths indicate where to access the restriction settings in Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Business Element Manager Configuration Telephony Lines Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines or CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets The Restrictions tab is shown in the following figure Restrictions tables for a line orma Nigh ening Lunch hed 4 Sched 5 sched 6 Details for Line 061 Line Restrictions Schedule ju se Filter Properties Preferences Restrictions Assigned DNs Use remote package 00 Remote Restrictions 03 Normal 21 Night 22 Evening 23 Lunch 00 S oo 00 Sched 5 Schedule Use Filter 04 31 32 33 00 oo 00 The following table describes the fields on this panel 144 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Restrictions Line configuration overview Attribute Values Description Use remote package lt remote package gt Schedule Line Restrictions Use Filter lt 00 99 gt Remote Restrictions Use lt 00 99 gt Filter If the line is being used to receive external calls or
218. ey were internal calls Only the features and capabilities available to external calls can be used When programming a button to dial a Network number automatically autodial network calls must be treated as external numbers even though they resemble internal telephone numbers Routes generally define the path between your Avaya BCM switch and another switch in your network not other individual telephones on that switch 30 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview PRI networking using Call by Call services The example shown in the following figure highlights the use of PRI Call by Call services It shows two offices of a company one in New York and one in Toronto Each office is equipped with a BCM450 system and a PRI line Each office has to handle incoming and outgoing calls to the public network In addition employees at each office often have to call colleagues in the other office For more information see Configuring call by call services and PRI lines page 214 PRI networking using Call by Call Services on BCM 450 Toronto office New York office Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 DID 763 2221 DID 562 6221 TIE Connection Public Network Central Office Office The example shown in the following figure shows two offices where each office is equipped
219. figuration Devices NN40170 500 Assigned DNs S loops Details for Loop 501 Settings LoopDN 457 Assigned DNs The following table defines the fields on the Details for Loop panel NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 153 BRI ISDN loop properties overview Loop settings Attribute Value Description Loop DN lt system DN gt Control DN for the loop This DN must be on the Assigned DNs list Assigned DNs table DN lt system DN gt ISDN assigned to the loop up to eight devices Actions Add 1 In the top frame click the loop where you want to add DN records 2 In the bottom frame click Add 3 Enter the DN record number 4 Click OK 5 Repeat for all the DN records you want to assign Delete 1 In the top frame click the loop where you want to delete DN record assignments 2 In the bottom frame click the Assigned DN record you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 Click YES 154 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI T loops overview The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 BRI modules support both trunk and station telephone services For more information about planning and prerequisites information for configuring BRI T loops see Avaya B
220. figuration Telephony May 2010 Dialing plan routing configuration Programming the PRI routing table Plan your routing table in advance before you program the information into the BCM system Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 4 Action Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Click the route number record you want to use In the External Number column type a dialout number up to 24 digits Under Use Pool select a PRI line pool The Bloc pools that are displayed depend on how you allocate PRI lines into pools in the line programming It is possible to have only pool BlocA or only pool BlocB even if there are two DTMs configured as PRI in the system Choose a Service Type or DN type e DNtype displays for PRI lines with protocol setto SL 1 MCDN ETSIQSIG ETSI Euro e Service Type displays for PRI lines with protocol set to NI DMS100 DMS250 4ESS ETSI Euro e Service ID N A appears where the service does not require an ID Configuring a long distance carrier access code into a destination code In some cases long distance service uses the same lines as local service but is switched to a specific carrier using an access number which is sometimes referred to as an carrier access code CAC Route programming can include the access number so the users do not have to dial it every time they make a long distance call Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 Action Click Configuration gt
221. fy the time in seconds for an address assignment until the client lease expires The default is 259 200 seconds 72 hours Primary DNS IP address Specify the IP addresses of the primary DNS server in a valid dot format BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter Ifthe IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value Secondary DNS IP address Specify the IP addresses of the secondary DNS server in a valid dot format BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter Ifthe IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value WINS server address Specify the IP address of the WINS server BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter Ifthe IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value WINS node type Specify a client WINS node type The BCM system automatically sets this value to H node on all DHCP clients This setting configures the DHCP client PCs to use P node name resolution before resorting to B node name resolution Use caution if you change this attribute 364 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 DHCP server configuration on BCM main module Configuring shared DHCP optio
222. g Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure itis put into line pool A to O Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Not applicable Priv Received Not applicable Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Subpanel under Restrictions tab Use remote package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part of a private network ensure you specify a valid package 2 Configure the trunk line data Properties tab Loss package Line Tuning Digit 3 Configure the trunk line data Preferences tab Auto privacy If you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Answer mode Answer with DISA If this line is used for remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer automatically or requiring more user input If the answer mode is set to Automatic decide whether the caller will be immediately connected to the system or whether a stuttered dial tone will require the caller to enter a CoS password Aux ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer Full autohold This allows telephones to puta line on hold if the user picks up another line or starts to dial out on another l
223. g Configuration panel click Add The Add Recording Rule window appears Configure the recording parameters Click OK End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 409 Configuring Professional Call Recording Variable definitions Variable Value DN The DN of the set to automatically record Call Option Determines the type of call to record Where to send recording Determines where the recording is sent Computer IP port or Email Specifies the path either computer or email address Don t include key presses i presses from being provided in the call detail Manual stop record behavior The action the BCM takes when the user cancels the recording using F996 and the call is sent to an email server Follow call logic Call tracking only Enable and disable rule through F998 Rule enabled Monitor auto answer lines Modifying the recording rule Use the following procedure to modify a recording rule for professional call recording feature in Avaya BCM Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Recording The Professional Call Recording Settings panel appears 2 From the Professional Call Recording Configuration panel click Modify The Modify Recording Rule window appears Modify the parameters attributes as required Click OK End 410 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communicatio
224. g figure illustrates the SPIDs tab SPIDs and network DNs T loops North America only Details for Loop 701 Settings SPIDs SPIDs SPID Digits Number of B channels The following table defines the fields on the SPIDs tab and indicates the lines 150 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI ISDN loop properties overview SPIDs and network DNs parameter values Attribute Value Description SPID Digits lt digits gt Supplied by your service provider System running with North American country profiles support additional BRI services offered by ISDN service providers and defined by network service profile identifiers SPID The SPID allows you to enter a network connection that provides a path for voice or data services Number of B channels 1 2 North American BRI loops can support two B channels The SPID may be the same or different for the channels Actions Add SPID digits 1 Select the appropriate SPID 1 or 2 2 Click Add 3 Enter the SPID digits supplied by your ISDN service provider 4 Click OK 5 On the table click the Number of B channels field beside the number you entered 6 Choose the number of B channels allowed for this SPID Delete 1 Select the SPID that you want to delete 2 Click Delete 3 Click YES Network DNs table DN lt system DN gt This ISDN DN acts as the contact point for the l
225. gate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Public gt Routing Table 2 Click Add The Add Route dialog box appears Enter a unique Name for the route Enter the Destination Digits for the route From the ITSP Account list select the account that the route serves NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 307 Configuring IP trunks 6 7 Click OK The Add Route dialog box closes and the route is added to the Routing Table Click OK End Configuring a private SIP route Use this procedure to configure a route to a remote device when a proxy server is not deployed in the network This procedure applies to private SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under SIP private trunk routing table page 118 Procedure steps Action Step 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Routing Table At the bottom of the Routing Table click Add The Add Remote Gateway dialog box appears Enter a Name and Destination Digits for the remote device Enter information about the remote device Domain Enter the remote domain IP Address Enter the IP address of the device with which you want to connect Port Enter the port number This setting is optional GW Type Choose the variable that identifies the type of system or application being connected to
226. ger Use if your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer ANI Number Enable if the caller number is to be logged For T1 lines this only appears if Signaling is set to WinkStart 220 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Variable Name Value DNIS Number Defines whether the digits dialed by an external caller on this line will be shown Answer Mode If this line is used for remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer Auto or Manual If the answer mode is set to Auto decide whether the caller will be immediately connected to the system or whether a stuttered dial tone will require the caller to enter a CoS password Voice message center If the system is using remote voice mail select the center that is configured with the contact number Distinct Rings If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Redirect To If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a head office answer attendant enter that remote number here Ensure that you include the proper routing information Use Remote Package Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls fro
227. ges page 350 e Deleting UDP port ranges page 350 Adding new UDP port ranges Complete this procedure to add a UDP port range Procedure steps Step Action 1 On the UDP table click Add The Add UDP Port Range dialog appears In the Begin field type the first port in the range In the End field type the last port in the range Click OK The new RTP port range appears in the table End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 349 Port Ranges configuration Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Begin lt numeric string gt The first port in the port range End lt numeric string gt The last port in the port range Modifying UDP port ranges Complete this procedure to change an existing UDP port range Procedure steps Step Action 1 On the UDP table select the entry to modify 2 Type the new value End Deleting UDP port ranges Complete this procedure to delete a UDP port range Procedure steps Step Action 1 On the UDP table select the range to delete by clicking the appropriate row in either column 2 Click Delete The Confirm warning box appears 3 Click Yes End Displaying signalling port ranges Signaling ports are used by the system and cannot be modified They are provided to show where conflicts with UDP or RTP occur Procedure steps Step Action 1 To view the Signalling port ranges navigate to Confi
228. ges panel allows you to reserve ports for use by UDP User Datagram Protocol The Port Ranges panel consists of three tables RDP over UDP UDP and Signaling For more information about planning and prerequisites for configuring Port Ranges see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 Prerequisites for ports configuration CAUTION A Do not change the ports unless necessary If you do change the ports ensure you review the minimum requirements for each protocol Ensure that you configure your firewall to reflect the changes you make to the ports e Navigate to Configuration Resources Port Ranges Ports configuration navigation e RTP over UDP port ranges management page 348 e UDP port ranges management page 349 e Displaying signalling port ranges page 350 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 347 Port Ranges configuration RTP over UDP port ranges management RTP Real time Transfer Protocol over UDP ports are necessary for IP trunk traffic such as for the transmission of audio and video signals across the Internet These values should only be changed if you are interoperating with an unsupported product The RTP over UDP table has two settings RTP over UDP port ranges management navigation e Adding new RTP over UDP port ranges page 348 e Modifying RTP over UDP port ranges page 349 e Deleting RTP over UDP
229. get lines are internal communications paths that directly connect auto answer trunks to system telephones These lines are incoming only Target lines allow you to make more efficient use of DID line resources You can map a range of target lines for each DID line The incoming call is routed according to the mapped dialed digits rather than a one to one line assignment Systems configured using the DID template automatically assign target lines to all assigned DNs You also require target lines when you use PRI T1 or VoIP trunks In BCM450 target lines use line numbers 361 to 680 In BCM50 target lines use line numbers 125 to 268 To view these lines select Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Target Lines Record this information in your system Programming Records so you have a clear view of where each line is assigned Other features e Each target line can be assigned to more than one telephone e A telephone can have multiple appearances of a target line Target lines are internal direct links the BCM uses to allow external callers to dial specific system telephones or a group of system telephones You assign the target line to one or more telephone DNs and then configure the target line to function as you require You can also assign multiple appearances of a target line to one telephone This allows more than one call to simultaneously use the target line Target lines are required by lines that support multiple numbers over on
230. gning a Line Pool for ISDN dial out 381 Modem interface management 381 Adding a modem interface 381 Enabling a modem interface 381 Disabling a modem interface 382 Deleting a modem interface 382 Modem interface connection or disconnection 382 Connecting a modem interface 383 Disconnecting a modem interface 383 Modem dial out link parameters configuration 383 Configuring modem link parameters 383 Configuring the modem IP address specifications 385 Modem dial in parameters configuration 386 Configuring modem dial in parameters 386 ISDN dial in parameters configuration 389 Configuring ISDN dial in access 389 Configuring the ISDN dial out IP address 392 Automatic dial out interface configuration 392 Adding an automatic dial out interface 393 Disconnecting an automatic dial out interface 393 Dial up interfaces as primary connections 394 Assigning remote access privileges to an account 394 Configuring a dial up interface 395 Static routes for dial out configuration 395 WAN failover configuration on BCM50 with a router card 395 Assigning a modem interface for WAN failover 396 Assign an ISDN interface for WAN failover 396 Configuring virtual LANs 399 Configure the default gateway IP address 400 Configuring LAN interfaces 400 AddingaVLAN 401 Deleting a VLAN 402 Modifyinga VLAN 403 Adding ports to a VLAN 403 Deleting ports froma VLAN 404 Modifying ports ona VLAN 405 Adding static routes 405 12 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 C
231. guration gt Resources gt Port Ranges The signalling port ranges are in the Signalling table End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Begin lt numeric string gt The first port in the port range End lt numeric string gt The last port in the port range 350 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Class of service password configuration for remote access The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The class of service COS panel allows you to configure passwords for system users who dial into the system over a PSTN private network to use system features or for users who must bypass local restrictions on telephones The following paths indicate where to access the COS settings in Business Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Business Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Security gt Class of Service e Telset interface CONFIG gt Passwords COS passwords permit controlled access to the system resources by both internal and remote users e When an internal user enters a CoS password at a telephone the restriction filters associated with the CoS password apply instead of the normal restriction filters e Similarly when a remote user enters a CoS password on an incoming auto answer l
232. guring SIP public routes see Configuring a public SIP route page 307 SIP trunks private trunk configuration To configure a private SIP trunk you must configure the routes to each remote device or configure a SIP proxy server and provide a route to it In either case you can also configure the SIP URI map and SIP authentication You also need to configure the options common to all IP trunks Options common to all IP trunks page 99 and common to public and private SIP trunks SIP trunks options common to public and private SIP trunks page 101 To find the private SIP trunk configuration panels in Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private There are five tabs under the Private tab Routing Table Settings Proxy URI Map and Authentication SIP private trunk routing table The BCM routes calls directly from entries in the routing table Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Routing Table or uses the services of a proxy server if one is configured To add a route you click the Add button at the bottom of the table and then complete the fields of the Add Remote Gateway panel To 118 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Add Remote Gateway field descriptions IP VoIP trunk configuration Field Value Description Name lt alphanumeric gt Enter the name
233. h appears on a set and is the termination end point for the call Key system model When set to T T user the BRI connection to the public network is treated like a trunk which allows tandems to other switches without first answering the call PBX model Overlap receiving lt check box gt Supports target lines in markets which use Overlap receiving signaling on the BRI trunks Overlap receiving must be configured for each BRI loop Overlap length lt 0 15 gt Set the local number length for loops to interfaces that receive overlap rather than enbloc digits This number is the total length of the called party number received This number is used to calculate the number of leading digits that need to be removed by the system Attention This parameter appears only when Overlap receiving is enabled Example Public received number 4502303 Target line received numbers 303 Local number length 7 Public received number length 3 Thus the first four digits are deleted by the system Send Name Display ETSI QSIG only lt check box gt If the switch allows outgoing name display select the check box T loop SPIDS and network DNs These settings are only available for systems running a North American profile The SPID numbers are supplied by the ISDN service provider The following figure illustrates the SPIDs tab NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Tel
234. h the line restrictions and the set restrictions The line per set line set restriction overrides the line restriction and set restriction Notes about restriction filters A restriction filter is a group of restrictions and overrides that specify the external numbers or feature codes that cannot be dialed from a telephone or on a line The restriction filters setting allows you to assign restrictions in one step as a single package of dialing sequences that are not permitted In addition to restricting telephone numbers you can prevent people from entering dialing sequences used by the central office the public network to deliver special services and features NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 191 Call security and remote access overview Some of these features provide the caller with dial tone after they have entered the special code which often uses or therefore users have an opportunity to bypass restrictions To prevent this from happening you can create filters that block these special codes You create a filter by defining the dialing sequences that are denied There are also variations of each sequence that you want users to be able to dial these are called overrides Overrides are defined within each restriction package for each filter Once you create the filters you can assign the restrictions to a telephone to a line to a particular line on a telephone and
235. h this choice with the information supplied by the service provider Link at CO Enable if provider switch provides alternative line when F71 is invoked for an outgoing call Line Tuning Digit Auto Privacy If you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Aux Ringer Use if your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer ANI Number Enable if the caller number is to be logged For T1 lines this only appears if Signaling is set to WinkStart 238 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration Variable Name Value Distinct Rings If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Voice message center If the system is using remote voice mail select the center that is configured with the contact number Redirect To If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a head office answer attendant enter that remote number here Ensure that you include the proper routing information Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Restrictions Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and an
236. he IP Address of address the server that will provide DNS information to the system This information is generally provided by the ISP This field needs to be completed only if the Obtain IP address dynamically check box is not selected It can be provided by your ISP or IS department In small office settings a DNS may not be necessary MTU size lt numeric string gt Maximum Transmission Unit This is the largest packet measured in bytes that the BCM can send Attention 1500 is the default setting and should not be changed unless instructed by a network administrator 356 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP subsystem configuration Viewing the OAM interface The OAM interface provides an interface where administrators can connect directly to the BCM by plugging their laptop into the OAM port The panel displays the IP configuration details and DHCP lease of any PC that connects to the OAM port This table is read only Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 Action Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt LAN Interfaces tab In the LAN Interfaces Summary click OAM LAN In the Details for Interface OAM LAN pane select IP Configuration tab to view the IP Address and Subnet Mask End Modifying IP configuration You can modify the values of the IP address and Subnet Mask Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 4 Action Click Configurati
237. he VLAN ID value that is embedded in the pocket as the P BIT value Adding static routes Add a static route to provide the alternate gateway IP address to use when a remote subnet that is not directly connected to a BCM IP interface needs to be reached and the default gateway IP address cannotbe used Static routes comprise a subnetIP address subnet mask and associated gateway IP address Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 Action In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem Select the Static Routes tab From the Static Routes Summary area click Add The Add a static route dialog box appears Configure the static route attributes Click OK End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 405 Configuring virtual LANs Variable definitions Variable Value Destination Address Network IP address used to calculate the static Destination Mask Destination mask used in conjunction with Gateway Address IP address of the gateway used to forward traffic route destination IP addresses Destination Address to determine all possible static route IP destinations that falls within the static route IP range A valid gateway IP address must belong to a subnet IP address range configured on the BCM and for which it is not the IP address of the BCM local interface Configuring DSCP Marking for Quality of Service Use the fol
238. he default of None or Low or Medium Intrusion levels are described as follows e ICL determines the ability of the attendant to intrude As long as the ICL is higher than the IP L of the wanted party El is allowed Because El is a receive only feature the ICL cannot beset on Avaya BCM e IPL determines the ability of the attendant to refuse intrusion If the IPL is lower than the ICL of the originating party El is allowed For general purposes setting the IPL to None Low or Medium is recommended unless intrusion is not wanted Call Offer Call Offer over DPNSS 1 allows a calling party to indicate to the wanted party that there is an incoming call available even though there is no answer button available to present the call on the telephone The intended recipient can ignore accept or decline the offered call Call Offer is useful in increasing the call coverage capability of a Avaya BCM system and helps to lift the network processing load Itis a receive only capability on Avaya BCM incoming calls are initiated at another PBX system on the DPNSS 1 network An example of Call Offer in use is an operator or attendant who has a number of calls coming in at once The operator can call offer one call and move to the next without waiting for the first call to be answered 48 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview When a Call Offer is made by t
239. he gatekeeper The gatekeeper can override this timer and send its own TimeToLive period Gatekeeper TTL s Read only The actual time used by the gatekeeper for the registration process Status lt read only gt Indicates if the device is online H 323 media parameters H 323 media parameters Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking gt Media Parameters allow you to specify the order in which the trunk will select IP telephony system controls for codecs jitter buffers silence suppression and payload size The parameters to enable T 38 Fax signals are also included The following table describes the fields on this panel For the corresponding procedure see Configuring H 323 media parameters page 316 H323 Media Parameters field descriptions Attribute Value Description Preferred Codecs Available list G 711 uLaw Select the Codecs in the order in which you want the selected list G 711 aLaw system to attempt to use them G 729 Attention Codecs on all networked BCMs must be G 723 f consistent to ensure that interacting features such as Transfer and Conference work correctly Systems running BCM 3 5 or later software allow codec negotiation and renegotiation to accommodate inconsistencies in Codec settings over IP trunks Attention The G 723 codec can be used between IP endpoints If other types of connections are required ensure one of the other codecs is also s
240. he originating exchange the target telephone displays a message and a tone is heard When an offered call arrives on telephones with line display the user sees XX X wtng if the calling party ID is available and CLID is enabled If CLID is not available or CLID is disabled Line XXX waiting appears the line name associated with the call If there are more than 11 digits in the incoming number only the last 10 will display If Call Queuing is programmed for the system the display shows Release Line XXX This is the line name of the highest priority queued call if it is an offered call Restrictions by telephone type include e model Avaya 7000 telephone associated LED or LCD flashes and a tone is heard model Avaya 7000 Deskphones supported in Europe only e ATA2 ASM8 Call Offer is supported as a Camp On feature and a tone is heard e ISDN not supported Note the following general conditions and restrictions e Clear the DND on busy check box DN Capabilities for a telephone to accept Call Offer e If CF on busy is programmed for the telephone Call Offer is not accepted e The target line for the telephone must be set to If busy busy tone which is the default e Call Offer does not work if sent over Manual answer lines It is recommended that the lines be left at the default Auto For user actions the party receiving a Call Offer has three choices e Ignore it After a programmed time interval the Offer re
241. he restrictions and remote package scheduling using the following variables e Use remote package e Line restrictions e Remote Restrictions 226 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration 9 Click on the Assigned DNs tab 10 Assign the lines to DNs applicable to manual answer only If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines e DN e Appearance type e VMsg set End Variable definitions Variable Name Value Line Line number Trunk Type Loop Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line for scheduling Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure itis put into line pool A to O If you use line pools you also need to configure target lines and assign the target lines to DNs Refer to Target lines configuration page 204 Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone Otherwise choose None Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Trunk Mode Define whether the line will detect the open switch interval OSI when a callis released Supervised Note UK p
242. hony May 2010 375 Dial up resources configuration e Deleting an ISDN interface page 377 Adding an ISDN interface Use the following procedure to add an ISDN interface to the BCM50 system Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab click Add The Add Dial up Interface dialog box appears 3 Select ISDN from the Interface type drop down list 4 Enter a logical name in the Interface name field 5 Select the Automatic Dialout check box to use this interface for scheduled services 6 Click OK The interface appears in the Dial out Interfaces table End Enabling an ISDN interface An interface must be enabled to function as a backup connection If the BCM50 experiences a primary connection failure it will dial out using the dial up interface configured as the backup Use the following procedure to enable and ISDN interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the ISDN interface 3 On the Channel Characteristics tab enter the Dial out number for the ISDN interface 4 On oo Interface tab select the Enable check box next to the ISDN interface to enable Attention Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 only allows the configuration of two ISDN auto dialout interfaces When both of these interfaces are enabled ISDN dial in is disabled End D
243. ick Modify The Modify a VLAN dialog box appears 4 Configure the VLAN attributes Click OK End Variable definitions Variable Value Allow Network Access Enabling this option allows traffic from the LAN Interface network to traverse to another LAN or VLAN Default gateway The gateway used by the BCM system IP Address The IP address of the BCM system Name Subnet Mask The subnet mask value for the VLAN used to determine the VLAN IP range VLAN ID The VLAN ID value that is embedded in the pocket as the P BIT value Adding ports to a VLAN Use the following procedure to add ports to a VLAN Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem 2 Select the VLAN Interfaces tab 3 In the VLAN Interfaces Summary area select the VLAN associated with the port to be added 4 Click Add End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 403 Configuring virtual LANs Variable definitions Variable Value Allow Network Access Enabling this option allows traffic from the LAN Interface network to traverse to another LAN or VLAN Default gateway The gateway used by the BCM system IP Address The IP address of the BCM system Name Subnet Mask The subnet mask value for the VLAN used to determine the VLAN IP range VLAN ID The VLAN ID value that is embedded in the pocket as the P BIT value
244. ictions DN Model Name Port Pub OLI Priv OLI Fwd No Answer Fwd Delay IJA i Details for DN 310 Line Assignment Line Pool Access Answer DNs Voice Mail MeetMe Conferencing _ Create MeetMe Conference Bridge 4 Click Create Meet Me Conference Bridge The Create Meet Me Conference Bridge dialog box appears Click the Class of Service list Select the COS for this Conference Bridge Click OK The user now has chairperson privileges The system updates the Meet Me Conferencing panel NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 341 Meet Me Conferencing configuration Chairperson with a conference bridge 30 310 0109 310 NIA e r 310 End 342 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Meet Me Conferencing configuration Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Class of Service 1 16 This is the current COS setting for the chairperson You can change it to another COS value Remove Meet Me lt button gt Click this button to remove the Conferencing Bridge conference bridge for the chairperson Confirm the removal by pressing OK PIN Reset lt button gt Click this button to reset the chairperson PIN Confirm the reset by pressing OK Reset the PIN if the chairperson forgets the PIN number If you reset the PIN while the chairperson
245. ide support for system telephones to make and receive calls over public network PSTN lines Two basic system telephony configurations The following provides a broad overview of the telephony setup for two of the most common office telephone configurations PBX system This setup is for larger offices which have fewer CO lines than telephones In this case the lines are pooled and the line pool access is assigned to all DNs There may also be a designated attendant with a telephone that has all lines individually assigned NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 19 System telephony networking overview PBX system for BCM450 CG line 25 All telephones 5 CO line IS cre ceagned fra cag s zE z 0 cecese o Ta ins gt Ale Te CO line 45 pool forouge ng _ acl Receptioni a4 Asagned all hnes aopeararee and ring The following figure shows a PBX system for the BCM50 20 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview PBX system for BCM50 Lines are assigned to a line pool CO line 28 All telephones Ay CO line 38 are assigned access to the line CO line 48 pool for outgoing calls Receptionist Assigned all lines appearance and ring Incoming calls 1 A call comes in on a line 2 The receptionist answers the call and finds out who the call i
246. ied DN e Conference calls All conference calls joined by the specified DN The call details provide a summary of the attendees and the entry and exit times The three types of conferences supported for recording are Meet Me Regular 3 way and Multi party Ad hoc conference e Manual through F995 Manually record the call For this you must enable the feature on set by using feature F995 4 In the Where to send recording field select the destination where the recording is to be sent The values in the drop down are as follows e Computer The call details are sent to a computer over a TCP IP connected through the network The Professional Call Recording computer uses a streaming protocol to send the details You can configure whether to send the call audio or not The computer must have a separate application installed to receive the audio content Avaya will provide an example basic demo application for this purpose e Email The call details are sent to a specified email address and may optionally contain the call audio You must configure the email servers and can provision one or more servers for the call recording When there are more than one server the feature tries each server one after the other until the email is sent 5 Type the IP address of the computer or email address to which the recording is to be sent in the Computer IP Port or Email address field The parameter to be given in this field depends on the valu
247. if registration is required SIP password Mandatory if registration is required Account parameters Advanced tab The following table lists and describes the account parameters on the Advanced tab All parameters are read write even if they have been populated using a template NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 107 IP VoIP trunk configuration Public SIP account parameters Advanced tab Parameter Description Requirement Default Range Value Enable local NAT Determines if BCM performs local NAT Optional False True F alse compensation compensation If enabled SIP and RTP keep alives are enabled Enable media relay If enabled BCM anchors RTP media for all False False True F alse phones including IP sets This must be enabled if local NAT compensation is enabled It can be enabled even if local NAT compensation is not enabled Use maddrin R URI Flag indicating if BCM should include maddr in Optional False True False Request URI If enabled an outbound proxy must be provided maddr is only included if the outbound proxy is different from the service provider domain Use maddr in Contact Flag indicating if BCM should include maddr in Optional False True False the Contact header If enabled maddr is included in the Contact header only if the local domain is in the form of FQDN Alternatively maddr is added if the provisioned l
248. iming masters for the attached terminal equipment TE and are not synchronized to the network ISDN TE without access to a network connection BRI lines has limited or no functionality If your system has both a BRI S T configured as BRI and a DTM configured as PRI it is recommended that you use PRI as the primary clock source See PRI hardware page 434 ISDN BRI NT1 equipment The NT1 network termination type 1 connects an S T interface four wire to a U interface two wire In most cases it connects loops from a BRI module to the network connection which uses the U interface The NT1 converts and reformats data so it can be transmitted to and from the S or T connection In addition it manages the maintenance messages travelling between the network and the NT1 and between the NT1 and the BCM system The NT1 from Avaya is packaged two ways e a stand alone package which contains one NT1 card NTBX80XX and a power supply NTBX81XX e a modular package which contains up to 12 NT1 cards NTBX83XX and a power supply NTBX86AA ISDN standards compatibility In North America BCM ISDN equipment supports National ISDN standards for basic call and calling line identification services BCM BRI is compliant with National ISDN 1 and PRI is compliant with National ISDN 2 BCM does not support EKTS Electronic Key Telephone System on PRI In Europe BCM supports ETSI Euro and ETSI QSIG standards and PRI SL 1 protocol Planning you
249. ine 254 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI T loops configuration e Voice Message Center If the system is using a remote voice mail select the center configured with the contact number 4 Set the restriction and remote package scheduling Restrictions tab e Line restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls e Remote Packages Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks 5 Assign the lines to DNs Assigned DNs tab If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines e Appearance Type Choose Appr only or Appr amp Ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model Avaya 7000 Deskphones supported in Europe only e VMsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Attention Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter End NN40170
250. ine the restriction filters and remote package associated with their CoS password apply instead of the normal restriction filters and remote package For more information and examples on configuring COS passwords for remote access refer to Business Communication Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40160 200 Adding or modifying class of service password values You can add a maximum of 99 class of service CoS passwords You should change passwords frequently to discourage unauthorized access Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Security gt Class of Service 2 On the Class of Service table click the CoS line to which you want to add or modify a password 3 Select the field you want to change and enter the appropriate information e Password Enter a set of six digits that are unique from any other CoS password NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 351 Class of service password configuration for remote access e Set Restriction Filter If you want the user to be able to override set and line set restrictions for the number being called enter the allowed filters e Line Restriction F ilter If you want the user to be able to override the line restrictions that the call uses to access the system enter the allowed filters here e Remote Package Enter the remote package that you want the system to use to determine the level of
251. ine Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure itis putinto line pool A to O If you use line pools you also need to configure target lines and assign the target lines to DNs Refer to Target lines configuration page 204 Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Use Remote Package Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 213 Lines configuration Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Restrictions Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks Configuring call by call services and PRI lines Configure call by call services to access services or private facilities over a PRI line Call by call allows you to access facilities without dedicating resources The following protocols support Cb
252. ing IP trunks Configuration procedures for all IP trunks 301 Configuring IP trunk settings 301 Configuring VoIP line features 301 Configuration procedures for SIP trunks 303 Configuring SIP settings 303 Configuring SIP media parameters 304 Importing an ITSP template 305 Configuring an ITSP account 305 Configuring local NAT compensation 306 Configuring a public SIP route 307 Configuring a private SIP route 308 Configuring a SIP proxy 309 Configuring private SIP settings 310 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony 291 293 299 301 May 2010 9 Contents Configuring the SIP URI map 310 Configuring SIP authentication 310 Configuring SIP authentication for a SIP user account 311 Configuration procedures for H 323 trunks 314 Configuring an H 323 route 314 Configuring H 323 settings 315 Configuring H 323 media parameters 316 IP trunk fallback configuration 319 Fallback traffic routes addition 319 Adding a PSTN route to a far end system 319 Adding a PSTN route to a local PSTN lines 320 Adding the IP route 320 Line pools to routes assignment 321 Assigning PSTN line pools to routes for a far end system 321 Assigning PSTN line pool to local PSTN lines 321 Assigning the IP line pool 321 Destination code for a fallback route configuration 322 Creating unique destination codes for fallback routes 322 T 38 fax configuration 323 T 38 fax configuration 323 Verifying codecs in Business Element Manager
253. ing tasks can be configured to use dial up as a primary connection SNMP auto trap dial out modem user secure callback CDR records retrieval backup to a remote destination log collection to a remote destination software upgrades The basic steps to set dial up as the primary connection are Create or assign an account with remote access privileges Create a dial up interface and enter the user name of the account with remote access privileges as the dial out user name Create a static route for the dial up interface or assign a dial out number depending on the type of device selected Tell the application to use the route Dial up interfaces as primary connections navigation Assigning remote access privileges to an account page 394 Configuring a dial up interface page 395 Assigning remote access privileges to an account Use the following procedure to assign remote access privileges to an account Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Administrator Access gt Accounts and Privileges gt View by Accounts tab Click Add The Add Account dialog box appears For more information about configuring an account see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Administration and Security NN40170 603 394 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 N oO R foe Dial up resources configuration Select the account to which you want to assign rem
254. interface appears in the Dial out Interfaces table End Enabling a modem interface An interface must be enabled to function as a backup connection If the BCM50 experiences a primary connection failure it will dial out using the dial up interface configured as the backup NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 381 Dial up resources configuration Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the modem 3 On the Link Parameters tab enter the Dial out number for the modem 4 On the Dial out Interfaces table select the Enable check box for the modem The interface is now enabled End Disabling a modem interface Use this procedure to disable a modem interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the modem to disable 3 On the Dial out Interfaces tab clear the Enable check box next to the modem End Deleting a modem interface Use this procedure to delete a modem interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 Clear the Enable check box 3 Click the modem interface 4 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box appears 5 Click Yes The interface is deleted End Modem interface connection or disconnection This sec
255. interfaces can be used for the Automatic dial out service Consider the following guidelines when using remote dial in The remote dial in for administration and the backup WAN link share the same modem If a remote administration user is connected while the primary link breaks the automatic backup function does not occur While using the back up interface BCM always calls BCM does not answer an incoming call from a router on the V 92 interface Dial up resources configuration navigation ISDN interface management page 375 ISDN interface connection or disconnection page 377 ISDN channel parameters configuration page 378 Global settings panel page 380 Modem interface management page 381 Modem interface connection or disconnection page 382 Modem dial out link parameters configuration page 383 Modem dial in parameters configuration ISDN dial in parameters configuration page 389 Automatic dial out interface configuration page 392 Dial up interfaces as primary connections page 394 Static routes for dial out configuration page 395 WAN failover configuration on BCM50 with a router card page 395 ISDN interface management This section provides information about managing ISDN interfaces ISDN interface management navigation Adding an ISDN interface page 376 Enabling an ISDN interface page 376 Disabling an ISDN interface page 376 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telep
256. ion from a DNS server Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt General Settings 2 In the DNS Settings pane enter the appropriate values in the following fields e DNS domain name e Primary DNS address e Secondary DNS address End Configuring the MTU option BCM allows you to change the MTU based upon your network architecture Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt General Settings 2 Enter the appropriate values in the MTU size field End Procedure job aid Refer to the following figure and table for values and descriptions for the General Settings tab 354 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP subsystem configuration General Settings panel IP Subsystem General Settings OAM Interface Dial Out Static Routes System name Jbcm450 MAC address f00 te ca Fl 53 b7 MIP Settings Obtain IP address dynamically I IP address fi92 167 131 40 IP subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 192 167 131 1 Modify DNS Settings DNS domain name flocaldomain Primary DNS address Secondary DNS address MTU size 1500 General Settings field definitions Attribute Value Description System name lt alphanumeric gt Enter a name to identify the BCM MAC address lt read only gt This is the physical address of
257. ion in this chapter applies to the BCM50 and BCM450 running on Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 platform The BCM uses DiffServ Code Point DSCP to mark voice related signaling and media packets so that they can be identified and prioritized throughout the IP network The BCM50 sends the default voice media TOS byte value 184 and the VoIP signaling TOS byte value 160 to IP Telephones using Unistim messages With flexible DSCP assignment the BCM50 administrator can modify the DSCP values used for e VoIP Signaling single value for SIP H 323 and Unistim e Voice media all media sources regardless of egress interface e 1 38 Fax media for calls using either SIP or H 323 signaling Attention The DSCP value is represented by the most significant 6 bit of the Type of Service TOS 8 bit field in the IP header For example DSCP decimal value 40 is equal to TOS decimal value 160 4 40 Navigation e Configuring flexible Diff Serv code point page 371 Configuring flexible Diff Serv code point You can manage DSCP values through the DSCP Marking tab in the BCM Configuration menu Procedure steps Step Action 1 Select Configuration gt Data Services gt QoS gt DSCP Setting gt DSCP Marking to access the DSCP Marking tab 2 In the Avaya Automatic QoS area select or clear the Avaya Automatic QoS check box When you select the Avaya Automatic QoS check box the DSCP Marking values become read only Sys
258. irects a call to the modem This field applies only when a call is directed to the line number specified in this section Otherwise this value is ignored and the modem answers 10 seconds after a call is presented Note The number of rings for certain market profiles must be multiplied by 2 due to double ring cadence For these profiles the maximum number of rings is 5 5x2 10 Default 1 Auto disable lt check box gt When selected the modem is automatically disabled after use Default disabled Auto disable lt 1 30 minutes gt Time after which the Dial in for the modem is disabled after use timer min Default 0 Directory Number lt read only gt Read only number assigned to the analog modem Used for manual transfer of call or by auto attendant Local IP Address Specification Remote assigned lt check box gt If selected the BCM obtains its IP address from the remote end Default disabled NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 387 Dial up resources configuration Attribute Value Description IP Address lt P address gt Use this IP Address as the local IP address for the PPP connection This value is used when Remote assigned is disabled Default 10 10 14 1 Remote IP Address Specification Assign IP address lt check box gt If selected the BCM will assign the IP address specified in th
259. isabling an ISDN interface Use the following procedure to disable and ISDN interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 376 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 2 Dial up resources configuration On the Dial out Interface tab clear the Enable check box next to the interface End Deleting an ISDN interface Use the following procedure to delete an ISDN interface Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 4 Action Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Dial out interfaces tab Clear the Enable check box Click the ISDN interface you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation dialog box appears Click Yes The interface is deleted End ISDN interface connection or disconnection Interfaces can be connected manually or they can be triggered to connect by auto dial out see Adding an automatic dial out interface page 393 Auto dial out routes can not be added if the interface is already manually connected unless the interface is already connected with auto dial out routes configured ISDN interface connection or disconnection navigation e Connecting an ISDN interface page 377 e Disconnecting an ISDN interface page 378 Connecting an ISDN interface Use the following procedure to connect an ISDN interface Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 4 Action Click Configuration gt
260. isplay For more information about multiple Business Names and Long Names see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 264 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Calling line identification configuration Configuring Business Names Complete this procedure to configure multiple Business Names for CLID Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings 2 In the Feature Settings area enter a business name in one or more of the Business Name fields You can choose to leave all Business Name fields blank Business Name names must be no more than 15 characters in length Leave a blank space for the last character of the Business name to act as a separator between the Business name and telephone name Note If you leave this field blank no name appears End Configuring Business Names to telephones Complete this procedure to associate the configured Business Names for CLID with specific DN Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences 2 In the Capabilities and Preferences tab select the DN for which you want to associate a configured Business Name The Details for DN panel appears for the DN you selected In the Preferences tab for the selected DN go to the Business Name drop down list
261. ists IP addresses that are reserved for specific clients These IP addresses can be outside any Included Address Ranges Address Ranges tab DHCP Server General Settings IP Terminal DHCP Options Address Ranges Lease Info Included Address Ranges From IP Address 4 To IP Address Default Gateway Reserved Addresses IP Address 4 MAC Address Client Name Client Description 188 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Address Ranges tab field descriptions BCM DHCP overview Attribute Value Description Included Address Ranges From IP Address lt IP Address format An IP address specifying the lowest IP address in a range 10 10 10 10 gt To IP Address lt IP Address format An IP address specifying the highest IP address in a range 10 10 10 10 gt Default Gateway gt IP Address format An IP address specifying the default gateway 10 10 10 10 gt Add lt button gt Click to add an included address range Delete lt button gt Click to delete a selected address range Modify lt button gt Click to modify a selected address range Reserved Addresses IP Address lt IP address gt Specify the IP Address that is reserved for this DHCP client MAC Address lt IP address gt Specify the MAC address for the DHCP client to which this IP address is assigned The permitted values is 6 bytes in hexadecimal format Client
262. itch protocol page 88 e Port details page 88 e Provisioning module lines and loops page 90 Telephony Resources table The top level panel shows a list of active modules and VoIP gateways and IP telephone IP network information Click the line for the resource you want to view or configure For an example of the Telephony Resources table see the following figure Telephony Resources table for BCM450 Telephony Resources Modules Location Configured Device Applications DSM32 DSM32 MBM DSM1 DSMI1E DTM T1 DTM PRI None None Telephony Resources table The Telephony Resources table fields are described in the following table 78 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony resources configuration Telephony Resources table field descriptions Attributes Value Description Location lt read only gt Internal Main MBM Expansion and slot number where MBM is installed Configured device DID4 DIDS This field indicates the type of module ASM ASM assigned to each location lt DID4 e DSM16 DSM16 DSM32 DSM32 e DID8 e 4X16 Combo 8X16 e ASM GASM Analog and Global Analog Combo Station Modules provide four DTM T1 DTM PRI connections for four analog telephones CTMA GATM4 e GATM4 Global Analog Trunk Module with four trunk line connections CTM8 GATM8 FEM e DSM16 or DSM32 DSM32 Digital Station Module
263. k OK to import the files O a Aa Ww End Configuring an ITSP account Use this procedure to configure an ITSP account This procedure applies to public SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the parameters described in the Public SIP account parameters Basic tab page 107 table and the SIP user account parameters page 112 table under ITSP accounts page 106 e If you are using a template create and import the template e Ifyou are not using a template you need the SIP domain e Ifthe accountrequires registration you need the SIP username and password of the account Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Public gt Accounts 2 Click Add The Add Account dialog box appears 3 If you are using a template select the template from the Select Template list If you are configuring the account options manually click No Template The Add Account dialog box updates to provide additional options NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 305 Configuring IP trunks 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Enter a unique name for the account Enter a description for the account optional If you selected a template the values for Template name SIP domain and Registration required are inherited from the template If you selected a template change the SIP domain if required
264. k with silence suppression Note that the peak bandwidth is twice the full transmission rate even though the average bandwidth is considerably less The spare bandwidth made available by silence suppression is available for lower priority data applications that can tolerate increased delay and jitter Two calls on a full duplex link with silence suppression Conversation Buenos noches Juan Tx I SIRNAS ASAIN IWIN R E ANN NNR N AW x 7 Hola Isabella Como esta llo Fred This is Susan Do you have a minute Hello Fred here il Sure Conversation Bandwidth used Se MW KW MMW GG ChannelbLink max T cE co 3 Og x o ca N SSS 1 Tx Channel Bandwidth Peak channel bandwidth is n average Independent Tx and Ax bandwidth bandwidth per call not shared by halfduplex calls Comfort noise To provide a more natural sound during periods of silence comfort noise is added at the destination gateway when silence suppression is active The source gateway sends information packets to the destination gateway informing it that silence suppression is active and describing what background comfort noise to insert The source gateway only sends the information packets when it detects a significant change in background noise NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 425 Silence suppression reference 426 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0
265. l features to be available to all nodes on the network 32 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview The following topics describe the different aspects of SL 1 and MCDN private networking e System dialing plans page 33 e Creating tandem private networks page 33 e Understanding Avaya Voice Networking MCDN network features page 35 e Networking with ETSI QSIG international systems only page 40 e Private networking with DPNSS international only page 50 The type of network you require depends on the equipment in the network and how you want to use the network With MCDN you can tie a set of Avaya BCM systems together with PRI SL 1 MCDN ETSI QSIG DPNSS or VoIP trunks to create a tandem network This type of network provides the additional advantage of providing private line access to local PSTNs for all the nodes on the network Attention A keycode is required to use the Avaya Voice Networking functionality which is referred to as SL 1 in Business Element Manager System dialing plans Both of these types of networks require similar setups for dialing plans and routing Each node must have a way to route external calls to the adjacent node or nodes To do this all nodes must have the same Private DN lengths You use routing and a private dialing plan to control calls over the network Each example in this section describes the
266. l or auto attendant answering e Click Configuration gt Applications gt Voice Messaging Contact Center e Click on the Launch Callpilot Manager button e Voice mail In Call Pilot Manager click Configuration and then click System Properties Ensure that the Enable Redirect DN box is selected e Auto Attendant Under the Auto Attendant heading click the line record you specified in step 4 and set the Auto Attendant to answer after 0 zero rings Click Change In the Number of Rings list select 0 if needed Click Submit Attention If you are using H 323 VoIP trunks for central voice mail you need to set the following Ensure that the local gateway protocol is set to SL 1 or CSE based on the version of the satellite systems Ensure that the remote gateways are programmed to route using CDP Ensure that the remote gateway protocols are setto SL 1 or CSE based on the version of the satellite system End 294 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Centralized voice mail configuration Satellite system configuration Systems that are remote to the voice mail system need to ensure that outgoing calls are correctly directed to the voice mail service on the host system Satellite system configuration navigation e Configuring a satellite system for voice mail page 295 e Configuring call forward to voice mail page 297 e Configuring a PRI connection page 297 Configuring a
267. l ringer enable this setting to allow the line to ring at the external ringer NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 233 Lines configuration Variable Name Value Redirect To If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a head office answer attendant enter the remote number here Ensure that you include the proper routing information Voice message center If the system uses remote voice mail select the center that is configured with the contact number Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Packages Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks Appearance Type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button with indicator otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so you must set this to Ring only Model Avaya 7000 Deskphones are supported in Europe only VMsg Set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter
268. lation NAT Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP firewalls and Virtual Private Networks VPN For more information on the router see your router documentation ADSL and Ethernet configurations The Avaya Business Communications Manager Avaya BCM 6 0 with router is available in two versions BCM50a The BCM with an ADSL modem This version connects to external networks over an ADSL modem within the router BCM50e The BCM with Ethernet This version connects to external networks over an Ethernet connection Router features The router offers a wide range of features ranging from DHCP Firewall NAT and VPN For more information see BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Guide Advanced N0115791 BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Guide Basic N0115790 BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Guide Advanced N0115789 and BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Guide Basic N0115788 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 163 Router overview 164 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 VLAN overview The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 A virtual LAN VLAN is a logical grouping of ports controlled by a switch and end stations such as IP telephones configured so that all ports a
269. lds Attribute Value Description Enable registration lt check box gt Select this check box to allow new IP clients to register with the system Attention Remember to clear this check box when you finish registering the new telephones Enable global registration password lt check box gt If selected the installer will be prompted for the global registration password when registering a new IP client If cleared the installer will be prompted for a user ID and password combination that has Installer privileges For more information about accounts and privileges see the Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Administration and Security NN40170 603 Global password lt 10 alphanumeric gt Default bcmi 2264 If the Enable global registration password check box is selected enter the password the installer will enter on the IP telephone to connect to the system If this field is left blank no password prompt occurs during registration Auto assign DN lt check box gt If you selectthe check box the system assigns an available DN as an IP terminal requests registration It does not prompt the installer to enter a set DN Note For this feature to work Registration must be selected If not selected the installer receives a prompt to enter the assigned DN during the programming session 92 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuratio
270. lds shown on the Port Values tab panel Attribute Value Model type Port Read only All modules These are the port numbers of the physical device Device type Read only All modules This is the type of module NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 89 Telephony resources configuration Port Values tab Attribute Value Model type Line OOX XXX CTM GATM4 CTM GATM8 Combo DTM T1 DTM PRI BRI T The number of lines depends on the module type Call State or State Idle Active Deprovisioned All modules This field indicates whether a module line or DN is in use or even provisioned Version lt read only gt All modules This field indicates the version of firmware running on the module DN XXXX ASM GASM DSM Each port supports one telephone hence one DN record Addon Add on All Modules Type Version Indicates auxiliary items added to the telephony devices or trunks Add on This is a list num ber Type This field indicates the type of add on such as a KIM module Version This field indicates the version of firmware running on the add on device Provisioning module lines and loops You can access three provisioning subpanels in Business Element Manager at by clicking Configuration Resources Telephony Resources The tabbed provisioning panel that appears d
271. lephony settings and features 56 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony programming Incoming call configuration part B Network configuration User features NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 57 Telephony programming Incoming call configuration part C 58 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony programming Configuration for incoming call controls For outgoing calls you can assign one or more intercom keys to directly link to a line pool or prime line or allow line pool access codes destination codes or internal system numbers to direct the call Telephones without intercom keys on the telephone have intercom keys assigned but the user must pick up the handset to access calls In this case the intercom key is an assigned DN For calls within the system all telephones are virtually linked within the system To call another telephone inside the system lift the handset and dial the local DN In this case the prime line has to be set to intercom or none Configuration for out going call traffic For calls going outside the system e If you assign the prime line to a line pool all the lines in that line pool must be assigned to the telephone When you pick up the handset the telephone automatically g
272. lick OK to add the entry to the table End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 309 Configuring IP trunks Configuring private SIP settings Use the Settings tab to disable private SIP settings This procedure applies to private SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under SIP private trunk settings page 120 Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Settings 2 Select check boxes to disable specific parameters In the Session Timer area select a session refresh method from the drop down list 4 In the RFC 2833 area seta value for the dynamic payload The default value is 120 To disable the dynamic payload set the value to 0 End Configuring the SIP URI map Use the SIP URI map to configure the subdomain name associated with each SIP URI This procedure applies to private SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under SIP URI map page 123 Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt URI Map 2 Configure the subdomain name associated with each SIP URI These strings must be coordinated with the other nodes in the network End Configuring SIP authentication Use this procedure to enable SIP authentic
273. ll cards installed in your MSC card e Both endpoints must support the T 38 fax protocol T 38 fax configuration navigation e 7 38 fax configuration page 323 e T 38 fax restrictions page 325 T 38 fax configuration This section describes how to configure T 38 fax Prerequisites for T 38 fax configuration To enable T 38 fax protocol you must configure the following e Voice over IP VoIP lines e Target lines e Call routing e Destination codes T 38 fax protocol configuration navigation e Verifying codecs in Business Element Manager page 324 e Enabling a T 38 fax page 324 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 323 T 38 fax configuration Verifying codecs in Business Element Manager To enable the T 38 fax protocol you must verify the codecs in Business Element Manager Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources 2 In the Telephony Resources panel select the row for IP Trunks The details panel appears Click the H323 Media Parameters or the SIP Media Parameters tab Verify that the preferred codec appears in the Selected List field Verify that the codecs are set at the default before performing T 38 sessions Enabling a T 38 fax Use this procedure to enable a T 38 fax Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony Resources 2 In the Telephony Resources panel select the row for IP Trunks The details pa
274. llowing procedure to view Avaya Service Code to P Bit Mapping information Procedure steps Step 1 2 Action In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Data Services gt QoS Select the VLAN P Bit Mapping tab The system displays 802 1Q Priority Bit Mapping Set the DSCP value for a particular Avaya Service Code by double clicking on the corresponding value in 802 1Q P Bit column Select the value from the drop down list End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 407 Configuring virtual LANs 408 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring Professional Call Recording The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 This chapter describes how to configure professional call recording feature for Avaya BCM system Navigation e Adding the recording rule page 409 e Modifying the recording rule page 410 e Deleting the recording rule page 411 Adding the recording rule Use the following procedure to add a recording rule for professional call recording feature in Avaya BCM Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Recording The Professional Call Recording Settings panel appears 2 From the Professional Call Recordin
275. lowing procedure to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ Code Point DSCP for Quality of Service QoS Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 Action In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Data Services gt CoS Select the DSCP Marking tab From the Avaya Automatic QoS area select the Avaya Automatic QoS check box to enable Avaya Automatic QoS In the VOIP Signaling area of the DSCP Setting area set the VOIP Signaling attributes In the Voice Media area of the DSCP Setting area set the Voice Media attributes In the Fax Media area of the DSCP Setting area set the Fax Media attributes End Variable definitions Variable Value Avaya Automatic QoS QoS value for fax media QoS value for voice media QoS value for VOIP signaling TOS byte for fax media Terms of Service TOS byte for voice media TOS byte for VOIP Signaling 406 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring virtual LANs Viewing DSCP to Avaya Service Code mapping Use the following procedure to view DSCP to Avaya Service Code service class mapping information Procedure steps Step 1 2 Action In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Data Services gt QoS Select the DSCP Mapping tab The system displays the DSCP to Avaya Service Code mapping information for the network Viewing Avaya Service Code to P Bit Mapping Use the fo
276. ls and restarts FEPS Modify Click Modify to change the Call Signaling Port This dialog box warns you that if you change this setting the system drops all SIP calls and restarts FEPS e Telephony settings Fallback to circuit switched Define how you wantthe system to handle calls that the system fails to send over the VoIP trunk Enabled TDM enables fallback for calls that originate on digital telephones This is useful if your IP telephones are connected remotely on the public side of the BCM network because PSTN fallback is unlikely to result in improved quality of service in that scenario e Status This is a read only field that indicates the status of the gateway NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 303 Configuring IP trunks 3 Suggested next steps e Ensure router settings firewalls and system ports are set correctly to support IP traffic over the trunks e Ensure that the private network dialing plan and access settings match the rest of the private network e Assign the VoIP line pools to system telephones End Configuring SIP media parameters The SIP media parameters allow you to specify the order in which the SIP trunk selects IP telephony system controls for codecs jitter buffers silence suppression and payload size Media parameters are common to both public and private SIP trunks Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the options described u
277. ls are routed through a dedicated PRI Pool and the calls can be routed based on various schedules The service types that may be available depending on your Service provider are described below e Public Public service calls connect your BCM set with a Central Office CO DID and DOD calls are supported e Private Private service calls connect your BCM set with a Virtual Private Network DID and DOD calls are supported A private dialing plan may be used e TIE TIE services are private incoming and outgoing services that connect Private Branch Exchanges PBX such as BCM e FX Foreign Exchange FX service calls logically connect your BCM telephone to a remote CO It provides the equivalent of local service at the distant exchange e OUTWATS OUTWATS is for outgoing calls This allows you to originate calls to telephones in a specific geographical area called a zone or band Typically a flat monthly fee is charged for this service e Inwats Inwats is a type of long distance service which allows you to receive calls originating within specified areas without a charge to the caller A toll free number is assigned to allow for reversed billing Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider Emergency 911 dialing North America only The ISDN PRI feature is capable of transmitting the telephone number and internal extension number of a calling station dialing 91
278. lue Description Remote capability MWI lt check box gt This setting must coordinate with the functionality of the Default Selected remote system that hosts the remote voice mail Ignore in band DTMF inRTP lt check box gt If you select the check box the BCM ignores audible Default Unselected in band DTMF tones received over IP trunks after the BCM connects the remote end to a locally hosted call center application or a locally hosted Call Pilot Manager application such as auto attendant or voice mail Attention Use this setting when the far end is a Avaya CS 2000 and Packet Voice Gateway PVG combination where the PVG is provisioned for OOBDT MF Supp F ullS upport resulting in the PVG Avaya CS 2000 sending out of band as well as in band DTMF tones at the same time to the BCM The PVG may not send both tone notifications depending on the version of the Avaya CS 2000 software release and whether the call is using G711 Coordinate this setting with Avaya CS 2000 settings See the Avaya CS 2000 administrator SIP trunks options common to public and private SIP trunks BCM can support SIP public trunks for several Internet Telephone Service Providers ITSP simultaneously and concurrently with a private networking configuration If you have a firewall ensure that the ports you use are allowed SIP uses port 5060 For more information about audio stream ports see the Avaya Business Communications
279. m remote users or private networks Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Restrictions Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks DN Unique Number Appearance Type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model Avaya 7000 Deskphones supported in Europe only VMsg Set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 221 Lines configuration T1 E1 loop start lines configuration Loop start trunks provide remote access to the BCM50 from the public network They must be configured to auto answer to provide remote system access A loop Start trunk must have disconnect supervision if it is to operate in the auto answer mode Prerequisites for T1 E1 loop start lines configuration e DTM module is installed and configured e Lines are
280. method association of inbound requests See ITSP Association Method page 110 for more information Outbound called This is the length of digits to be absorbed Optional 0 to 10 characters to absorb NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 109 IP VoIP trunk configuration Parameter Description Requirement Default Value Range Inbound called prefix to append Prepend inbound received digits with a configured prefix This feature adds a configured prefix to received digits so that the resulting number will not match a destination code in the BCM routing table For example a BCM can be configured to route any number starting with 9 through a trunk If this BCM receives an inbound call destined to any number starting with 9 the BCM attempts to route the call through the trunk instead of terminating iton a BCM set This feature prevents this by adding another number to the received digits Optional Blank Authentication realm This is the realm of an intermediary This is useful in deployments where the service provider is fronted by an SBC P roxy for which the BCM requires credentials which are not the same as those for the service provider In such deployments the BCM needs two sets of credentials one for the service provider which is configured as part of the SIP user account configuration and another for the intermediary
281. ministrator group or the member of a Security group with the Telephony Call Record privilege Security groups can be created from Configuration gt Administrator Access gt Accounts and Privileges gt View by Groups panel Limitations You require a reliable network connectivity to the storage media The professional call recording will be terminated if the BCM no longer has visibility of the call due to trunk optimizations When recording IP set to IP set or IP set to IP trunk calls if the call is forwarded to email and the codec is not G 711 then only the call details is provided in the email Avaya does not provide the legal notification of the recording over DISA AUTO DN This feature does not support silence suppression Manual recording through feature invocation from analog sets is not supported Recording of HUNT group DNs and skill set DNs are not supported Recording of trunk to trunk tandem calls that do not originally terminate on a DN is not supported The professional call recording may be terminated due to rare transient software errors on the BCM NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 173 Professional call recording 174 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Remote modem The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Ava
282. mit fax calls over SIP trunks T 38 and G 711 are mutually exclusive If you choose G 711 for fax transport T 38 is not used If you choose T 38 G 711 is not used Choose between T 38 and G 711 ion the SIP Media Parameters panel The choice applies to all SIP trunk calls See H 323 media parameters page 132 Both ends of the SIP call are responsible for listening for fax tones and configuring their G 711 tasks to transmit and receive fax reliably No support is available for tandem G 711 fax calls between H 323 and SIP trunks because H 323 supports only T 38 for transmitting fax SIP fax over G 711 configuration Complete these procedures to enable G 711 fax SIP fax over G711 configuration navigation e Verifying codecs in Business Element Manager page 327 e Enabling fax on an analog set port page 328 e Enabling SIP G 711 fax page 328 Verifying codecs in Business Element Manager Complete these procedures to verify codecs in Business Element Manager Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources 2 In the Telephony Resources panel select the row for IP Trunks The details panel appears NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 327 SIP fax over G 711 configuration 3 Click the Sip Media Parameters 4 Verify that the preferred codecs G 711lu and G 711a appear in the Selected List field Enabling fax on an analog set por
283. mmunications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 185 BCM DHCP overview IP Terminal DHCP Options tab DHCP Server General Settings 1P Terminal DHCP Options address Ranges Lease Info Primary Terminal Proxy Server S1 IP address MEERGASEN o C Port number ao ation S T Retry count es j Secondary Terminal Proxy Server 52 IP address 192 167 131 40 Port acm X VLAN identifiers comma delimited Avaya WLAN Handset Settings TFTP Server WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 IP Terminal DHCP Options field descriptions Attribute Value Description Primary Terminal Proxy Server S1 IP Address lt IP address gt The IP address of the Proxy Server for IP phones 10 10 10 10 Port lt drop down list gt Select the appropriate port BCM Meridian 1 Succession 1000 Centrex SL 100 SRG Other Port number lt number gt The port number on the terminal through which IP phones connect Action lt read only gt The initial action code for the IP telephone Retry count lt number gt The delay before an IP phone retries connecting to the proxy server 186 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BCM DHCP overview IP Terminal DHCP Options field descriptions Attribute Value Description Secondary Terminal Proxy Server S2 Manager 2245
284. mp M WinkStart Selectthe signal type forthe line The immediate setting does not Immediate appear for T1 E amp M or T1 DID trunks connected to a DTM if the Dial mode is set to tone DelayDial i Make sure that this matches the signal type programmed for the trunk at the other switch Link at CO Loop analog only lt check box gt Some exchanges respond to a Link signal also called hook flash FEATURE 71 by providing an alternative line for making outgoing calls Enabling Link at CO causes the system to apply the restrictions on outgoing calls to the digits dialed after the Link signal As well the call on the alternative line is subject to all restrictions Disabling Link at CO prevents a Link signal from resetting the BCM50 restrictions in cases where the host exchange does not provide an alternative line Line Tuning Loop analog only Digit 0 to 9 None Default value 1 Attribute Value Description Legend Loop analog digital loop GS ground start DID DID E amp M E amp M BRI BRI DPNSS Loop guarded Loop unguarded DPNSS VolP VolP TL Target Note PRI fields are all included under the main table Trunk mode Loop Unspr Define whether disconnect supervision also referred to as loop Supeivis d supervision releases an external line when an open switch p interval OSI is detected during a call on that line You must set E arth calling this to Supervised if a loop trunk has its Ans
285. n Telephony May 2010 Telephony resources configuration IP Terminal Global Settings panel fields Attribute Value Description Advertisement Logo lt alphanumeric Any information in this field appears on the display of all IP string gt telephones For example your company name or slogan Default Codec Auto Ifthe IP telephone has not been configured with a preferred G 711 aLaw codec choose a specific codec that the IP telephone will G 711 uLaw use when it connects to the system G 729 If you choose Auto the system will select the most G723 G 729 VAD appropriate Codec when the IP telephone is on a call G 723 VAD If you are unsure about applying a specific codec ask your network administrator for guidance Default jitter buffer None Choose one of these settings to change the default jitter Auto buffer size 5 mall e None Minimal latency best for short haul networks Medium Large with good bandwidth e Auto The system dynamically adjusts the size e Small The system adjusts the buffer size depending on CODEC type and number of frames per packet to introduce a 60 millisecond delay e Medium 120 millisecond delay e Large 180 millisecond delay G 729 payload size 10 20 30 40 50 Setthe maximum required payload size per codec for the ms 60 IP telephone calls sent over H 323 trunks Default 30 Payload size can also be set for Avaya IP trunks G 723 payload size
286. n entry in the Outbound Proxy table to route messages Route all calls using proxy If you do not check this option calls route first using entries in the Routing table MCDN Protocol Use CSE for interop with BCM or if you applied the MCDN keycode use CSIK IP Address The IP address is not mandatory If provided it is used in the maddr tag of the SIP message header Use the IP address to interoperate with the NRS Port Enter the port number 3 To configure Outbound Proxy servers select Add on the Outbound Proxy panel Choose the settings for each field Name Domain name of the outbound server The message is routed to this proxy instead of the SIP domain The BCM uses the SIP proxy domain in the message headers IP Address The IP address is not mandatory If you provide an IP address DNS is not used and the message is routed to the IP address Port SIP port of the outbound server Weight Load balancing weight The weight is a value within the range 0 10 Each call attempt is directed at the next proxy server in the list which has been used the least according to its weight Keep Alive This attribute helps the system determine if an Outbound proxy device is responding If you select None the system assumes the device is active and does not ping the device If you select OPTIONS the system sends a periodic OPTIONS message to the proxy If the proxy fails to respond the system skips it until it responds again 4 C
287. n outgoing call if the outgoing line allows number display and the receiving telephone has number display active Note Outgoing call identification is not supported on analog trunks OLI can be set for each telephone on both private and public network calls Private OLI is used for CLID over private networks The Priv OLI field is usually set to the DN number as a default although it may be different if the DN length has changed NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 267 Calling line identification configuration Public OLI is used for CLID over public networks and for tandem calls over private networks that terminate on the public network The number of digits for this field is determined by your local service provider CLID is prepended with the Public Network Code from the Public Network Dialing Plan Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs 2 Select the DN row you want to change 3 Click on the Pub OLI field or the Priv OLI field 4 Enter a new number 5 Click on the DN row again to apply the field change End Blocking outgoing name display at the trunk level Use this procedure to block outgoing name display at the trunk level Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources 2 Click IP Trunks 3 On the Details for Module Internal panel select IP Trunk Settings
288. nal telephones together through the DN numbers and allow the user to access line pools for making outgoing calls as well as being required for other call features such as conference calling and system wide call appearance SWCA calls Intercom designations are assigned in the DN record or automatically by the system for each telephone The system initiates with a limited number of lines You must provision additional lines when you add a corresponding MBM For information on Dynamic Device Configuration DDC and provisioning additional lines see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 Navigation Line configuration prerequisites overview page 69 System level line identification page 70 BRI loops page 72 Line records page 72 Line job aids page 73 Line access page 75 Line configuration prerequisites overview You must configure the media bay modules and or the VoIP trunk parameters before you can set up line programming The position on the system bus of the trunk media bay modules determines the line numbers that are available For more information see Avaya Business Communications Manager 450 6 0 Installation System NN40170 303 The position on the system bus of the station media bay modules determines which DNs are available although DN numbers can be changed Available VoIP lines are determined by the number of VoIP keycodes entered on the system one keycode per VoI
289. nces Caller ID Set msg Set 221 Appr Ring N A oO EJ Add Add Line Appearance 146 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI ISDN loop properties overview The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The Loops tables display settings for installed BRI modules The following paths indicate where to access the loops table for BRI modules in Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Business Element Manager Configuration Telephony Loops e Telset interface CONFIG gt Hardware gt Module gt TrunkMod gt BRI X gt Loop XXX This panel contains the following tab e Loops provides configuration for general loop settings You can define BRI loops as either T loops for connecting to ISDN trunks or S loops for connecting to internal ISDN equipment Both types of loops are displayed in the top frame in the Loop Parameters panel In the bottom frame the settings displayed are specific to each type of loop Navigation e Loop type and general parameters page 148 e T loop general settings page 149 e T loop SPIDS and network DNs page 150 e T loops D packet service page 151 e S loops assigned DNs page 153 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 147 BRI ISDN loop prope
290. nd end stations in the VLAN appear to be on the same physical or extended LAN segment even though they may be geographically separated A maximum of four VLANs are supported for BCM50 and a maximum of eight VLANs are supported for BCM450 VLAN supports multiple IP addresses on BCM LAN ports It can be provisioned on an Ethernet port on an expansion chassis butis not supported on OAM LAN port It Supports 802 1p marking on BCM for VoIP traffic to simplify configuration of the L2 devices in customer networks VLAN IDs are determined by how the VLAN switch is configured If you are not the network administrator you must ask whoever manages the switch what the VLAN ID range is for your system VLANs aim to offer the following benefits e VLANs are supported over all IEEE 802 LAN MAC protocols and over shared media LANs as well as point to point LANs e VLANs facilitate easy administration of logical groups of stations that can communicate as if they were on the same LAN They also facilitate easier administration of move add and change in members of these groups e Traffic between VLANs is restricted Bridges forward unicast multicast and broadcast traffic only on LAN segments that serve the VLAN to which the traffic belongs e ForIP telephony VLANs provide a useful technique to separate and prioritize the telephony traffic for L2 switches e VLAN also provides a shield from malicious traffic that may be targeted at the IP phone in
291. nder SIP media parameters page 104 before starting this procedure Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Media Parameters 2 Enter the information that supports your system Ensure that these settings are consistent with the other systems on the network Attention Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker can disrupt calls at other telephones that use VoIP trunks in the vicinity of the fax machine The following are suggestions to minimize the possibility of the system dropping your VoIP calls because of fax tone interference e Position the fax machine away from other telephones e Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off if that option is available End 304 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring IP trunks Importing an ITSP template Use this procedure to import an ITSP template This procedure applies to public SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Review the implications of importing templates provided under Rules governing the import of templates page 114 Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Public gt ITSP Templates 2 Click Import The Import files dialog box appears Click OK Select a template archive or one or more template files Click Select Files Clic
292. ndividual telephone This clarity does not carry over to internet telephony where the definition of an IP trunk is so diverse that itis usually negotiated between two parties when service agreements are established In the context of BCM an IP trunk is defined by the Business Element Manager configuration options that determine how the BCM handles a call that is being routed over an IP network for example the internet BCM supports the H 323 and SIP protocols for IP trunks IP trunk configuration options in Business Element Manager are grouped under Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks and distributed across three subpanels e Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt General The General panel provides access to a table that lists all active VoIP routes and to configuration options that are common to both SIP and H323 VoIP protocols e Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking The SIP Trunking panel provides access to subpanels for configuring public and private SIP trunks e Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking The H323 Trunking panel provides access to subpanels for configuring H 323 trunks NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 97 IP VoIP trunk configuration Attention H 323 and SIP trunks are only enabled on the BCM by applying keycodes Each keycode adds a specific number of IP trunks You must reboot your BCM after you enter
293. ne In some fax machines dialing manually results in a much shorter call time out e If you must dial manually wait until the call is answered before you start the fax session e For Mailbox Call Answering only if you must dial manually enter the digit 8 as soon as you hear the mailbox greeting This ensures that Call Pilot Manager initiates the fax session before the fax machine timer starts Attention Enter the digit 8 for Norstar Voice Mail User Interface NVMUI only To enable fax call answering when using Call Pilot Manager User Interface CPUI enter 707 e Increase the call duration by adding a timed pause to the end of the dialing string This addition allows the call to ring atthe destination before the fax machine call duration timer starts Refer to your fax machine documentation for more information on how to insert pauses into dial strings e Because the problem is related to the delay in initiating the fax session reduce the number of rings for fax mailboxes Call Forward No Answer CFNA 330 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Restriction filters configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The following describes the panels that are used to enter restriction filters and restriction overrides You can have a maximum of 100 restriction filters on
294. nel appears Click the H323 Media Parameters or the SIP Media Parameters tab Select the Enable T 38 fax check box End 324 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 T 38 fax configuration Procedure job aid H323 Media Parameters tab eee nor re reer ar Routing Table H323 Settings H323 Media Parameters SIP Settings SIP Media Parameters SIP URI Map Preferred Codecs Settings Codec Preferences Enable Yoice Activity Detection oO Available list Selected list Jitter buffer Auto v G 729 i aoe G 723 f G 729 payload size ms 30 v J G7ulaw A l G 711 aLaw G 723 payload size ms G 711 payload size ms 30 v Incremental payload size oO Enable T 38 fax Force G 711 for 3 1k audio go To complete T 38 fax configuration you must configure media gateways For more details and instructions on how to configure media gateways refer to Business Communication Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN 40160 200 T 38 UDP redundancy refers to the number of times IP packets not fax pages are sent because TCP UDP does not support packet validation unlike TCP IP T 38 fax restrictions Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker can disrupt calls on other telephones using VoIP trunks near the fax machine Follow these suggestions to reduce the chance of your VoIP calls being dropped because of fax tone interference e Locate the fax machine away from
295. nes for use by system users who call in from outside the system You can give them direct access to the system with an Auto DN or you can configure the line so they hear a stuttered dial tone at which point they need to enter a password CoS to gain access DISA DN Outgoing calls For outgoing calls you can assign one or more intercom keys to access a line pool or prime line destination code or internal system numbers to direct the call Telephones without intercom keys do require intercom paths assigned but to access calls users must pick up the handset to connect For calls within the system all telephones are virtually linked within the system To call another telephone inside the system you can lift the handset and dial the local DN In this case the prime line must be set to intercom For calls going outside the system e If you assign the prime line to a line pool When you pick up the handset the telephone automatically grabs the first available line from the assigned line pool In this configuration you must ensure that the outgoing number is allowed by the line pool e Ifyou assign the prime line to an intercom button You can enter a line pool access code or a destination code followed by the telephone number to direct the outgoing call where it exits the system on any available line in that pool 76 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony resources c
296. network e Remote capability MWI This setting must coordinate with the functionality of the remote system that hosts the remote voice mail e Ignore in band DTMF in RTP If you select the check box the BCM ignores audible in band DTMF tones received over VoIP trunks after the BCM connects to the remote end of a locally hosted call center application or to a locally hosted Call Pilot Manager application such as auto attendant voice mail or IVR Configuring VoIP line features Use this procedure to configure the line features for IP VoIP trunks This procedure applies to both SIP and H 323 trunks NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 301 Configuring IP trunks Prerequisites for VoIP line features configuration e For VoIP planning information and prerequisite checklists see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 e Ensure you have enabled a valid VoIP lines keycode e Set gateway parameters and system IP parameters to enable the trunks e Setup target lines when you use these trunks Procedure steps Step 1 2 Action Navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active VoIP Lines Confirm or change the settings on the Line Trunk main panel e Line Unique number e Trunk type VoIP e Name identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling e Control Set identify a DN if you are using this with scheduling
297. nference Bridges The system shows a table of DNs set up as conference bridges The table shows the DN number and the current Meet Me Conferencing COS value 3 Click the Class Of Service setting of the DN to change NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Meet Me Conferencing configuration 4 Enter the new COS value End Class of service and system settings for Meet Me Conferencing configuration The system settings apply to all conferences on the BCM The administrator assigns each chairperson 1 of 16 MeetMe Conferencing COS values The COS contains several settings that pertain to the operation of the feature The default settings for each COS are listed in Table 6 The Meet Me Conferencing COS is separate and distinct from the Mailbox COS The administrator assigns a Meet Me Conferencing COS to a chairperson s DN See Chairperson settings configuration page 340 Configuring COS for Meet Me Conferencing You can directly change the COS table by clicking the table cells You can change the Name Maximum Conference Size Allow QuickStart Allow Continue Allow Announce Off and Conference Language for any COS Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Applications gt Meet Me Conferencing gt Configuration tab 2 To change the Name double click the Name cell of the COS to change 3 Delete the current name 4 Enter a new name 5 To change the Maximum Conferen
298. nfiguration Define a CCR tree transfer node that transfers callers to the Meet Me DN For example Press 3 for Meet Me Conferencing Advise chairpersons to include the transfer instructions in meeting invitations For more information about CCR tree administration see the Cal Pilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide NN40170 300 Navigation e Conference bridges management page 336 e Class of service and system settings for Meet Me Conferencing configuration page 337 e Chairperson settings configuration page 340 Conference bridges management 336 Use the procedures in this section to manage the Meet Me Conferencing bridges Conference bridges management navigation e Viewing the conference bridges table page 336 e Configuring CoS in the conference bridges table page 336 Viewing the conference bridges table Complete this procedure to view conference bridge table information such as DNs and CoS values Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Applications gt Meet Me Conferencing 2 Click Conference Bridges The system shows a table of DNs set up as conference bridges The table shows the DN number and the current Meet Me Conferencing COS value End Configuring CoS in the conference bridges table Complete this procedure to configure CoS through the conference bridge table Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Applications gt Meet Me Conferencing 2 Click Co
299. nfiguration Telephony May 2010 Configuring IP trunks The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running 6 0 It contains all procedures required to configure H 323 and SIP trunks using the Business Element Manager For conceptual information that supports these procedures see IP VoIP trunk configuration page 97 Navigation e Configuration procedures for all IP trunks page 301 e Configuration procedures for SIP trunks page 303 e Configuration procedures for H 323 trunks page 314 Configuration procedures for all IP trunks Configuration procedures for all VoIP trunks include e Configuring IP trunk settings page 301 e Configuring VoIP line features page 301 Configuring IP trunk settings Use this procedure to configure the IP trunk settings Options on the IP Trunk Settings panel are common to both SIP and H 323 trunks Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt General gt IP Trunk Settings 2 Choose the settings that you need for your system e Forward redirected OLI If you select the check box the OLI of an internal telephone is forwarded over the VoIP trunk when a call is transferred to an external number over the private VoIP network If notselected the system forwards only the CLID of the transferred call e Send name display If you select the check box the system sends the telephone name without going calls to the
300. nfiguring an H 323 route page 314 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 127 IP VoIP trunk configuration Add Remote Gateway field descriptions Field Value Description Name lt alphanumeric gt Enter a name for the remote system This must be a unique name within the routing table Destination Digits lt numeric gt can be the same as the destination code for the route to this system Set the leading digits which callers can dial to route calls through the remote gateway Ensure that there are no other remote gateways currently using this combination of destination digits If multiple leading digits map to the same remote gateway separate them with a space For example 7 81 9555 These numbers are passed to the remote system as part of the dialed number IP Address lt IP Address gt Enter the IP address of the remote system gateway This field is optional for SIP endpoints and mandatory for H 323 endpoints Port lt numeric gt Enter the optional port number Default 5060 For SIP endpoints only GW Type BCM Choose the type of system that is accessed through the BCM35 remote gateway IPT BCM BCMs running 3 6 or later software and Call Pilot Other Manager with compatible versions of H 323 BCM35 for BCMs running 3 5 software IPT Meridian 1 system running IP software MCDN Protocol lt drop down list gt None SL1 CSE Defa
301. nformation to IP sets It also provides DHCP information to other devices on the LAN in the event that no other DHCP Server such as a router is available On BCM50a or BCM50e if you use the DHCP server on the main module disable the DHCP server on the router DHCP default configuration Refer to the following network scenarios to understand the BCM DHCP functionality BCM50 models without the router The default DHCP status is assigned to Enabled IP Phones Only By default the BCM50 is a DHCP client There are two cases No external DHCP server The BCM50 first attempts to obtain a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server If the BCM50 receives no response it uses the IP address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 0 The system looks fora dynamic IP address each time it reboots By default the DHCP server provides an address range of 192 168 1 200 192 168 1 254 The BCM50 DHCP server services Avaya IP Deskphones only In this situation the default VoIP settings are e S1IP address 192 168 1 2 e S1Portnumber 7000 e SIAction 1 e SI Retry count 1 e S21IP address 192 168 1 2 e S2 Port 7000 180 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BCM DHCP overview e 2 Action 1 e S2 Retry count 1 With external DHCP server The BCM50 first attempts to obtain a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server The external DHCP server responds with an IP address for example 47 166 50 108 255 255 2
302. ng keycode to enable the call recording feature Avaya recommends you to consider the laws and legal restrictions when utilizing the Professional Call Recording feature Autonomous recording This feature supports recording of a call in the future based upon rules provisioned by the administrator The autonomous rule is only visible to the administrative user that provisioned the rule all incoming calls to a DN all outgoing calls from a DN all calls to and from a DN Internal Calls to and from the DN External Calls to and from the DN Conference Calls Manually invoked using F995 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 169 Professional call recording The autonomous rules can only be configured through the Business Element Manager or an application developed using CIM XML toolkit When BCM determines that a call has matched a provisioned rule the call recording starts The recording of the call contains either the details of the call and the audio or just the call details only The number of Professional Call Recording keycodes determines the number of simultaneous audio recordings Attention When the Call Tracking option is enabled only the call details are recorded Call Details Call tracking details corresponding to a call is provided with the call audio when audio capture is enabled for both the Email and Remote call recording server options Call details for a recording s
303. nications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dial up resources configuration Attribute Value Description Remote assigned lt check box gt When selected BCM obtains its IP address from the remote end Cleared the BCM will use the addresses specified below for the first and second dial in connections Default disabled First dial in IP lt check box gt The IP address that will be assigned to the BCM side of the Address second dial in connection This is only assigned if Remote Assigned is disabled Default 10 10 18 2 Second dial in IP lt IP Address gt The IP address that will be assigned to the BCM side of the Address second dial in connection This is only assigned if Remote Assigned is disabled Default 10 10 18 2 Remote IP Address Specification Assign IP address lt check box gt When enabled BCM will assign the remote end of the to connection one ofthe IP addresses specified below When remote cleared the remote side will assign it s own IP address Default disabled First dial in IP lt IP The IP address that will be assigned to the remote side ofthe first Address dial in connection This is only assigned if Assign IP address to remote is enabled Default 10 10 18 10 Second dial in IP lt P Address gt The IP address that will be assigned to the remote side of the Address second dial in connection This is only assigned if Assign IP address to remote is enabled Default 10
304. nly flag indicates that the BCM is acting as a STUN client in that it dynamically discovers the public IP address of the NAT router using the STUN protocol When unchecked the public IP address of the NAT router has to be configured if local NAT compensation is required Provisioned Public Address When the public IP address of the NAT router is configured this read only field indicates that address When the BCM is acting as a STUN client this field is not shown Stun Server Address When the BCM is acting as a STUN client these read only Stun Server Port fields indicate the address portnumber of the STUN server IP Stun Local Address address and portnumber the BCM will use to send messages Stun Server Port to the STUN server When the public IP address of the NAT router is configured these fields are not shown Modify Click Modify to open the Discovery Setting dialog box You use this dialog box to determine whether the BCM uses STUN to discover the public IP address of the NAT If dynamic discovery is used the administrator can configure the BCM with the address port number of the STUN server and the local port that the BCM uses to communicate with the STUN server Modify Address Discovery Flag Leave this flag unchecked if the BCM will be manually configured with the public IP address of the NAT Check this flag for BCM to discover the public IP address of the NAT using STUN Modify E
305. not be administered to a T1 DID and PRI trunk You can program the dialed digits to match those of a specific target line DN the DISA DN or the Auto DN If you program the dialed digits to the DISA DN only the incoming calls that match the programmed DN will receive a DISA dial tone Incoming calls with other digits will route to a target line Remote access on DPNSS lines A remote caller can access a BCM system dial tone select a line pool that contains exchange lines or DPNSS lines then dial a number The procedure is identical to dialing an outside number from an extension in the local system The main features are e Calls coming from another switch to the BCM system are routed in two ways depending on the Answer mode that you program If the Answer mode is set to Manual and the line is assigned to ring at an extension the incoming call automatically rings at the assigned extension If Answer mode is set to Auto BCM automatically answers the incoming call Because most other DPNSS features are extension specific Avaya recommends that all DPNSS lines are configured as auto answer lines e The Page feature is available to both remote callers and callers within the system A remote caller must have DTMF capability to access the Page feature e The line redirection feature allows the originating party to redirect a call that is waiting a connection or re connection to an alternate destination after a time out period Failed calls can be re
306. ns Complete this procedure to configure shared DHCP options Procedure steps Step 1 Action In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Data Services gt DHCP Server Select the IP Terminal DHCP Options tab In the Primary Terminal P roxy Server S1 area configure the Primary Terminal P roxy Server attributes In the Secondary Terminal Proxy Server S2 area configure the Secondary Terminal Proxy Server attributes In the VLAN area identify the VLANs In the Avaya WLAN Handset Settings area configure the Avaya WLAN Handset Settings attributes Click OK End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Action IP address lt IP Address gt Specify the IP Address that is reserved for this DHCP client Port Port number Retry count TFTP Server Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP VLAN identifiers comma delimited WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 Wireless LAN Adding a new included IP address range Complete the fields in the Address Ranges tab to specify IP addresses to be provided to DHCP clients The Address Ranges tab has two tables Included Address Ranges and Reserved Addresses The Included Address Ranges specifies a range of IP addresses to be provided to DHCP clients NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 365 DHCP server configuration on BCM main module
307. ns Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring Professional Call Recording Variable definitions Variable Value DN The DN of the set to automatically record Call Option Determines the type of call to record Where to send recording Determines where the recording is sent Computer IP port or Email Specifies the path either computer or email address Don t include key presses i presses from being provided in the call detail Manual stop record behavior The action the BCM takes when the user cancels the recording using F996 and the call is sent to an email server Follow call logic Call tracking only Enable and disable rule through F998 Rule enabled Monitor auto answer lines Deleting the recording rule Use the following procedure to delete a recording rule for professional call recording feature in Avaya BCM Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Recording The Professional Call Recording Settings panel appears 2 In the Professional Call Recording Configuration are select the recording that you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 The confirmation window appears 5 Click Yes 6 The selected rule is deleted from the Professional Call Recording window End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 411 Configuring Professional Call Recording 4
308. ns that if there is more than one module assigned to the DS 30 bus all modules will be disabled Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration Resources Telephony Resources Modules panel 2 Select the module you want to enable or disable 3 Click either Enable or Disable 4 Click OK End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 201 Module management Disabling or enabling a port channel setting If you need to isolate a problem or block access from the module you may need to turn off individual port channels rather than the entire module Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 4 Action Click Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt Modules panel Select the module supporting the port you want to enable or disable In the Set Port Details tab select the port you want to enable or disable Click either the Enable or Disable button The State field indicates the mode of operation for the port as shown in the following figure If the portis enabled this field shows unequipped unless a device is physically connected Attention A trunk media bay module has no changeable settings on the Trunk Port Details record End Procedure job aid Set Port Details tab Details for Module Internal Set Port Details Ports on Module Port DN Device type Version State 0401 22 nequipped Jnequipped a 0402 222 nequipped equipped 04
309. nter the public IP address of the NAT router Provisioned Public Address Modify Enter the address of the STUN server Stun Server Address Modify Enter the port number for the STUN server Stun Server Port Modify Read Only Shows the IP address the BCM will use to Stun Local Address communicate with the STUN server Modify The source port number that BCM will use when sending Stun Local Port messages to the STUN server ProvisionedP ublicP ort The public port of the NAT router NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 117 IP VoIP trunk configuration SIP public route configuration All SIP public routes are listed at Configuration gt R esources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Public gt Routing Table This is also where you add new routes and delete existing routes An ITSP account must be configured before you can configure a route for the ITSP Clicking the Add button at the bottom of the Routing Table opens the Add Route dialog The Add Route dialog provides fields for a name for the route alphanumeric the destination digits users enter to select the route integers spaces allowed and the ITSP account that the route is associated with the ITSP accountis selected from a drop down list of available ITSP accounts When you complete the Add Route fields and click OK the dialog box closes and the new route is added to the Routing Table For more information about confi
310. ny May 2010 IP subsystem configuration OAM interface tab IP Subsystem General Settings LAN Interfaces VLAN Interfaces Static Routes Dial Out Static Routes LAN Interfaces Summary Name a IP Address Subnet Mask MAC Address MTU Size Allow Network Access gt er LAN 192 167 131 40 255 255 255 0 00 1e ca f1 53 b7 1500 0O OAM LAN 10 10 11 1 255 255 255 252 00 te ca F1 53 b8 SSS Ez ESSa Details for Interface OAM LAN IP Configuration DHCP Information IP Address 10 10 11 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 252 __ Static routes configuration Automatic Dial out Interfaces require static routes Navigation e Adding a new IP Static Route page 359 e Modifying an existing IP Static Route page 360 e Deleting a static route page 360 Adding a new IP Static Route Complete this procedure to add a new IP static route to the BCM static routes configuration Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt Dial out Static Routes tab 2 Click Add The Add Dial out Static Route dialog box appears 3 Enter the Destination Destination mask Interface name and Metric fields NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 359 IP subsystem configuration 4 Click OK The new IP static route appears in the list End Modifying an existing IP Static Route Complete this procedure to modify an IP static route Procedure ste
311. ny May 2010 SIP Media Parameters field descriptions IP VoIP trunk configuration Activity Detection Default S elected Attribute Value Description Settings Enable Voice lt check box gt Voice activity detection also known as silence suppression identifies periods of silence in a conversation and stops sending IP speech packets during those periods In a typical telephone conversation most of the conversation is half duplex meaning that one person is speaking while the other is listening For more information see Silence suppression reference page 421 If voice activity detection is selected no voice packets are sent from the listener end This greatly reduces bandwidth requirements G 723 1 and G 729 support voice activity detection G 711 does not support voice activity detection G 723 1 and G 729 support silence suppression G 711 does not support silence suppression J itter buffer Auto None Small Medium Large Default Auto Select the size of jitter buffer for your system G 729 payload size ms 10 20 30 40 50 60 Default 20 G 723 payload size ms 30 G 711 payload size ms 10 20 30 40 50 60 Default 30 Assign the desired payload size for each codec for IP calls sent over SIP trunks Change the defaults to coordinate with other systems on the network For SIP endpoints the suggested payload size is 20 ms Networks that support a mix of SIP and
312. o Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking gt Media Parameters 2 Enter the information that supports your system Ensure that these settings are consistent with the other systems on the network Refer to H 323 media parameters page 132 for details on the options 316 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring IP trunks Attention Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker can disrupt calls at other telephones that use VoIP trunks in the vicinity of the fax machine The following are suggestions to minimize the possibility of the system dropping your VoIP calls because of fax tone interference e Position the fax machine away from other telephones e Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off if that option is available End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 317 Configuring IP trunks 318 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP trunk fallback configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 Configuring fallback routes allows you to set up access to a PSTN line pool in case where IP trunks are not available due to network problems These routes can be assigned to destination codes The
313. o not configurable The following settings are the only capability settings that require specific configuration for ISDN devices Page settings Page only select Devices cannot be assigned to Page zones OLI as called number lt check box gt If Enabled the specified OLI for the telephone is used for CLID for Calls All other settings are variable based on your system requirements 260 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Calling line identification configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The following describes the various areas in the system that need configuration to allow incoming or outgoing Calling Line Identification Display CLID information to display incoming calls or transmit over the trunks outgoing calls For more information on CLID name display see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 Calling line ID configuration navigation e CLID configuration for incoming calls page 261 e CLID configuration for outgoing calls page 266 CLID configuration for incoming calls Telephones can receive Name Number and Line display for incoming calls over trunks that support CLID or between telephones within the system The following describes the different areas where these cap
314. o CbC services available by switch protocol Inwats 1 800 page 88 Intl 800 Digital SDS 900 Translation Mode None Define how the incoming digits get mapped to line All numbers target lines or DISA AUTO DNs within By SID the system By Number Translate All Calls To chosen Enter the appropriate information for the mode Actions NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 87 Telephony resources configuration Call by Call Service Selection panel field values Attribute Value Description Add 1 On the Modules table select the PRI module you want to configure 2 Select the Service Type record to which you want to add Digit translations 3 Under the Translate table click B 4 Enter the appropriate information in the From and To fields on the dialog box 5 Click OK on the dialog to save the translation range Delete 1 On the Modules table select the PRI module record you want to delete 2 Select the Service Type record from which you want to delete Digit translations 3 On the Translate table select one or more ranges to delete 4 Click Delete 5 Click OK on the confirmation dialog to delete the digit translation range CbC services available by switch protocol The following table lists the applicable services for the protocol defined on the Module record Services available for each PRI protocol
315. o a static address 182 Changing the default router DHCP configuration 182 DHCP server on BCM50a and BCM50e 182 Main DHCP Server tabs 183 General Settings tab 183 IP Terminal DHCP Options tab 185 Primary Terminal Proxy Server options 185 Secondary Terminal Proxy Server options 185 VLAN options 185 Address Ranges tab 188 Lease Info tab 189 Call security and remote access overview 191 Defining restriction filters 191 Notes about restriction filters 191 Default filters North America 193 Default filters other 194 Restriction filter examples 194 Remote call in programming 195 Direct Inward System Access DISA creation 196 Remote access line settings 196 Remote access on loop start trunks 197 Remote access on T1 DID and PRI trunks 197 Remote access on DPNSS lines 197 Remote access on a private network 198 Defining remote access packages 198 Defining CoS passwords 198 Notes about CoS passwords 199 External access tones 199 Module management 201 Disabling or enabling a bus or module 201 Disabling or enabling a portchannel setting 202 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 7 Contents Lines configuration 203 DN addition to a line record 204 Adding aDN toaline record 204 Target lines configuration 204 Configuring targetlines 208 PRI lines configuration 210 Configuring PRI lines 212 Configuring call by call services and PRI lines 214 T1E and M lines configuration 215 Configuring T1 E an
316. ocal domain is different from the published IP address of the BCM Business Element Manager verifies that maddr in the Contact header is enabled if the provisioned local domain is an IP and is different from the published IP Supportl00rel Flag indicating if BCM advertises support for Optional False False True 100Rel PRACK in the Supported header If disabled 100Rel is not advertised in the Supported header and BCM does not request PRACK for provisional responses that it generates Allow Update Indicates if BCM advertises support for UPDATE Optional True False True in the Allow Header If disabled support for UPDATE is suppressed and BCM does notissue UPDATE messages Use Null IP To Hold Determines if BCM uses Null IP address Optional True True F alse 0 0 0 0 when putting a call on hold If set to true 0 0 0 0 is used when putting a call on hold Otherwise a valid IP address as per RFC3264 is used Use User P hone Flag indicating the inclusion of user phone Optional False True F alse parameter in the R URI From To and PAI headers 108 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration Parameter Description Requirement Default Range Value Force E164 Flag indicating the use of E 164 numbers Optional False True F alse International Dialing If enabled a plus sign is prepended
317. of the remote system This must be a unique name within the routing table This value appears under Name in the Routing Table Destination Digits lt numeric gt can be the same as the destination code for the route to this system Set the leading digits which callers can dial to route calls through the remote gateway Ensure that there are no other remote gateways currently using this combination of destination digits If multiple leading digits map to the same remote gateway separate them with a space For example 7 81 9555 These numbers are passed to the remote system as part of the dialed number Domain lt alphanumeric gt Enter the remote domain name For SIP endpoints only IP Address lt IP Address gt Enter the IP address of the remote system gateway This field is optional for SIP endpoints and mandatory for H 323 endpoints Port lt numeric gt Enter the optional port number Default 5060 For SIP endpoints only GW Type BCM Choose the type of system that is accessed through the BCM35 remote gateway IPT BCM BCMs running 3 6 or later software and Call Pilot Other Manager with compatible versions of H 323 BCM35 for BCMs running 3 5 software IPT Meridian 1 system running IP software MCDN Protocol lt drop down list gt None SL1 CSE Default None For non Avaya endpoints select None For BCM50 2 0 and IPT 3 0 select SL1 For CS1K BCM50 3 0 and BCM450 select CSE QoS Moni
318. ol A to O If you use line pools you also need to configure target lines and assign the target lines to DNs Refer to Target lines configuration page 204 Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Use Remote Package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part ofa private network ensure you specify a valid package Answer Mode If this line is used from remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer Auto or Manual Use Auxiliary Ringer If your system is equipped with an auxiliary ringer you Can enable this setting to allow the line to ring at an external ringer Full Autohold Allows telephones to puta line on hold if the user picks up another line or starts to dial out on another line Voice message center If the system is using remote voice mail select the center that is configured with the contact number Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Packages Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks 248 NN
319. on gt System gt IP Subsystem gt LAN Interfaces tab In the LAN Interfaces Summary click OAM LAN In the Details for Interface OAM LAN pane select IP Configuration tab Click on Modify to modify the IP Address and Subnet Mask Modify IP Settings dialogue box appears Enter the values of IP address and IP Subnet mask and select OK End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 357 IP subsystem configuration Viewing DHCP lease information The OAM lease information displays DHCP lease of any PC that connects to the OAM port Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt LAN Interfaces tab 2 In the LAN Interfaces Summary click OAM LAN 3 In the Details for Interface OAM LAN pane select DHCP Configuration to view OAM LAN Lease Info End Attribute Value Description IP Address lt read only gt The IP address for the subnet MAC address lt read only gt This is the physical address of the BCM Client Name lt read only gt Displayed if client has name in Reserved Addresses table otherwise blank Lease Start lt read only gt Lease start date Lease Expiration lt read only gt Lease expiration date Procedure job aid Refer to the following figure and table for values and descriptions for the OAM LAN interface 358 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telepho
320. on PAP Select the authentication type for the link CHAP Default CHAP MSCHAP MSCHAP v2 Username lt drop down list gt User name that the link uses to authenticate itself when dialling out to another router Default nnadmin 384 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dial up resources configuration Configuring the modem IP address specifications Use the following procedure to configure the IP address specifications for the modem Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Dial out Interfaces tab 2 Click the Modem interface to configure 3 Click the IP Address Specifications tab The IP Address Specification panel appears 4 Configure the IP Address Parameters End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Local IP Address Specifications Remote Assigned lt check box gt When selected the BCM50 obtains it s IP address from the remote end Default enabled IP Address lt IP Address gt When the Remote Assigned parameter is disabled a static IP address must be configured in this parameter Remote IP Address Specifications Assign IP address to lt check box gt When selected BCM50 will assign the IP Address remote field of this section to the remote end of the connection IP Address lt IP Address gt The local IP address used on the BCM50 for the dial out
321. on Resources Total Resources Reserved Resources Signalling channels Signalling channels VDI channels VDI channels Media channels Media channels DSP resources DSP resources Application Resource Reservations Change Pending Modify Restore Defaults Details for Application IP Sets Current minimum assigned limit Current maximum assigned limit Note Application Resources panel field values Attribute Value Description Total Resources Signalling channels lt read only gt The total number of signalling channels on the system VDI channels lt read only gt The total number of VDI channels on the system Media channels lt read only gt The total number of media channels on the system DSP resources lt read only gt The total number of DSP resources on the system Reserved Resources NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 63 Applications Resources overview Application Resources panel field values Attribute Value Description Signalling channels lt read only gt The number of signalling channels in use on the system This number can change based on the values entered for applications and on the those applications currently in use VDI channels lt read only gt The number of VDI channels in use on the system This number can change based on the values entered
322. on the SIP Proxy tab Route all calls using proxy determines whether the BCM routes Calls using the routing table or the SIP proxy configuration If you selectthis check box the BCM bypasses the routing table and uses the SIP proxy configuration to route Calls The following tables describe the fields of the SIP Proxy panel and the Outbound Proxy Table panel For the corresponding procedure see Configuring a SIP proxy page 309 SIP Proxy field descriptions Attribute Value Description SIP Proxy Domain lt alphanumeric gt This attribute is mandatory This is the SIP domain handled by the proxy If itis also a DNS resolvable hostname of the proxy a DNS lookup is done to route the messages Otherwise an IP address should be provided in either the legacy routing box or in the Outbound Proxy table Route all calls using lt check box gt If you use the default the system first checks the routing proxy Default Unselected table before routing all SIP calls If you select the check box the system uses the SIP Proxy for all SIP calls MCDN Protocol None Use CSE to interoperate with other Avaya devices BCM or CSE Avaya CS 1000 Default None Optional IP Address for legacy routing IP Address Format 0 0 0 0 This attribute is optional lt 7 24 gt The system uses the IP Address and Port to route the message if the Outbound Proxy is not configured The IP Address and Port are used in message headers If su
323. onal field where CLID override is used for outgoing calls All the outgoing calls have the original CLID overwritten the valued entered in this field Display name Override The BCM sends out this character string as the Calling Party Name Display Contact Override BCM sets the user part of Contact URI to this value if configure instead of the default value which is SIP Auth Username This parameter can be useful to control received digits for incoming calls Maddr in Contact Select the check box to enable the use of maddr at the system level Local domain Override This field overrides system wide local SIP domain for outgoing calls associated with the SIP user account Registration Select the check box if SIP registration is required for the SIP user account You must enter the SIP user name field if you select the check box If you select the check box the Registration Details subpanel appears Registrar If you want SIP registration details to be sent to any IP enter the IP address in this field Registrar P ort This field acts as a listening port of the registrar ifthe portis different from the default SIP port Expiry This field provides the registration expiry interval the client requests from the registrar Registrar can reject the expiry if the expiry is too short or honor the expiry request or deliver a possibly shorter interval NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010
324. onfiguration Attribute Value Description Disable maddr in Contact BCM Enable maddr in Contact option If checked then BCM does notinclude maddr in the Contact header If not checked maddr is included in the Contact header only if the local domain is in the form of FQDN Alternatively maddr is added if the provisioned local domain is different from the published IP address of the Business Element Manager verifies that maddr in the Contact header is enabled if the provisioned local domain is an IP and is different from the published IP For public SIP trunks this setting is overridden by the Call signaling port Default 5060 This is the listening port for the BCM Functional Endpoint Proxy Server Attention If you change this value the system restarts Disable OPTIONS cap Default unchecked If checked BCM will not send an OPTIONS request to determine the capability of the remote gateway Disable PRACK lt read only gt If checked BCM disables PRACK by not advertising support for 100Rel in Supported header and will not request PRACK from remote gateways or endpoints See Modify below to change PRACK support Modify 1 Click Modify on the SIP Settings panel to modify the Call Signaling Port or to change PRACK support 2 Change the Call Signaling Port as required and press OK This dialog box warns you that if you change the Call Signaling Port value the system drops all SIP
325. onfiguration Telephony May 2010 Contents Configuring DSCP Marking for Quality of Service 406 Viewing DSCP to Avaya Service Code mapping 407 Viewing Avaya Service Code to P BitMapping 407 Configuring Professional Call Recording 409 Adding the recording rule 409 Modifying the recording rule 410 Deleting the recording rule 411 Configuring LAN packet IP capture 413 Starting a capture 413 Stopping a capture 414 Adding a filter 415 Modifying a filter 416 Deleting a filter 417 Configuring output type 418 Configuring the remote modem 419 Configuring the remote modem 419 Silence suppression reference 421 Silence suppression on full duplex links 423 Comfort noise 425 ISDN reference 427 Welcome to ISDN 427 Analog versus ISDN 427 Types of ISDN service 428 ISDN layers 428 ISDN bearer capability 429 Services and features for ISDN BRI and PRI 429 PRI services and features 429 BRI services and features 430 Service provider features 430 Network name display 431 Name and number blocking North America only 432 Call by Call Service Selection for PRI NI2 North America only 432 Emergency 911 dialing North America only 432 2 way DID 433 Dialing plan and PRI 433 ISDN hardware 434 PRI hardware 434 BRI hardware 434 S Reference Point 434 T Reference Points 435 Clock source forISDN 436 ISDN BRINT1 equipment 437 ISDN standards compatibility 437 Planning your ISDN network 437 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 C
326. onfiguration Telephony May 2010 13 Contents Ordering ISDN PRI 438 Ordering ISDN PRI service outside of Canada and the United States 438 Ordering ISDN BRI 438 Ordering ISDN BRI service inCanada 438 Ordering ISDN BRI service in the United States 438 Ordering ISDN BRI service outside Canada or the United States 439 Supported ISDN protocols 439 Codec rates reference 441 14 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 New in this release The following sections detail what s new in Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony NN40170 502 for Release 6 0 Navigation e Public SIP trunks for VoIP page 15 e Network Name Display elements page 15 Public SIP trunks for VoIP This feature introduces BCM SIP trunking enhancements to provide interoperability with public Internet Telephony Service Providers As part of this enhancement the Business Element Manager panels for VoIP have been reorganized to increase ease of use This feature impacts the following sections e Telephony resources configuration page 77 e IP VoIP trunk configuration page 97 e Configuring IP trunks page 301 e P trunk fallback configuration page 319 Network Name Display elements You can configure the components of the Network Name Display to show both a Business Name and an associated phone number in the LCD of the IP phone You can configure a maximum of five Business Nam
327. onfiguration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The Telephony Resources panel allows you to view and configure the modules that support e digital trunks e analog trunks e IP trunks e lines stations e applications e IP telephone sets The following paths indicate where to configure telephony resources in Business Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Business Element Manager Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources e Telset interface CONFIG gt Hardware you cannot configure VoIP trunks or IP telephones The top frame of the Telephony Resources panel displays a table that summarizes the state of IP trunks IP telephone sets application DNs and all modules assigned to the system through connections to a media bay module Selecting a row provides access to panels in the lower frame that are specific to the type of resource identified in the selected row Conceptual information for the configuration of IP telephone sets and media bay modules is covered here For more information about IP trunks see IP VoIP trunk configuration page 97 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 77 Telephony resources configuration Navigation e Telephony Resources table page 78 e Media bay module panels page 81 e CbC services available by sw
328. onfiguration general Attribute Value Description External Codes None lt one digit number gt The External code setting allows you to assign the external line access code of Avaya 7100 and 7000 Digital Deskphones and analog telephones attached to ATA 2s or to analog modules to access external lines Note Avaya 7000 IP Deskphone are supported in Europe only When the caller picks up the handset the system tone sounds The caller then enters this number to access an external line Note This number is overridden by line pool or starting with the same digit s Change DN Change DN lt button gt Click to reidentify a DN Note This method is faster than reidentifying the DNs under Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan DNs Direct Dial Digit None The Direct dial digit setting allows you to specify a lt one digit number gt single system wide digit to call a direct dial telephone Direct Dial Sets Set lt 1 5 gt This tags the telephone to the system Type Internal This is the type of number for the direct dial set External None Internal DN DN The DN number of the telephone to be designated as the direct dial set Internal sets External number lt external dial string gt The actual phone number including destination codes of the direct dial set External sets Facility Line Pool A O Use prime line Use routing table The facility to be used
329. oop to the system Call Type Voice Defines the type of calls supported on the loop Data Both Actions Add 1 Select the appropriate SPID 1 or 2 2 Under the Details for SP ID table click Add 3 Enter a network DN 4 Click OK 5 On the table click in the Call Type field beside the DN you entered 6 Choose the call type for the DN Delete 1 Select the SPID that you want to delete 2 Click Delete 3 Click YES T loops D packet service The D Packet Service panel is the second tab of the loops panels NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 151 BRI ISDN loop properties overview Attention D Packet service is only available if your service provider provides this Capability This panel enables you to configure D Packet Service to T loops You must have both T loops and S loops configured on the same module to allow this feature The following figure illustrates the D Packet Service panel D packet service T loops Details for Loop 1004 Settings SPIDs D Packet Service Enable D packet service J TEIs Associated loop 1002 wI The following table describes each section on the D Packet Service panel D packet Service panel parameter values Attribute Value Description Associated loop X01 X04 Enable this service only if you are installing devices that require this type of service Enabled D packet lt check box gt North American BR
330. or ISDN BRI and PRI As part of an ISDN digital network your system supports enhanced capabilities and features including e faster call set up and tear down e high quality voice transmission e dial up Internet and local area network LAN access e video transmission e network name display name and number blocking PRI BRI and analog e access to public protocols Refer to the following information e PRI services and features page 429 e BRI services and features page 430 PRI services and features The services and features provided over PRI lines include NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 429 ISDN reference e Call by call service selection NI protocol e Emergency 911 dialing internal extension number transmission e access to Meridian 1 private networking SL 1 protocol BRI services and features The services and features provided over BRI lines include e data transmission at speeds up to 128 kbps per loop depending on the bandwidth supported by your service provider e shared digital lines for voice and data ISDN terminal equipment BCM Basic Rate Interface BRI also support D channel packet service between a network and terminal connection This allows you to add applications such as point of sale terminals POSTA without additional network connections Connecting a POSTA allows transaction terminals devices where you swipe credit or debit cards to
331. or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel for the following variables e Trunk Type e Name e Control Set e Line Type e Prime Set e Distinct Ring Select a line and click on the Properties tab Configure the trunk line data for the following variables e Dial Mode e Signaling Select a line and click on the Preferences tab Set the preferences for the following variables e Auto privacy e Aux Ringer e ANI Number e DNIS Number e Answer Mode e Distinct Rings e Redirect To Select a line and click on the Restrictions tab Set the restrictions and remote package scheduling using the following variables e Line restrictions e Use Remote Package 9 Selecta line and click on the Assigned DNs tab 10 Assign the lines to DNs applicable to manual answer only If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 247 Lines configuration DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines e Appearance type e VMsg set End Variable definitions Variable Name Value Trunk Type DPNSS Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identity a DN if you are using this line for scheduling Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure itis put into line po
332. or your T1 lines or PRI with public interface Contact your service provider for the correct settings You can view the performance statistics for your T1 lines in Maintenance under the CSU stats heading Before you set the internal CSU to off you must ensure there is an external CSU connected to your T1 lines Call by Call Service Selection This following provides information about how to configure the PRI Call by call Service Selection which is region specific to North America fora DTM setto a PRI Module type 86 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony resources configuration By default incoming calls on a PRI are routed based on the Called Party Number information within the call request The last number of digits of the called party number that match the Received Number Length setting are used as Receive Digits to find a target line In North American PRI the Call by Call services allows alternate routing maps to be defined in various ways depending on the protocol defined for this PRI Call by Call Service Selection subpanel Details for Module Expansion 1 Trunk Module Parameters Call by Call Service Selection Provision Lines Service Selection Parameters once Type Translation Mode r Translate All Calls To By SID Call by Call Service Selection panel field values Attribute Value Description Service Type Foreign Exchange Refer t
333. order to steal or disrupt service Reuse IP addresses in different VLANs e As far as possible VLANs maintain compatibility with existing bridges and end stations e Ifall bridge ports are configured to transmit and receive untagged frames bridges will work in plug and play ISO IEC 15802 3 mode End stations are able to communicate throughout the Bridged LAN NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 165 VLAN overview LAN Interfaces Using LAN Interfaces you can configure and modify customer LAN interfaces and OAM LAN interfaces You can also configure the IP setting for LAN and OAM LAN interfaces For OAM LAN interfaces it is possible to define the DHCP settings Choosing DHCP for VLAN By using the BCM DHCP server you can configure DHCP to auto assign a VLAN ID to each IP telephone that registers With this configuration you can also choose to manually enter VLAN IDs if you choose The BCM DHCP server becomes the default VLAN that everyone can reach The server provides the network configuration information in the default VLAN and it also provides the VLAN information for the network Specifying the site specific options for VLAN The BCM DHCP server resides in the default VLAN and is configured to supply the VLAN information to the IP phones The DHCP server supplies site specific options in the DHCP offer message The following definition describes the Avaya IP Deskphones 20
334. ot used Distinct ring None Choose the distinctive ring pattern that you want Pattern 2 to assign to the line This allows you to provide Pattern 3 selective service to calls with differing answer Pattern 4 priorities When more than one line with the distinct ring settings rings ata telephone the line with the highest priority rings first Pattern 4 has the highest ring priority Pattern 3 has second highest ring priority Pattern 2 has third highest ring priority None has the lowest ring priority By default all telephones and lines are set to None Properties The Properties tab shows basic line properties Not all fields apply to all types of lines A sample Properties tab is shown in the following figure 138 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Line configuration overview Properties details panel Details for Line 061 Properties Preferences Restrictions Assigned DNs Trunk mode Supervised i Dialmode Tone v m Link at Loss package Medium CO v Impedance Ohms 600 The following table defines the fields on this panel and indicates the lines Properties lines settings Attribute Value Description Legend Loop analog digital loop GS ground start DID DID E amp M E amp M BRI BRI DPNSS DPNSS VoIP VoIP TL Target Note PRI fields are all included under the main table Trunk mode Loop
335. ote access privileges The details panel appears Select the View by Groups tab Select the Remote Access group Click the Members tab Click Add The Add Account s To Group dialog box appears Select an account Click OK End Configuring a dial up interface Use the following procedure to add a dial up interface Procedure steps Step 1 ON Oo oa fF WO ND Action Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Click Add The Add Interface dialog box appears Select Modem from the drop down menu Enter a logical name for the interface in the interface name field Click OK Select the newly created modem interface Enter the Dial out number to use for the back up In the Access Settings subpanel select the Authentication value that is appropriate for your configuration In the Access Settings subpanel select the account with remote access privileges from the User Name drop down menu End Static routes for dial out configuration Static routes must be configured for Automatic Dial out Interfaces These can be programmed in Business Element Manager Refer to Static routes configuration page 359 WAN failover configuration on BCM50 with a router card The WAN failover service is used in conjunction with the Integrated Router The Integrated Router monitors the status of the primary WAN link When the primary WAN link is detected to have failed the Integrated Router routes the traffic to the WAN NN
336. p the length of the loop can be a maximum of 1 000 m 3 230 ft ONN blocking Suppression bit Set the Outgoing Name and Number ONN Blocking Service code When you activate ONN a user can press FEATURE 819 to block the outgoing name and number on a per call basis Programming note Ensure that all telephones that have this feature available are assigned valid OLI numbers Refer to Programming outgoing number display OLI on page 213 T loop general settings The Settings tab allows you to define loop characteristics All of these settings are not required in all BRI markets The following figure illustrates the Settings tab Settings subpanel T loops Details For Loop 301 Settings Clock source Internal Protocoltype S T user v 5 T user Overlap receiving T Tuser T T user The following table describes the fields on this panel 156 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Loops subpanel T loops parameter values BRI T loops overview Attribute Value Description Clock source Primary External Secondary External Internal Default Internal Primary External uses clock from PSTN Secondary External used if system has more than one Loop Internal uses clock on BCM Protocol Type S T user T T user Default S T user When set to S T user the BRI connection to the public network is treated like a line whic
337. p as two lines assigned You can provision or deprovision these lines individually Provisioned lt check box gt If the check box is selected beside a line that line is available for call traffic IP telephones The following tabbed panels appear when you select an IP terminals entry on the Telephony Resources table e IP Terminal Global Settings page 91 e P telephone set details page 94 IP Terminal Global Settings The parameters on the IP Terminal Global Settings subpanel affect all Avaya 1120 1140 12xx or 20xx IP Deskphones This is also the panel you use to allow these telephones to register to the system and to turn off registration once you have registered all the telephones Fora BCM450 example see the following figure NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 91 Telephony resources configuration IP Terminal Global Settings subpanel Details for Module Internal IP Sets IP Terminal Global Settings IP Terminal Details Enable registration Enable global registration password Global password eeeeeeeeee Auto assign DNs C Play DTMF tone Advertisement Logo Avaya Default codec Default jitter buffer G 729 payload size ms G 723 payload size ms G 711 payload size ms sai Delete Configuration The following table defines the fields on this panel and indicates the lines IP Terminal Global Settings panel fie
338. phones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines e DN e Appearance type e VMsg set End Variable definitions Variable Name Value Line Line number Trunk Type Ground Start Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line for scheduling Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure itis put into line pool A to O If you use line pools you also need to configure target lines and assign the target lines to DNs Refer to Target lines configuration page 204 Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone Otherwise choose None Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Auto Privacy If you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Dial Mode Answer Mode Answer with If this line is used for remote call ins determine DISA how you want the line to answer automatically or requiring more user input If the answer mode is set to Auto decide whether the caller will be immediately connected to the system or whether a stuttered dialtone will require the caller to enter a CoS password Aux Ringer If your system is equipped with an externa
339. phony May 2010 219 Lines configuration 9 Click on the Assigned DNs tab 10 Assign the lines to DNs applicable to manual answer only If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines e DN e Appearance type e VMsg set End Variable definitions Variable Name Value Line Line number Trunk Type E amp M Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identity a DN if you are using this line for scheduling Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure itis putinto line pool A to O If you use line pools you also need to configure target lines and assign the target lines to DNs Refer to Target lines configuration page 204 Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Dial Mode The line service dictates whether this needs to be setto Pulse or Tone DTMF dialing These are the only two options available Signaling Match this choice with the information supplied by the service provider Auto Privacy If you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Aux Rin
340. plan type SIP authentication With SIP authentication Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Authentication the BCM can challenge incoming calls and authenticate itself to remote servers that request authentication to ensure callers are authorized to place calls to the local system SIP calls are not authenticated based on individual calls If SIP authentication is on the system authenticates all SIP calls If SIP authentication is off the system does not authenticate SIP calls The following table describes the SIP Authentication fields For the corresponding procedures see Configuring SIP authentication page 310 and Configuring SIP authentication for a SIP user account page 311 SIP Authentication field descriptions Attribute Value Description Local SIP Authentication Local Authentication lt check box gt Default Unselected If you select the check box the BCM authenticates all incoming calls If not selected the BCM does not authenticate incoming Calls 124 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration SIP Authentication field descriptions Attribute Value Description Quality of Protection Authentication only Authentication and Integrity Default Authentication only Authentication only results in authentication user name password encr
341. port ranges page 349 Adding new RTP over UDP port ranges You can add up to ten port ranges Procedure steps Step Action 1 On the RTP over UDP table click Add The Add RTP Port Range dialog appears In the Begin field type the first port in the range In the End field type the last port in the range Click OK The new RTP port range appears in the table End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Begin lt numeric string gt The first port in the port range End lt numeric string gt The last port in the port range 348 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Port Ranges configuration Modifying RTP over UDP port ranges Complete this procedure to change RTP over UDP port ranges Procedure steps Step Action 1 On the RTP over UDP table select the entry you want to modify 2 Type the new value End Deleting RTP over UDP port ranges Complete this procedure to delete an RTP over UDP port range Procedure steps Step Action 1 On the RTP over UDP table select the range to delete by clicking the appropriate row in either column 2 Click Delete The Confirm warning box appears 3 Click Yes End UDP port ranges management UDP User Datagram Protocol ports are necessary for certain types of network communications UDP port ranges management navigation e Adding new UDP portranges page 349 e Modifying UDP port ran
342. pplied the IP Address is used in the maddr section of message headers The system uses these attributes to interoperate with NRS Port lt numeric gt This attribute is optional Default 0 If the portis 0 the system uses the well known SIP port 5060 Otherwise the system uses the port you enter here Outbound Proxy Table Actions NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 121 IP VoIP trunk configuration SIP Proxy field descriptions Attribute Value Description Add 1 On the Outbound Proxy Table subpanel click Add to add an entry 2 In the Outbound Proxy table type the information as described See Outbound Proxy table field descriptions page 122 3 Click OK to add the entry Delete 1 On the Outbound Proxy Table subpanel click an entry to delete 2 Click Delete to delete the entry 3 Click OK on the confirmation dialog box The following table shows the Outbound Proxy table values Outbound Proxy table field descriptions Attribute Value Description Telephony Settings Domain lt alphanumeric gt The Domain must be unique If the name you enter is a Fully Qualified Domain Name DNS resolves the address and the IP address can remain empty IP Address Format 0 0 0 0 If you specify the IP Address this address is used directly lt 7 24 gt the system does not use the Name attribute and does not
343. provide a name for the account and either populate the account parameters manually or with a template If you use a template the template must be created and uploaded to the BCM before you create the account For details on templates see ITSP templates page 114 For the procedure to configure an account see Configuring an ITSP account page 305 Account parameters Basic tab The following table lists and describes the account parameters on the Basic tab All parameters are read write even if they have been populated using a template Public SIP account parameters Basic tab Parameter Description Requirement Default Range Value Basic tab SIP Domain Remote Remote domain name of the Mandatory service Can be either FQDN oran IP address SIP Domain Local Local domain of the BCM Optional Outbound Proxy Address of the outbound proxy Optional Can be either FQDN or IP address Proxy Address Outbound proxy IP address Optional Proxy Port Portnumber for the outbound proxy Optional Proxy Transport Transport protocol for the outbound UDP proxy Registration Required Flag indicating if registration with the Optional False True False service provider is required If enabled the address of the registrar the SIP username and the SIP password must be provided Registrar Address Address of the registrar Optional Registrar P ort Port number of the registrar Optional SIP username Mandatory
344. provisioned 222 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration T1 Loop start line configuration Part A NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 223 Lines configuration T1 Loop start line configuration Part B Properties tab 224 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration T1 Loop start line configuration Part C NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 225 Lines configuration Configuring T1 E1 loop start lines Use the following procedure to configure s T1 E1 loop start lines Procedure steps Step 1 2 Action Click on Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt All Lines Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel for the following variables e Line e Trunk Type e Name e Control Set e Line Type e Prime Set e Distinct Ring Select a line and click on the Properties tab Configure the trunk line data Properties tab for the following variables e Trunk Mode e Dial Mode Click on the Preferences tab Set the preferences for the following variables e Auto privacy e Full Autohold e Aux Ringer e Distinct Rings In Use e Answer Mode Answer with DISA e Voice message center e Redirect To Click on the Restrictions tab Set t
345. ps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt Dial out Static Routes tab 2 Select the Dial out Static Route you want to change 3 Click Modify The Modify Dial out Static Route dialog box appears 4 Enter the correct value Click OK to apply the change End Deleting a static route Complete this procedure to delete an IP static route Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt Dial out Static Routes tab 2 Select the Static IP Route you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 In the confirmation dialog click Yes End Procedure job aid Refer to the following figure and table for field values and descriptions for the Dial Out Static Routes panel 360 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP subsystem configuration Dial Out Static Routes panel IP Subsystem General Settings OAM Interface Dial Out Static Routes Dial out Static Routes Destination address Destination mask InterFace Name d Dial Cut Stat x Destination address i Destination mask as Interface name iF None Metric Lo o H OK Cancel Dial Out Static Routes field definitions Attribute Value Description Destination Address lt IP Address gt IP address in Ipv4 format Specify the IP address of the destination network or host Default None Destination Mask lt IP Address gt Specify the subne
346. ptional on ETSI trunks Programming note Ensure that users who have access to this feature have telephones with valid OLI numbers Procedure steps Step Action 1 Dial Feature 819 from your phone set Your outgoing name display is blocked If you dial Feature 819 again your outgoing name display is unblocked End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 269 Calling line identification configuration 270 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dialing plan configuration general The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The BCM allows for flexible dialing plans using access codes destination codes PSTN trunks and private network trunks that provide multiple options for customizing the dialing options to meet each customers unique requirements While the BCM can be plugged in and used immediately Avaya recommends that you plan and execute the appropriate dialing plan For more information about planning dialing plans see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 e System settings e Routing configurations e Routing and destination codes e Public network settings e Private network settings e Line pool and line pool codes Carrier codes management A multi digit Carrier ac
347. quest is removed e Rejectit If the user activates Do Not Disturb on Busy DND when the Call Offer request is made the request is removed from the telephone The calling party is informed of the rejection Attention A call cannot be offered to a telephone with DND active The line indicator for external incoming calls still flashes e Acceptit The Offer is accepted by releasing the active call Attention Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy Call Offer cannot be accepted by putting an active call on hold NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 49 System telephony networking overview Route Optimization Route Optimization is a DPNSS 1 feature for Avaya BCM that allows calls to follow the optimum route between two end PBXs This allows efficient use of network resources Route Optimization is initiated by the system and is transparent to the user However the user may see a call switch from an appearance on the telephone to another appearance key or from an intercom button to the appearance key or vice versa This occurs when Avaya BCM receives a Route Optimization request and initiates a new call to follow the optimal route If a telephone is active on a private line call the Route Optimization call being established may go on a public line This will cause a loss of privacy on that line Data calls are rejected by Route Optimization in order to ensure the data transmi
348. r Identified by the keyword src Example for private networks CDP alias src lt DN gt UDP alias src lt LOC gt lt DN gt Example for public network src lt public OLI gt Attention E164 or NPI TON alias types are commonly used because they fit into dialing plans A BCM alias list should not mix these types Also the type of alias used should be consistent with the dialing plan configuration Use the same alias naming method on all BCMs within a network Call signaling port 0 65535 Default 1720 This field allows you to set non standard call signaling port for IP applications that require special ports 0 The first available port is used Ensure that you do not select a port that is assigned elsewhere in the BCM RAS port 0 65535 Default 0 Use this field to assign a non standard Registration and Admission RAS port for IP applications that require special ports 0 The first available port is used Ensure that you do not select a port that is assigned elsewhere in the BCM To ensure the portis notin use run netstat a from the command line NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 131 IP VoIP trunk configuration H323 Settings field descriptions Attribute Value Description Registration TTL s Default 60 seconds This TimeToLive parameter specifies the intervals when the IP gateway sends KeepAlive signals to t
349. r 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI T loops overview Loop settings Attribute Value Description Loop DN lt system DN gt Control DN for the loop This DN must be on the Assigned DNs list Assigned DNs table DN lt system DN gt ISDN assigned to the loop up to eight devices Actions Add 1 In the top frame click the loop where you want to add DN records 2 In the bottom frame click Add 3 Enter the DN record number 4 Click OK 5 Repeat for all the DN records you want to assign Delete 1 In the top frame click the loop where you want to delete DN record assignments 2 In the bottom frame click the DN record you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 Click OK NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 161 BRI T loops overview 162 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Router overview The information in this chapter applies to the Avaya BCM50 only This chapter introduces the router available with the BCM50 and explains the two different types of routers This chapter introduces the key features you must configure on your router The router is a fully functional and powerful device thatconnects your LAN to an external data network In addition to configuring and connecting your LAN and WAN it provides a wide range of data services including Network Address Trans
350. r Class of Service You hear system dial tone again after five seconds e Dialed a number in the system which does not exist Your call disconnects after five seconds IP trunk lines do not produce tones when accessed from a remote location 200 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Module management The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 When you need to find out information about a module you can determine the status of any of the settings under the media bay module headings To correct a problem or change a module setting you may need to enable or disable a bus module or select ports on the module Configure the module using Dynamic Device Configuration DDC Formore information see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 To view the current status of the module trunks you can use the Telephony Metrics Trunk Modules Metrics panel For more information about telephony metrics see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Administration and Security NN40170 603 Navigation e Disabling or enabling a bus or module page 201 e Disabling or enabling a port channel setting page 202 Disabling or enabling a bus or module The following procedure describes the process for enabling or disabling a bus This mea
351. r ISDN network For ISDN BRI service your service provider supplies service profile identifiers SP IDs network directory numbers Network DNs terminal endpoint identifiers TEIs and other information as required to program your BCM TE and other ISDN equipment BCM does notsupport any package with EKTS or CACH EKTS is a package of features provided by the service provider and may include features such as Call Forwarding Link Three Way Calling and Calling Party Identification NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 437 ISDN reference Ordering ISDN PRI The following describes how to order ISDN PRI service for your BCM Ordering ISDN PRI service in Canada Ordering ISDN PRI service in Canada United States from your service provider Set the BCM equipment to the PRI protocol indicated by your service provider Ordering ISDN PRI service outside of Canada and the United States Outside Canada and the United States order Euro ISDN PRI and or BRI service from your service provider Set the BCM equipment to the Euro ISDN protocol Ordering ISDN BRI The following describes how to order ISDN PRI service for your BCM Ordering ISDN PRI service in Canada Ordering ISDN PRI service in Canada United States from your service provider Set the BCM equipment to the PRI protocol indicated by your service provider Ordering ISDN BRI service in Canada TIn Canada order Microlink service the
352. r a specific application Aux ringer Loop GS DID E amp M BRI DPNSS_ VoIP TL lt check box gt Turn the auxiliary ringer on or off for all telephones using this line When programmed on a line the auxiliary ringer will ring every time a call is received Note When programmed only on a telephone no ring occurs for a transferred call An auxiliary ringer can also be programmed in Services to ring for a line placed into a scheduled Ringing service ANI Number DID E amp M lt check box gt Define whether the telephone number of the caller will be shown for this line ForT1 E amp M and T1 DID trunks connected to a DTM this setting only appears if Signaling is set to WinkS tart The central office must deliver ANI DNIS in DTMF mode No additional equipment is required DNIS Number E amp M lt check box gt Defines whether the digits dialed by an external caller on this line will be shown For T1 E amp M trunks connected to a DTM this setting only appears if Signaling is set to WinkStart and Answer mode is set to Manual Distinct Rings in use lt read only gt Indicates if a special ring has been assigned See Distinct Ring on the main table 142 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Line configuration overview Preferences variable definitions Answer mode Loop GS E amp M BRI DPNSS Manual Define whether a trunk is m
353. rabs the first available line from the assigned line pool In this configuration you must ensure that the outgoing number is allowed by the line pool e If you assign the prime line to an intercom button when you press the intercom button you get system dial tone Then you enter a line pool access code ora destination code to directthe outgoing call to the appropriate line pool where it exits the system on any available line in that pool NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 59 Telephony programming 60 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Applications Resources overview The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 Application Resources is a management tool for allocating system resources such as signalling channels VDI channels media channels and DSP resources While the BCM manages resources for different services by making resources available as they are needed you can manage the resources by setting minimums and maximums for each service Applications Resources panel The Application Resources panel consists of three tables and a panel e Total Resources e Reserved Resources e Application Resource Reservations e Details for application Total Resources The total resources options show the maximum resources availabl
354. ransferred using F70 e xFeature Calls transferred using XFeatures which are features in the range of F900 to F999 e SWCA Call appearance e Park Call Park e Camp Call camp e Transfer using hold to a set e Transfer from a from a set using hold 9 Select the checkbox corresponding to the Call tracking only field if you want to send only the call details to be sent to the recording destination 10 Select the checkbox corresponding to the Enable and disable rule through F 998 field When this option is selected the owner of the DN is able to enable and disable the call recording through the set base feature code F998 11 Select the checkbox corresponding to the Rule enabled field to enable the particular rule If you deselect the checkbox the rule will be disabled 172 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 12 13 Professional call recording Select the checkbox corresponding to the Monitor auto answer lines if you want the system to monitor the calls being auto answered When this feature is enabled the DN specified for the rule is ignored Click OK to add the rule To cancel the rule being created click Cancel End Feature dependencies and restrictions This feature is dependent on the following This feature uses the Business Element Manager for configuration To administer this feature through the Business Element Manager you must be a member of the Ad
355. rapidly locate a BCM set given its DID number Keep this list up to date and readily available Ensure that you do not apply a 911 route to an IP telephone that is off the premises where the PSAP is connected to the system With PRI the same lines can be used for receiving direct inward dialing DID and for making direct outward dialing DOD calls The dialing plan configured by your customer service representative determines how calls are routed Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this feature is compatible with your service provider Dialing plan and PRI The Dialing Plan supports PRI connectivity to public and private networks The dialing plan is a collection of features responsible for processing and routing incoming and outgoing calls All PRI calls must go through a dialing plan Notes about the dialing plan e allows incoming calls to be routed to sets based on service type and digits received e provides the ability to map user dialed digits to a service type on a Call by Call basis e allows long distance carrier selection through user dialed Carrier Access Codes Consult your customer service representative to determine how your dialing plan is configured NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 433 ISDN reference ISDN hardware To support connections to an ISDN network and ISDN terminal equipment your BCM must be equipped with a BRI S
356. re to configure BRI T loops Prerequisites Review the following process flowchart to familiarize yourself with the actions required to configure BRI T loops BRI loops configuration process The following figure shows the process for configuring BRI loops NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 251 BRI T loops configuration Assign DNs to 8 loops 252 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI T loops configuration Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration Telephony Loops 2 Identify the loop as a T loop refer to Loop type and general parameters page 148 e Protocol ETSI and ETSI QSIG loops only e ONN block state e Send name display ETSI QSIG only 3 Enter the details for the loop refer to T loop SPIDS and network DNs page 150 e North American systems only SPID B channel Network DN Call Type e ETSI and ETSI QSIG T loops UK profile Clock source 4 If applicable configure D packet service for the loop refer to T loops D packet service page 151 Provision the loop and the loop lines Program the BRI lines For information about assigning lines line pools and target lines to telephones see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 7 If the lines are set to auto answer put the lines into line pools A to O and configure target lines 8 Assign the lin
357. remote system If you use MCDN to interwork with other BCMs ora CS1K choose CSE e QoS Monitor Enable this feature if you are using fallback to PSTN lines and the network supports QoS monitoring 314 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring IP trunks e Tx Threshold Indicate the level of transmission at which the signal must be maintained If the signal falls below this level the call falls back to PSTN 5 Click OK End Configuring H 323 settings Complete the following procedure to configure H 323 settings Prerequisites e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under H 323 settings page 128 Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking gt Settings 2 Choose the settings that you need for your system e Fallback to circuit switched Define how you want the system to handle calls that the system fails to send over the VoIP trunk Enabled TDM enables fallback for calls originating on digital telephones This is useful if your IP telephones are connected remotely on the public side of the BCM network because PSTN fallback is unlikely to result in better quality of service in that scenario e Call Signaling Determine how the calls are delivered over the network Direct The system passes Call signaling information directly between endpoints You must set up remote gateways Gatekeeper
358. rent SIP trunk user account of the ITSP ifa match is found If more than one user is accessing the same ITSP account you can configure user specific parameters for the ITSP account The following table lists and describes the user account parameters For more information about configuring user accounts for ITSP see Configuring an ITSP account page 305 and Configuring SIP authentication fora SIP user account page 311 SIP user account parameters Parameter Description Requirement Default Range Value Description A description of the user account Optional Domain Remote domain name of the service Mandatory Read only Can be either FQDN oran IP address 112 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration Parameter Description Requirement Default Range Value Account Identity If selected indicates that the user accountis a Mandatory unchecked Parent parent account Child accounts are mapped to individual sets Account Identity CLID If the accountis a parent account this field is empty Optional empty If itis a child account you can enter CLID information to be displayed for this account in this field User Credentials SIP Provided to the administrator from the service Optional username Username provider The SIP username is alphanumeric User Credentials Auth The au
359. rking overview 54 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony programming Navigation The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 This section gives a broad overview of telephony programming e Dialing plan configuration overview page 55 e Configuration for incoming calls page 55 e Configuration for incoming call controls page 59 e Configuration for out going call traffic page 59 Dialing plan configuration overview Dialing plans allow users to access the public network to make calls and to answer dial strings Access to and from and within your system is based on dialing strings and how the system adds or deletes digits from this sequence to route the call A dialing string is the numbers that the caller physically enters on a telephone or programs onto a memory key This can also include numbers the system adds to a dial string when a call goes through call routing This process also includes how the receiving system reads the sequence All of which means that coordination is required at both ends of the call to ensure that calls are routed correctly This is especially important if calls need to be routed through your system or through a remote system to reach another node on the network Basic numbering The first numbering of your set is your DN length
360. rks for PRI trunks Busy Tone Tips The duration of an open switch interval OSI before BCM50 disconnects a call is programmed by the Disconnect timer setting Voice Message Loop GS DID E amp M BRI DPNSS VoIP TL Center Center 1 Center 5 If this line connects to a remote voice mail either through the private network or at the Central Office indicate which Center number has been configured with the contact number The system calls that number to check voice mail messages when a message indicator is presented to a telephone NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 143 Line configuration overview Preferences variable definitions Redirect to Loop GS DID E amp M TL lt dial string gt Enter a dial string including destination code to redirect the line to an external telephone such as a Call attendant on another system If you want to stop redirection you need to delete the dial string and allow the record to update Warning If the dialstring is set up the line will immediately be redirected out of the system not ringing any telephone Warning Enable modules If you disabled any trunk media bay modules prior to performing programming enable them now to ensure your system will function properly Restrictions Line and Remote Assigning Line r
361. rofiles use Loop guarded Loop unguarded Dial Mode The line service determines if this is Pulse or Tone DTMF dialing These are the only two options available Auto Privacy If you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Full Autohold Allows telephones to puta line on hold if the user picks up another line or starts to dial out on another line NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 227 Lines configuration Variable Name Value Aux Ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer enable this setting to allow the line to ring at the external ringer Distinct Rings in Use Indicates if a special ring is assigned Answer Mode Answer with DISA If this line is used for remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer Auto or Manual If the answer mode is set to Auto decide whether the caller is immediately connected to the system or whether a stuttered dial tone requires the caller to enter a CoS password Voice message center If the system is using remote voice mail select the center that is configured with the contact number Redirect To If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a head office answer attendant enter the remote number here Ensure that you include the proper routing information Use Remote
362. rovisioning module lines and loops 90 IP telephones 91 IP Terminal Global Settings 91 IP telephone setdetails 94 IP VoIP trunk configuration 97 Introduction to IP trunk configuration 97 Local gateway 98 Remote gateway 98 Options common to all IP trunks 99 Call Routing Summary 99 Call Routing Summary table 99 H323 Routing Mode 99 Private SIP Routing Mode 100 IP trunk settings 100 SIP trunks options common to public and private SIP trunks 101 Global settings 102 DTMF handling using RFC2833 103 SIP media parameters 104 SIP trunks public trunk configuration 106 ITSP accounts 106 Account parameters Basic tab 107 Account parameters Advanced tab 107 ITSP Association Method 110 User account parameters 112 ITSP templates 114 ITSP Templates Basic tab 115 ITSP Templates Advanced tab 115 ITSP Templates Comments tab 115 Local NAT compensation 116 SIP public route configuration 118 SIP trunks private trunk configuration 118 SIP private trunk routing table 118 SIP private trunk settings 120 SIP proxy 120 SIP URI map 123 SIP authentication 124 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 5 Contents H 323 trunks 127 H 323 routing table 127 H 323 settings 128 H 323 media parameters 132 Line configuration overview Trunk Line data main panel 135 Properties 138 Preferences lines 141 Restrictions Line and Remote 144 Assigned DNs 145 BRI ISDN loop properties overview
363. rsation while one speaker is talking the other speaker is listening a half duplex conversation The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirements for one call on a half duplex link with silence suppression enabled Because the sender and receiver alternate the use of the shared channel the peak bandwidth requirement is equal to the full transmission rate Only one media path is present on the channel at one time One call on a half duplex link with silence suppression n Conversation Hello Fred this is Susan Do you have a minute Fred Here SESS Corversation Bandwidth used oe Tx Rx Chan Bandwidth Voice frames sent even when speaker is silent 422 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Silence suppression reference The effect of silence suppression on half duplex links is therefore to reduce the peak and average bandwidth requirements by approximately 50 of the full transmission rate Because the sender and receiver are sharing the same bandwidth this effect can be aggregated for a number of calls The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirements for two calls on a half duplex link with silence suppression enabled The peak bandwidth for all calls is equal to the sum of the peak bandwidth for each individual call In this case that is twice the full transmission rate for the two calls Two calls on a half duplex link with silence suppression 7 Conv
364. rtant announcement when the recipient is on another call NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 47 System telephony networking overview El is similar in functionality to Avaya BCM Priority Call butitis a receive only feature on Avaya BCM telephones El cannot be initiated from a Avaya BCM telephone The person using this feature must be on another PBX system on the DPNSS 1 network When El is used to intrude on a call in progress a three way connection is established between the originating party and the two parties on the call The result is very much like a conference call When one of the three parties clears the line the other two remain connected and E is terminated For restrictions by telephone type e ATA2 ASM8 supported e ISDN not supported The telephone receiving the intrusion displays Intrusion Call A warning indication tone will sound after intrusion has taken place and the standard conference call tone will sound every 20 seconds For intrusion levels whether a telephone accepts or rejects an Executive Intrusion request depends on the level of intrusion protection programmed Each telephone DN has an Intrusion Capability Level ICL and four Intrusion Protection Levels IPL When the ICL of the intruding telephone is higher than the IPLs of both telephones on the active call El occurs Avaya recommends that you set the IP Ls of most Avaya BCM telephones to t
365. rties overview Loop type and general parameters Loops table The Loops table displays the BRI loops for an installed module and the settings that are common to both T loops and S loops The following figure illustrates the Loops table Type Protocol Sampling ONN Blocking Suppression bit Suppression bit The following table describes the fields found on the Loop main panel Loops panel parameter values Attribute Value Description Loop lt X01 X04 gt Each BRI module supports four loops eight lines for T loop programming Type T This setting defines whether the loop supports trunks T loop or device S connections S loop This variable may be different for different market profiles Protocol Euro Select the appropriate ISDN protocol QSIG The values displayed depend on both the market profile and software NI 2 keycodes Euro ETSI ISDN standard QSIG also an ETSI standard Only appears if the ETSI QSIG keycode is loaded NI 2 Sampling S Adaptive Selecta sampling rate for the S loop loops only Fixed Fixed two or more S interface devices use the loop and the length of N A the loop is less than 200 m 650 ft Adaptive two or more S interface devices use the loop and the length of the loop is greater than 200 m 650 ft If one device is using the loop the length of the loop can be a maximum of 1000 m 3230 ft ONN Suppression Setthe Outgoing Name and Number ONN Blocking blocking
366. runking service provider e Auth Username Enter the authentication user name used in authentication challenges SIP trunking service provider provides this parameter Authentication name can be different from SIP user name e Auth Password Enter the password used for registration and outgoing calls e CLID Override This is an optional field where CLID override is used for outgoing calls All the outgoing calls have the original CLID overwritten the valued entered in this field e Display name Override The BCM sends out this character string as the Calling Party Name Display e Contact Override BCM sets the user part of Contact URI to this value if configure instead of the default value which is SIP Auth Username This parameter can be useful to control received digits for incoming calls e Maddr in Contact Select the check box to include maddr in contact for this account When selected this overrides the System Wide settings for Maddr in SIP settings tab e Local domain Override This field overrides the system wide local SIP domain for outgoing calls associated with the SIP user account e Registration Select the check box if SIP registration is required for the SIP user account You must enter the SIP user name field if you select the check box If you select the check box the Registration Details subpanel appears e Registrar If you want SIP registration details to be sent to any IP enter the IP address in this field
367. s 3 Leave the External Number field blank unless the destination digit you are using for the remote gateway is different than the number you want to use for the destination code NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 321 IP trunk fallback configuration 4 In the DN Type box choose Private End Destination code for a fallback route configuration Use this procedure to create unique destination codes for fallback routes Creating unique destination codes for fallback routes Create a destination code that includes the IP and PSTN routes that you created in Line pools to routes assignment page 321 to respond to the same access number destination code Prerequisites e Create or ensure that your destination code 9 includes a Normal and IP schedule that includes the route you created to the local PSTN e Ifyou already have a line pool access code defined as 9 you must delete this record before you create the destination code Procedure steps Step Action 1 In the Business Element Manager click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Select the Destination Codes tab Click Add The Add Destination Code dialog box appears Enter one of more digits for this code Click OK to close the dialog box End Procedure job aid If itis available you can use the same Destination code number that you used for the destination code of the gateway If you hav
368. s New in this release 15 Public SIP trunks for VoIP 15 Network Name Display elements 15 Introduction 17 Purpose 17 AboutAvaya BCM 17 Audience 17 Prerequisites 18 System telephony networking overview 19 Basic system configurations 19 Two basic system telephony configurations 19 DID system 21 Basic telephony routing 23 Tandem calling toa remote PSTN 23 Callers using Avaya BCM 25 Callers in the public network 25 Callers in the private network node 26 Private network parameters 26 Private networking protocols 26 Keycode requirements 27 Remote access to the network 27 Lines used for networking 27 Types of private networks 28 Routing based networks using T1 E amp M lines 29 PRI networking using Call by Call services 31 PRI SL 1 Q Sig DPNSS and VoIP trunk networking 32 System dialing plans 33 Creating tandem private networks 33 Routing for tandem networks 34 Understanding Avaya Voice Networking MCDN network features 35 Network Call Redirection Information 36 ISDN Call Connection Limitation 37 Trunk Route Optimization 38 Networking with ETSI QSIG international systems only 40 ETSI Euro network services 42 DPNSS lservices 43 DPNSS 1 capabilities 43 DPNSS 1 features 44 Private networking with DPNSS international only 50 Telephony programming 55 Dialing plan configuration overview 55 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 3 Contents Configuration for incoming calls 55 Configura
369. s call into Avaya BCM and select an outgoing TIE line to access a private network call into Avaya BCM and select an outgoing central office line to access the public network e call into Avaya BCM and use remote features NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 25 System telephony networking overview Callers in the private network node These callers use the private lines to call directly to one or more Avaya BCM DNs call into Avaya BCM and select an outgoing TIE line to access other nodes ina private network call into Avaya BCM and select an outgoing central office line to access the public network call into Avaya BCM and use remote features System numbering and dialing plans All systems on a private network must coordinate dialing plans to ensure that calls get directed to the correct network node As well routing becomes more complex especially if the system is not an end node and must be configured to relay calls to nodes not directly connected to the system The type of dialing plan supported by the network determines whether each node also requires unique DNs Private network parameters The following sections provide an overview of the system values that affect private networking Private networking protocols page 26 Keycode requirements page 27 Remote access to the network page 27 Lines used for networking page 27 Types of private networks page 28 Pri
370. s However you can assign Answer DNs and some capabilities features Complete this procedure to determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached to BRI module S loops ISDN devices have a DN range that is unique to ISDN devices Prerequisites Review the following process flowchart to familiarize yourself with the actions required to configure ISDN telephone DN records BRI loops configuration process The following figure provides an overview of the ISDN DN record configuration process 258 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices programming Prerequisites Before you start this procedure e You must install and configure the BRI module e You must configure the BRI loops as S loops e You must configure the BRI loop lines Procedure steps Step Action 1 On each panel on the DNs list add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations End Procedure job aid ISDN device specific DN record settings Affected field Setting Name Unique to each device or device loop Call Forward Not supported Line appearances Ring only NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 259 BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices programming ISDN device specific DN record settings Affected field Setting Answer DNs Ring only Intercom keys tw
371. s gt SIP Trunking gt Public gt ITSP Templates The list includes imported templates as well as a BCM generated template for each manually configured account You importa template or template archive using the Import button on the ITSP Templates panel For the corresponding procedure see Importing an ITSP template page 305 Rules governing the import of templates If you import a template archive zip all existing templates are overwritten including those created by BCM from manually configured accounts Importing a new or modified template or a template archive does not change the parameter values of existing accounts or routes 114 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration You apply a template when you create an ITSP account the account parameters are populated with the template values automatically If the Registration R equired flag is set in the template you are prompted for the user name and password of the account when you apply the template You can view the parameter values of a template by selecting the name of the template from the list in the top part of the ITSP Templates panel The lower part of the panel updates to show the parameter values under two tabs Basic and Advanced The values are read only You can import and modify existing templates and restore template parameters to their default values You can combine several templat
372. s case the change in route uses the start and stop times for Night schedule Create 91 as a Destination code Set Absorbed length to 1 Under Night schedule enter the route you defined in step 1 Calls that begin with the digits 91 travel out without using the access code when the Night schedule becomes active or when you turn it on at a control telephone Configuring multiple routing overflow feature If all the lines used by a route specified by a destination code are busy when a call is made you can program other routes that the system automatically flows the calls to or you can allow the call to overflow directly to the Normal route schedule usually the most expensive route However this only takes effect if an active schedule is applied to the line Overflow routing is not available in Normal mode NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 277 Dialing plan routing configuration You must create overflow routes for each destination code for which you want to allow overflow routing Procedure steps Step Action 1 Assign the preferred routes in a destination code schedule e Pick a schedule when you want these routes to be in effect e In the First Route field enter the route number for the preferred route for the call e Choose the absorb length for the first route that is appropriate for the dialout numbers you entered for the route e Repeat the first two steps for Second Route and
373. s for 3 The receptionist transfers the call to a specific telephone DN 4 The person can pick up the call at that DN only Outgoing calls 1 User selects the intercom button or dials a line pool access code which selects a line in the line pool 2 The user dials the outgoing telephone number DID system This setup allows you to assign a dedicated phone number to each telephone The CO assigns a list of available numbers for each DID Direct Inward Dial line You can change your DN range to match these numbers and you use target lines to match each number with a DN The following figure shows a DID system for the BCM450 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 21 System telephony networking overview DID system for BCM 450 Target line mapped to DN 4005 Target line mapped to DN 4008 The following figure shows a DID system for BCM50 DID system for BCM 50 Target line mapped to DN 4005 CO DID line i e 769 with range of call numbers 4005 to 4020 Target line mapped to DN 4006 Target line mapped to DN 4007 Target line mapped to DN 4008 22 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview Incoming calls 1 DID trunks are assigned to be auto answer Attention PRI lines are automatically set to auto answer 2 All DNs are assigned target lines 3 A
374. saction terminals Transaction terminals are used to swipe credit or debit cards and transmit the information to a financial institution in data packets 430 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 ISDN reference e Calling number identification appears on both BCM sets and ISDN terminal equipment with the capability to show the information e Multi Line hunt or DN hunting which switches a call to another ISDN line if the line usually used by the Network DN is busy BRI only e Subaddressing of terminal equipment TE on the same BRI loop However terminal equipment which supports sub addressing is not commonly available in North America BRI only Transmission of B channel packet data using nailed up trunks is not supported by BCM Contact your ISDN service provider for more information about these services and features For more information about ordering ISDN service in North America see Ordering ISDN PRI on page 563 and Ordering ISDN BRI on page 564 The terminal equipment TE connected to the BCM system can use some feature codes supported by the ISDN service provider Network name display This feature allows ISDN to deliver the Name information of the users to those who are involved in a call that is on a public or private network Your BCM system displays the name of an incoming call when the name is available from the service provider If the Calling Party N
375. satellite system for voice mail Use this procedure to configure a satellite system for voice mail Prerequisites e Private network has been setup with MCDN between the satellite and host system e The correct routing to the host system is set up and working e You have supplied a list of DNs that require mailboxes to the host system administrator Procedure steps Step Action 1 To access the Centralized Voice Messaging panel select Configuration gt Applications gt Voice Messaging Contact Center 2 Click the voice center number that you want to assign to the remote voice mail system 3 In the External Number field enter the voice mail DN assigned by the host system Ensure that you include any appropriate routing codes to the string 4 DPNSS process Type the new target number starting with an access code if required or None F or example 65142222 5 Enter the Message Waiting Indication String that is expected from the particular message center 6 Program the Message Waiting Cancellation String that is expected from the message center Attention The line must be programmed to Appear and or Ring at the telephone 7 If the telephone does not already have a target line assigned e To access the Target Lines panel select Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Target Lines e Inthe Target Lines table locate the target line to be assigned e In the Details for Line subpanel click the Assigned DNs tab e Click
376. schedule is assigned In the current example the route you define is used when someone dials 9 during Normal mode when the other Schedules are turned off 3 Set up the Normal schedule with the route number you defined in step 1 End Procedure job aid An office can have leased lines or private network trunks that provide cheaper long distance calls by routing through the dedicated lines to remote systems then using the local PSTN from that system to make the call The routing should take place automatically when the number of the outgoing call begins with 1 The following figures show sample configurations Routing Service programming example Routing Service Services Routing Service Route Dial out if required Use Pool 000 999 max 24 digits or characters 001 none AYBCDEFGHIJKLMNO 002 none Alc DEFGHIJKLMNO Destination codes for call routing Destination codes Services Routing service Destination codes Service Normal Rte Route schedule Schedule max 7 char DestCode Use route Absorb 1stroute Absorb 2nd route Absorb 3rd route Absorb max 7 digits 000 999 Length 000 999 Length 000 999 Length 000 999 Length Configuring a route through dedicated trunk If your long distance is supplied by an alternate service or if you want to use different trunks at different times of the day you can configure a route to use a
377. scriber e Private corresponds to the SIP URI map of Private CDP Private UDP or Private Subscriber depending on the Private network type choice on the Private Network screen NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 123 IP VoIP trunk configuration The following table describes the SIP URI Map fields SIP URI Map field descriptions Attribute Value Description SIP Domain Names e 164 National national e164 String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type e 164 Subscriber subscriber e164 String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type e 164 Unknown unknown e164 String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type e 164 Special special e164 String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Private UDP UDP String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Private CDP CDP String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Private Special special private String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Private Unknown unknown private String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Private Subscriber subscriber private String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Unknown Unknown unknown String to use in phone context to identify numbering
378. sed of set on user part of contact header in SIP registration requests Since R Uri in incoming SIP trunk calls is used to determine received digits to match them to target lines this parameter can be useful to control received digits for incoming calls SIP Registration Registration Flag indicating if registration with the service Optional False True provider is required False If registration is enabled parameters for registration for example registrar registrar port transport protocol registration expiry are automatically populated if the account was created using a template The values for these parameters are derived from the template from which the account was created ITSP templates Templates are sets of account parameters that can be recorded using an optional off line ITSP template tool and then imported to the BCM A template facilitates the configuration of multiple BCMs for operation with the same ITSP It also provides an off line easily updated record of the account parameters The ITSP template tool is an Excel workbook Instructions for using the template are provided in the workbook Attention The ITSP template tool uses macros To allow the macros to run the Excel Macro Security level needs to be at Medium This can be verified in Excel at Tools gt Options gt Security gt Macro Security A list of the available templates is provided at Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunk
379. ser may access depends on the CoS password assigned to them See Defining CoS passwords page 198 Attention Callers remotely access the BCM remote features setting by pressing and the appropriate page code 196 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Call security and remote access overview Remote access on loop start trunks Loop start trunks provide remote access to BCM from the public network They must be configured to be auto answer to provide remote system access A loop start trunk must have disconnect supervision if itis to operate in the auto answer mode T1 E amp M trunks always operate in disconnect supervised mode When a caller dials into the system on a line that has auto answer without DISA the system answers with system dial tone and no CoS password is required In this case the remote access package assigned to the line controls system capabilities When a caller dials in on a line that has auto answer with DISA the system answers with stuttered dial tone This is the prompt to enter a CoS password that determines which system capabilities are available to the caller Remote access on T1 DID and PRI trunks Remote system access on T1 DID trunks is similar to that of T1 E amp M trunks connected to a private network The main differences are e A remote caller is on the public network dialing standard local or long distance telephone numbers e Answer with DISA can
380. set Administration to configure various Avaya BCM parameters In brief the information in this guide explains e global telephony settings e steps to configure DNs e product features and how to assign them About Avaya BCM The Avaya BCM system provides private network and telephony management capability to small and medium sized businesses The Avaya BCM system enables you to create and provide telephony applications for use in a business environment Audience This guide is directed to installers who install configure and maintain Avaya BCM systems To use this guide you must e be an authorized Avaya BCM installer or administrator within your organization e know basic Avaya BCM terminology e be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 17 Introduction Prerequisites Before you complete the following procedures review the following prerequisites e Ensure all applicable keycodes are purchased and applied e Ensure all required MBMs are installed e Ensure market profile is selected Initial device configuration Understanding and configuring your dialing plan Select the MBM to use for trunking Configure the start line Configure Target lines Enter the public and private received digits Fesign target lines to DN Understanding CLID for and configuring incoming calls yo
381. ssion is not affected Certain situations result in Route Optimization not taking place For example calls that are using Hold Parking or Camp features do not undergo Route Optimization and if a Route Optimization call undergoes Diversion the Route Optimization is dropped When setting Route Optimization System programming is not required when Avaya BCM is working as a terminating PBX system However Avaya BCM must have a private access code programmed that maps to a valid destination code or line pool code on DPNSS lines Further Allow Redirect must be selected Loop avoidance Errors in the configuration of a network may make it possible for a call to be misrouted and arrive ata PBX system through which it has already passed This would continue causing a loop which would eventually use up all of the available channels The Loop Avoidance service permits counting of DPNSS 1 transit PBXs and rejecting a call when the count exceeds a predetermined limit Private networking with DPNSS international only DPNSS supports the Universal Dialing Plan UDP an international standard for sending and receiving private numbers over networks The UDP requires that a dialing number include the following e aPrivate Access Code programmed into the system as part of the destination code table to prevent conflicts with the internal numbering system Access Codes e aHome Location Code HLC assigned to each PBX system and configured as part of
382. standing of IP features such as codecs jitter buffers Quality of Service QoS function and silence compression The services provided within networks is based on the type of trunks and the protocols assigned to the trunks All trunks within the network should be running the same protocols to provide a technically sound and stable network The following links are procedures to setup basic networks to advanced networks using the support protocols within Avaya BCM e Routing based networks using T1 E amp M lines page 29 e PRI networking using Call by Call services page 31 e PRI SL 1 Q Sig DPNSS and VoIP trunk networking page 32 28 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview Routing based networks using T1 E amp M lines By properly planning and programming routing tables and destination codes an installer can create a dialing plan where T1 E amp M lines between BCM systems are available to other systems in the network The following figure shows a network of three Avaya BCM450 systems Two remote systems connect to a central system Dialing plan for T1 E amp M routing network of BCM450s New York Toronto Network 22214 Network 62214 Received 22214 Received 62211 Internal 22218 Internal 62215 f Network 4221 Santa Clara A 4 U jas Received 4221 JZ amp Internal 42218 The following figure
383. t Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets 2 Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab 3 Select the analog set port of the fax machine The details panel appears 4 Click ATA Settings Assign the ATA Device to Modem End Procedure job aid Enabling fax Details for DN 234 Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences ATA Settings ATA answer timer 7 w ATA tones oO ATAuse Onsite Y Msg indicate None v ATA device Modem v Telephone Di ect supervision GASM onl isconn pervi ly Modem Enabling SIP G711 fax Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources 2 In the Telephony Resources panel select the row for IP Trunks The details panel appears Click SIP Media Parameters In the Settings subpanel click the Fax Transport list Select G711 End 328 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 SIP fax over G 711 configuration Enable G 711 fax ails For Module Internal noe Se m Routing Table IP Trunk Settings H323 Settings H323 Media Parameters SIP Settings Sip Proxy SIP Media Parameters SIP URI Map Preferred Codecs Settings Codec Preferences Enable Voice Activity Detection Available list Selected list Jitter buffer Auto v G 729 A 6 723 G 729 payload size ms 20 w 711 uLaw ars rales xi G 723 payload size ms G 71
384. t The system uses the corresponding SIP trunk user account of the ITSP if it finds a match There can be no two SIP trunk user accounts associated with ITSP accounts with the same username To header Called The system finds a match based on the userpart of the To header of the Number Username incoming request The system uses the corresponding SIP trunk user match account of the ITSP if a match is found There can be no two SIP trunk user accounts associated with ITSP accounts with the same username R URI Called Number The system finds a match based on the userpart of the R URI of the CLID match incoming request and makes a match if the ITSP account contains the SIP trunk user count with the matching CLID userpart of R URI in the incoming request The system uses the corresponding SIP trunk user account of the ITSP if a match is found There can be no two SIP trunk user accounts associated with ITSP accounts with the same CLID To header Called The system finds a match based on the userpart of the To header of the Number CLID match incoming request and makes a match if the ITSP account contains the SIP trunk user count with the matching CLID userpart of the To header in the incoming request The system uses the corresponding SIP trunk user account of the ITSP if a match is found There can be no two SIP trunk user accounts associated with ITSP accounts with the same CLID R URI Called Number The system finds a match based
385. t mask of the destination Default 255 255 255 0 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 361 IP subsystem configuration Dial Out Static Routes field definitions Attribute Value Description Interface Name lt drop down list gt Choose the dial out interface to be used by the IP traffic Attention This is a drop down list with only interfaces that have Automatic dialout selected Metric Value lt 1 32766 gt Specify the metric value associated with the interface 1 means lowest cost and 32767 is the highest cost Default 1 362 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 DHCP server configuration on BCM main module The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The DHCP Server Settings contains fields to configure the BCM core as a DHCP server The DHCP Server Settings panel is a multi layered multi tabbed panel The panel tabs links provide a general description of each panel and definitions of each panel field By default the DHCP server on the BCM50 must configure a range of IP addresses to supply the IP sets It defaults to use the top 20 percent of a subnet For example if an external DHCP server supplies the following IP address to the BCM50 177 218 21 45 255 255 255 0 then the
386. t must be programmed to be activated Others are available for end user programming at the telephone Details about these features are given in the following sections Three party service Three Party Service is a DPNSS 1 feature for Avaya BCM that is similar to the Avaya BCM Conference feature The Three Party Service allows a user usually an operator to establish a three party conference by calling two other parties from one telephone Once the connection is made the controlling party can hang up leaving the other two connected The controlling party can even put one party on hold and talk to the other party Attention Avaya BCM does not support Hold over the DPNSS link itself This means that the conferenced party on the distant end of the network cannot place a Three P arty Service call on Hold This feature is designed to allow operators to assist in the connection of calls from one main location Conference calls To initiate or disconnect from a conference call on a Avaya BCM system over DPNSS 1 use the procedure described in the Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 45 System telephony networking overview Attention Three Party Service is supported on model Avaya 7000 telephones but in a receive only fashion These telephone types cannot initiate Three P arty Service For more information a
387. tabs may vary depending on the line selected in the top table e The Properties tabbed panel provides the settings for individual line characteristics e The Restrictions tabbed panel allows you to define which restrictions will be active for individual lines Note that lines that are assigned to the same line pool will automatically assign the same restrictions e The Assigned DNs tabbed panel provides a quick way to assign lines to telephones You must use the DN records panels to assign line pools to telephones Navigation e Trunk Line data main panel page 135 e Properties page 138 e Preferences lines page 141 e Restrictions Line and Remote page 144 e Assigned DNs page 145 Trunk Line data main panel The top level Table View panel shows line records for all lines active on the system and the common assigned parameters You can copy paste and renumber lines For more information about renumbering see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 The following figure shows the Trunk Line Data lines panel NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 135 Line configuration overview Trunk line data lines panel All Lines Trunk Type Control Set Line Type Pub Received Distinct Ring VoIP Line O01 Line002 Line003 Line004 Line005 Line006 Line007 Line008 Line009 Line010 The following table d
388. te configuration page 118 e SIP private trunk routing table page 118 e H 323 routing table page 127 When the remote end point is a Avaya Communications Server 1000 CS 1000 the Avaya CS 1000 must accept the BCM as an H323 and SIP entity and as an H323 and SIP endpoint 98 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration If the network has an H 323 gatekeeper or a SIP proxy server you do not need to configure individual routes to remote gateways Gatekeeper configuration options are described under H 323 settings page 128 SIP proxy server configuration options are described under SIP proxy page 120 Options common to all IP trunks The General panel Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt General provides access to a summary of the active VoIP routes and configuration options that are common to both SIP and H323 The Call R outing Summary table also identifies which VoIP protocol will be use to route the call There are two tabs Call Routing Summary and IP trunk settings Call Routing Summary The Call Routing Summary tab is selected by default The table shows all the current active VoIP routes and which of the VoIP protocols H 322 Private SIP or Public SIP routing are used for a given route If route is associated with a public SIP trunk the corresponding account name is also displayed All data under this tab is read only Call Routing Summar
389. tem provided Avaya specific values are applied to the system To access the Marking values for modification you must deselect the Avaya Automatic QoS check box You can use the Avaya Automatic QoS setting only if there are other Avaya devices that support the Avaya Automatic QoS or Avaya_on_Avaya Settings for network QoS provisioning simplification on your network 3 In the VoIP Signaling area from the QoS value for VOIP signaling list selecta DSCP type Select CUSTOM to enable editing of the TOS byte for VOIP Signaling value This field applies to NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 371 Configuring flexible DiffServ Code Point e SIP e H 323 e Unistim BCM50 and IP Sets The TOS byte for VOIP Signaling field populates with the default value for the DSCP type you selected for example CS5 corresponds to a ToS value of 160 If you select CUSTOM from the QoS value for VOIP signaling list you can manually modify the TOS byte value 4 In the Voice Media area from the QoS value for voice media list select a voice media type This field applies to RTP RTCP Traffic from IP sets and BCM for example voice and tones 5 In the Voice Media area from the QoS value for voice media list select a voice media type This field applies to T 38 traffic originated through SIP or H 323 End 372 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May
390. tems DNs Set restriction 03 Lines Line restrictions 04 Lines Remote restrictions 334 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Meet Me Conferencing configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 Meet Me Conferencing allows callers to establish a teleconference by calling in to a specified number at an agreed upon time One caller acts as the chairperson and has additional powers to start stop secure and control the conference Any caller can participate buta BCM user must have chairperson privileges to chair a conference A number of factors influence the maximum conference size The maximum conference size depends on the maximum number of ports purchased by keycode For example if the COS specifies a maximum conference size of eight but only four ports were purchased by keycode then the maximum conference size is four Other simultaneous Meet Me and Ad Hoc conferences can also affect the maximum conference size For example your BCM450 system has 48 ports and a chairperson s maximum conference size is 30 If another Meet Me conference of 20 is in session and an Ad Hoc conference of 18 is in session then only 10 conference ports remain The maximum conference size is actually 10 Meet Me Conferencing prerequisites e You must purchase and install
391. ter the Maximum transits field End Configuring trunk route optimization Trunk route optimization TRO finds the most direct route through the network to send a call between nodes This function occurs during the initial alerting phase of a call Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network 2 Locate the MCDN subpanel 3 Select the TRO check box Note Trunks are not optimized if the call has been affected by a modification such as call transfer or conference SRG50 supports only trunk route optimization before answer TRO BA End Configuring trunk anti tromboning Trunk anti tromboning TAT is a call reroute feature that works to find better routes during a transfer of an active call This feature acts to prevent unnecessary tandeming and tromboning of trunks Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network 2 Locate the MCDN subpanel 3 Select the TAT check box End ETSI European network services configuration If your system has ETSI Euro BRI PRI lines you can activate the malicious call identification MCID and Network Diversion features Advice of Charge End of Call AOCE is active if your service provider has activated that service on the line When the features are activated users can e display a call charge e redirect calls over the ETSI Euro BRI PRI line to the outside network e t
392. teways is 80 If the Maximum value for Media Gateways is set to MAX then the system allows up to 80 Media Gateways at once as long as sufficient resources are available Changes pending In some cases a change you make to the application resources panel may not be able to take effect immediately For example if you change the number of conference calls allowed from three to two while there are three calls in progress the resource allocations will not change until after one of the calls has been disconnected In a situation where the changes cannot be made immediately a checkmark appear in the Changes Pending box and you can view details of these changes by clicking on the application and viewing the details below 66 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Applications Resources overview IP set resources Because there is no circumstance where the number of IP sets on the system would exceed the available resources there is generally no need to modify the resources for this application However if you want to limit the number of IP set connections you can change the maximum value IP trunk resources Because there is no circumstance where the number of IP trunks on the system would exceed the available resources there is generally no need to modify the resources for this application However if you want to limit the number of IP trunk connections you can change the maximum value M
393. th the public IP address of the NAT router leave the Address Discovery Flag unchecked To have the BCM actas a STUN client and dynamically discover the public IP address of the NAT device check the Address Discovery Flag 4 If you left the Address Discovery Flag unchecked enter the IP address of the NAT router in the Provisioned Public Address field If you left the Address Discovery Flag checked the Discovery Setting dialog box updates to provide fields fora STUN server Enter the STUN server IP address port and optionally configure the local port of the BCM in the Stun Server Address Stun Server Port Stun Local Address and Stun Local Port fields respectively Click OK In the Provisioned Public Port field enter the public port of the NAT router Navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Public gt Accounts 8 Select the required account from the table The account parameters appear below the table 9 Click Advanced 10 Verify that the Enable NAT Compensation EnableNAT flag is set If not set it End Configuring a public SIP route Use this procedure to configure a route to an ITSP This procedure applies to public SIP trunks only Prerequisites e Create an account Configuring an ITSP account page 305 e Familiarize yourself with the information provided under SIP public route configuration page 118 and ITSP accounts page 106 Procedure steps Step Action 1 Navi
394. that has a properly configured and assigned target line All outgoing calls made through PRI are initiated using the destination codes e DTMs configured for T1 E1 can have digital lines configured as Groundstart E amp M Loop or DID Target lines are virtual communication paths between trunks and telephones on the BCM system They are incoming lines only and cannot be selected for outgoing calls or networking applications With target lines you can concentrate incoming calls on fewer trunks This type of concentration is an advantage of DID lines Avaya BCM target lines allow you to direct each DID number to one or more telephones VoIP trunks also require target lines to direct incoming traffic In BCM450 there is a maximum of 639 target lines In BCM 50 there is a maximum of 208 target lines Telephones can be configured to have an appearance of analog lines or multiple appearances of target lines Attention PRI B channels cannotbe assigned as line appearances PRI B channels or trunks can only be configured into PRI line pools for inbound routing through target lines with receive digits or outbound routing through destination codes Types of private networks There are several ways you can create private networks Configuration can be based on such things as cost of trunks proximity of network nodes size of the private network and business requirements for communications VolP based networking also requires an under
395. the BCM core IP Settings Obtain IP address lt check box gt If selected the BCM obtains IP address information from a dynamically DHCP sever If selected the IP address and subnet mask are read only If notselected enter the IP address and subnet mask of the BCM IP address lt read only gt The IP address of the BCM main unit IP subnet mask lt read only gt The subnet mask used by the BCM Default gateway lt read only gt The gateway used by the BCM Attention The gateway must be in the same domain and reachable from this IP address Modify button Click to change IP settings NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 355 IP subsystem configuration General Settings field definitions Attribute Value Description DNS Settings DNS domain name lt alphanumeric gt A name for the local domain You must enter information in this field only if the Obtain IP address dynamically check box is not selected Primary DNS lt P address gt The IP address of the server that will provide DNS address information to the system This information is generally provided by the ISP This field needs to be completed only if the Obtain IP address dynamically check box is not selected Provided by your ISP or IS department In small office settings a DNS may not be necessary Secondary DNS lt IP address gt Used if the primary DNS is unavailable T
396. the chairperson s PIN Reset the PIN if the chairperson forgets it Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access 2 Click the DN to change 3 Click the Meet Me Conferencing tab in the bottom panel 4 Click PIN reset 5 Click Yes to confirm The system resets the PIN to 0000 The chairperson must change it before accessing a conference End Removing conference privileges from a chairperson Complete this procedure to remove the conference bridge from the DN Procedure steps 344 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access 2 Click the DN to change Meet Me Conferencing configuration Click the Meet Me Conferencing tab in the bottom panel Click Remove Meet Me Conference Bridge Click Yes to confirm The system removes the Conference Bridge from the DN and updates the Meet Me Conferencing panel End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 345 Meet Me Conferencing configuration 346 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Port Ranges configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The Port Ran
397. the private network or at the central office Line characteristics Line type determines what features are available Some features must be coordinated with the settings at the other end of the line Line restrictions Restrictions prevent certain kinds of calls from occurring over specific lines You can also restrict some features If you want different restrictions to apply at different times of the day or week you can set up the line restriction schedules to that effect The Normal schedule runs when no other schedule is specified or if fallback is used for VoIP trunks Remote restrictions Your system can accommodate users who call in from outside the system to access system features Calls coming in over the Private network that are routing out of the system to remote systems or to the PSTN are also considered to be remote call ins To restrict the access remote callers have or to control outbound private network calls specify the appropriate filter for the line If you want different restrictions to apply at different times of the day or week you can set up the line restriction schedules to that effect The Normal schedule runs when no other schedule is specified or if fallback is used for VoIP trunks Voice message center If you subscribe to a voice message Service outside your office you can indicate to the line with which voice message service to connect Voice message centers are defined as part of the system telephony global
398. the received number is invalid or the target line is busy and if the If busy parameter is set To prime Each line can be assigned only one prime telephone Specify the digits the system will use to identify a call from the public network to this target line A received number cannot be the same as or be the start digits of a line pool access code a destination code the DISA DN or the Auto DN If you are configuring auto answer BRI trunks to map to target lines the received number should be the same as the Network DN supplied by your service provider The call will be directed to the prime telephone for the incoming line if the Network DN is not used NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 137 Line configuration overview Trunk Line Data main panel Attribute Value Description Priv lt digits associated with a Specify the digits the system will use to identify Received specific target line gt a Call from the private network to this target line Target lines only A received number cannotbe the same as or be the start digits of a line pool access code a destination code the DISA DN or the Auto DN If you are configuring auto answer BRI trunks to map to target lines the received number should be the same as the Network DN supplied by your service provider The call will be directed to the prime telephone for the incoming line if the Network DN is n
399. the set number you want to configure and enter the appropriate values Press Tab on your keyboard to save the values Go to the DN records of the telephones where you want the direct dial set assigned Configuration Telephony Sets All DNs and assign the set under Preferences tab For more information see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 500 End Attribute Value Description Global Settings DN length intercom 3 to 7 This is the length of the locally dialed telephones This field is set when the system is first configured Warning If this system is part of a private network ensure that this value is compatible with the network requirements Note If the DN length is changed it will cause VM CC to be defaulted in order to work properly Dialing timeout Default 4 seconds This is the maximum period allowed between user dialpad presses before the system decides that the dial string is complete Access codes Park prefix None The Park prefix is the first digit of the call park lt one digit number gt retrieval code that a user enters to retrieve a parked call If the Park prefix is set to None calls cannot be parked SWCA note If this field is set to None the system wide call appearance SWCA feature will not work 272 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dialing plan c
400. their behavior in the same way you would PRI lines In BCM450 the system initiates with 8 VoIP lines For more information about provisioning additional lines using Dynamic Device Configuration DDC see Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Devices NN40170 304 The line records appear under Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active VoIP Lines To access VoIP lines you need to enter software keycodes Each keycode supports a specific number of lines No entries appear in the Enabled VoIP lines field until you complete the IP Trunks Settings field which appears when you click IP Trunks under Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP trunks 70 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines overview VoIP trunks should be configured to use a single line pool per trunk type Do not mix other trunk types on the same line pool The VoIP line pools are assigned to routes which in turn are configured with destination codes that route calls to the designated remote gateways of other BCM systems or Succession or MCS5100 systems You can also create a fallback for the trunk This is a situation where the system reroutes the call to a PSTN line pool if the primary route is not available or the call quality is not Suitable If you do not configure your network for fallback and the call quality is below threshold the IP call fails Target lines Tar
401. thentication username used in authentication Optional auth usern Username challenges This parameter is provided by the SIP ame service provider The authentication username can be different than the SIP username User Credentials Auth The authentication password Optional empty Password Message Handling Overrides the Caller ID parameter for the account Optional CallerID for CLID Override If not configured the Caller ID of the accountis used account Message Handling Overrides the Display Name in From Header Optional Display Display Name Override parameter for the account Name in If not configured the Display Name in From Header From of the account is used Header for account Message Handling PAI Overrides the Caller ID in P Asserted Identity Optional Caller ID in CLID Override parameter for the account P Asserted If not configured the PAI CLID of the account is Identity for used account Message Handling PAI Overrides the Display Name in PAI parameter for the Optional Display Display Name Override account Name in If not configured the PAI Display name of the PAI for account is used account NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 113 IP VoIP trunk configuration Parameter Description Requirement Default Range Value Message Handling Used in cases where the SIP trunking service Optional Public OLI Contact Override provider constructs R URI for outgoing calls ba
402. tion Navigation Media bay modules VoIP trunks are installed and configured Create an access code route map to understand how the numbering works for the system Review the following process flowchart to familiarize yourself with the actions required to configure dialing plan for routing Configuring a route to allow local calls page 275 Configuring a route through dedicated trunk page 276 Configuring a route for a secondary carrier page 277 Configuring multiple routing overflow feature page 277 Programming the PRI routing table page 279 Configuring a long distance carrier access code into a destination code page 279 Configuring a route to allow local calls An office can have different suppliers for local and long distance telephone service By programming a destination code any call that begins with 9 which is the most common dial out digit automatically uses lines dedicated to local service NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 275 Dialing plan routing configuration Procedure steps Step Action 1 Create a route that uses the line pool you assigned for the PSTN trunks 2 Create a destination code record and enter a destination code such as 9 which is a common local call code See Dialing plan configuration overview page 55 This is for local calls only there are no dial out numbers The destination code can use a different route depending on what
403. tion for incoming call controls 59 Configuration for out going call traffic 59 Applications Resources overview 61 Applications Resources panel 61 Total Resources 61 Reserved Resources 61 Application Resource Reservations 61 Details for application 61 Types of resources 65 Total and Reserved Resources 65 Setting values for application resources 66 Changes pending 66 IP setresources 67 IP trunk resources 67 Media gateway resources 67 Voice mail and Contact Center resources 67 Fax 67 Conf Parties 67 Conf Mixers 67 SIP Trunks 68 Digital Trunks 68 Lines overview 69 Line configuration prerequisites overview 69 System level line identification 70 Line types 70 Active physical lines 70 Active VoIP lines requires keycode 70 Targetlines 71 CO trunks as physicallines 72 BRI loops 72 BRI loops configuration 72 Line records 72 Line characteristics 73 Line restrictions 73 Remote restrictions 73 Voice message center 73 Line job aids 73 Line pool configuration 73 Loss packages 74 Privacy on off by call 75 Line access 75 Line availability and assignment 75 Incoming calls 76 4 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Contents Outgoing calls 76 Telephony resources configuration 77 Telephony Resources table 78 Telephony Resources table 78 Media bay module panels 81 Trunk Module Parameters 81 Call by Call Service Selection 86 Port details 88 P
404. tion provides information about how to connect and disconnect a modem interface Modem interface connection or disconnection navigation e Connecting a modem interface page 383 e Disconnecting a modem interface page 383 382 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Dial up resources configuration Connecting a modem interface Use the following procedure to connect a modem interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the interface to connect 3 Select the Enable check box 4 In the IP Address Specification tab specify the remote IP address to which to connect 5 In the top panel click Connect End Disconnecting a modem interface Use the following procedure to disconnect a modem interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the interface to disconnect 3 Click Disconnect A confirmation dialog box appears 4 Click Yes End Modem dial out link parameters configuration This section provides information about configuring dial out parameters for modem links Modem dial out link parameters configuration navigation e Configuring modem link parameters page 383 e Configuring the modem IP address specifications page 385 Configuring modem link parameters Use the follo
405. to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Use Remote Package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part ofa private network ensure you specify a valid package Answer Mode If this line is used from remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer Auto or Manual Use Auxiliary Ringer If your system is equipped with an auxiliary ringer you can enable this setting to allow the line to ring at an external ringer Full Autohold Allows telephones to puta line on hold if the user picks up another line or starts to dial out on another line Voice message center If the system is using remote voice mail select the center that is configured with the contact number NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 243 Lines configuration Variable Name Value Redirect To If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a head office answer attendant enter that remote number here Ensure that you include the proper routing information Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Use Remote Package Enter a valid remote access package for the
406. to configure IP lines For more information see Avaya Business Communications Manager Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 Ifa gatekeeper exists on the network you need not configure remote gateway settings For more information about audio stream ports see Avaya Business Communications Manager Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 If you plan to use H 323 trunking and you have a firewall ensure that the ports you intend to use are allowed H 323 uses ports 1718 1719 and 1720 The following table describes the fields on the H323 Settings tab For the corresponding procedure see Configuring H 323 settings page 315 H323 Settings field descriptions Attribute Value Description Telephony Settings Fallback to Enabled All Your choice determines how the system will handle calls if circuit switched Enabled TDM the IP network cannot be used Disabled e Enabled All All calls are rerouted over specified PSTN trunks lines e Enabled TDM All TDM digital telephones voice calls will be rerouted over specified PSTN trunks lines e Disabled Calls will not be rerouted Attention Enabled TDM enables fallback for calls that originate on digital or analog telephones This is useful if your IP telephones are connected remotely on the public side of the BCM network because PSTN fallback is unlikely to result in better quality of service in that scenario Gatekeeper digits 0 9 If dialed digits match
407. to remote callers Attention Filter 00 cannot be changed Filter 01 has a set of defaults Filters 02 to 99 can be set to suit your special requirements See Default filters North America page 193 e Each programmable filter can have up to 48 restrictions There is no limit on the number of overrides that can be allocated to a restriction However there is a maximum total of 400 restrictions and overrides allocated to the 100 programmable filters e The maximum length of a restriction is 15 digits e The maximum length of an override is 16 digits e Entering the letter A in a dialing sequence indicates a wild card and represents any digit from 0 to 9 e You can use and in a sequence of numbers in either a restriction or an override These characters are often used as part of feature codes for other systems or for features provided by the central office the public network e When restricting the dialing of a central office feature code do not forget to create separate restrictions for the codes used for DTMF and pulse lines for example 67 and 1167 e Do notstring together a central office feature code and a dialing sequence that you want to restrict Create a separate restriction for each e You can copy restrictions and overrides from one filter to another You can use a restriction or override in any number of filters Each time you use a restriction or override it counts as one entry For example if restriction 411
408. to the Request line and to the To and From headers Enable SDP Options Determines if BCM can use an OPTIONS query Optional False False True Query to determine service provider capabilities If enabled an OPTIONS method is sent to determine capabilities when a dialog is established Allow REFER Enables support for the REFER method being Mandatory checked checked advertised in the Allow header unchecked Support Replaces Enables support for the Replaces header being Mandatory checked checked advertised in the Supported header unchecked Keepalives Signaling Mechanism used for SIP keep alive This is used Optional OPTIONS OPTIONS method to refresh NAT firewall pin holes for SIP or CR LF signaling This is sent regardless of whether or nota dialog is in progress Keepalives Signaling Interval between SIP keep alives Optional 30 sec 30 300 interval sec Session timer Session The SIP request method used to refresh the Optional UPDATE Disabled refresh method state of the session UPDATE re INVITE Active call limit Determines the maximum number of in use Mandatory 0 trunks on a per ITSP account basis When the unlimited trunk limit for a given account is reached inbound SIP calls associated with that account will be rejected until a trunk is freed Similarly outbound SIP calls associated with that account will fallback until a trunk is freed ITSP association Determines how the system handles the Mandatory None
409. to the Reserved Address table Procedure steps Step 1 2 Action Click Configuration gt Data Services gt DHCP Server gt Address Ranges tab Click Add beneath the Reserved Address table The Add Reserved Address dialog box appears In the IP Address field specify the IP Address that is reserved for this DHCP client In the MAC address field specify the MAC address for the DHCP client to which this IP address is assigned In the Client name field specify the name of the DHCP client This field is optional In the Client description field specify a description that helps identify the DHCP client to which this IP address is assigned Click OK The reserved address is added to the table End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Reserved Address Ranges IP Address lt P Address gt Specify the IP Address that is reserved for this DHCP client Mac Address lt P Address gt Specify the MAC address for the DHCP client to which this IP address is assigned The permitted values is 6 bytes in hexadecimal format Client Name lt alphanumeric gt Specify the name of the DHCP client Client Description lt alphanumeric gt Specify the description that helps to identify the DHCP client to which this IP address is assigned Deleting a reserved address Complete this procedure to delete a reserved address Procedure steps Step 1 2 3 Action
410. tor lt check box gt Default Unselected Select this check box if you intend to use a fallback PSTN line for this gateway Ensure that the remote system enables QoS Monitor Tx Threshold lt 0 5 gt Indicate the level of transmission at which the signal must be maintained If the signal falls below this level the call falls back to PSTN Default 0 00 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 delete a route you select the route and click the Delete button The parameters of the Add Remote Gateway panel are described below For the corresponding procedure see Configuring a private SIP route page 308 119 IP VoIP trunk configuration SIP private trunk settings The SIP Private Settings subpanel Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt SIP Trunking gt Private gt Settings provides the options to disable maddr PRACK REFER replaces and OPTIONS caps You can also select the session refresh method and set the RF C2833 dynamic payload The following table describes the fields of the Private SIP Settings panel and the Outbound Proxy Table panel For the corresponding procedure see Configuring private SIP settings page 310 and Configuring a SIP proxy page 309 SIP settings field descriptions Attribute Value Description SIP Proxy Disable PRACK Check box Select the check box to disable the support of PRACK
411. ture code must be entered within 25 seconds of the caller hanging up A 25 second busy tone occurs If the called party hangs up first there is no opportunity to use the feature The call identification comes from your service provider not the BCM You must have the Service activated by the CO before the feature is active for the user regardless of the setting in this field NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 289 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features configuration 290 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Silent Record a Call configuration The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 For information on configuring other voice mail features refer to Avaya Business Communication Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40160 200 To access the Silent Record a Call Network Storage Locations panel select Configuration gt Applications gt Voice Messaging Contact Center General The administrator can configure up to 10 network SFTP servers to store WAV files recorded from the Record a Call feature The administrator can then configure the COS feature setting Record Call SFTP Dest with a number that corresponds to one of the SFTP locations in the table Silent Record a Call Network Storage Locations pan
412. tworking using BCM50 Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 amp PRI BRI ETSI PRI BRI ETSI QSIG PBX BCM West End Branc PRI public protogol Central Office The following table lists the settings for some of the hardware parameters for ETSI QSIG networking example shown above Hardware programming for branch offices West end office East end office Hardware DTM BRIM PRI BRI Hardware DTM BRIM PRI BRI programming Protocol ETSI QSIG programming Protocol ETSI QSIG BchanSeq Ascend PRI BchanSeq Ascend PRI only only ClockS rc Primary ClockS rc Primary ETSI Euro network services If your system has ETSI ISDN BRI PRI lines you can activate the malicious call identification MCID and Network Diversion features Advice of charge end call AOCE is active if your service provider has activated that service on the line When the features are activated users can e display a call charge 42 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview redirect calls over the ETSI ISDN BRI PRI line to the outside network e tag malicious calls Advice of Charge End of Call AOQCE AOCE is a supplementary service available from your service provider on ETSI ISDN BRI PRI links This feature allows the Avaya BCM user to view the charges for an outgoing call after the
413. ublic network is treated like a trunk which allows tandems to other switches without first answering the call PBX model Overlap receiving lt check box gt Supports target lines in markets which use Overlap receiving signaling on the BRI trunks Overlap receiving must be configured for each BRI loop NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 BRI ISDN loop properties overview Loops subpanel T loops parameter values Attribute Value Description Overlap length lt 0 15 gt Set the local number length for loops to interfaces that receive overlap rather than enbloc digits This number is the total length of the called party number received This number is used to calculate the number of leading digits that need to be removed by the system Attention This parameter appears only when Overlap receiving is enabled Example Public received number 4502303 Target line received numbers 303 Local number length 7 Public received number length 3 Thus the first four digits are deleted by the system Send Name Display lt check box gt If the switch allows outgoing name display select the ETSI QSIG only check box T loop SPIDS and network DNs These settings are only available for systems running a North American profile SPID numbers are supplied by the ISDN service provider Also refer to ISDN reference page 427 The followin
414. ult None For non Avaya endpoints select None For BCM50 2 0 and IPT 3 0 select SL1 For CS1K BCM50 3 0 and BCM450 select CSE QoS Monitor lt check box gt Default Unselected Select this check box if you intend to use a fallback PSTN line for this gateway Ensure that the remote system enables QoS Monitor Tx Threshold lt 0 5 gt Indicate the level of transmission at which the signal must be maintained If the signal falls below this level the call falls back to PSTN Default 0 00 H 323 settings The H 323 settings Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking gt Settings include the configuration options for a gatekeeper and fallback Consider the following if you are configuring a gatekeeper e If the network has a gatekeeper the BCM can request a method for call signaling This requestis granted depending on the configuration of the gatekeeper Ultimately the gatekeeper decides which call signaling method to use For more 128 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration information about IP interoperability gatekeeper configuration see Avaya Business Communications Manager Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 If your network uses a gatekeeper specific settings are available to configure on your system to recognize the gatekeeper Additional settings are available within the gatekeeper application
415. ur dialing plan configuration Select the MBM to use for trunking Configure the start line Configuring Outbound Calls Configuring Inbound Calls Configuring applications move applications to the end Destination codes 18 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 The system supports both public and private networking for telephony traffic e The public network is created by PSTN trunk connections from a Central Office terminating on a telephone system such as the Avaya BCM 6 0 e A private network is created when the system is connected through dedicated PSTN lines or VoIP trunks to other systems This system can take several forms At the simplest level your system may be behind a private PBX which connects directly to the Central Office A more complicated system may be a node in a network of systems of various types where calls not only terminate at the system but calls can need to be passed through the system to other nodes unconnected to the originating node Refer to the following information e Basic system configurations page 19 e Private network parameters page 26 Basic system configurations In the most basic application your system can prov
416. ur network provides a number of network call features You can use this protocol to network other Avaya BCM systems such as the tandem system shown in Creating tandem private networks page 33 Norstar systems Meridian 1 systems Succession systems DMS 100 systems or CSE systems The following sections describe the MCDN features that are provided by all SL 1 VoIP networks where MCDN is active The features affect call redirection and trunking functions NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 35 System telephony networking overview Centralized messaging e Network Call Redirection Information page 36 Centralize trunking e ISDN Call Connection Limitation page 37 e Trunk Route Optimization page 38 Network Call Redirection Information Network Call Redirection Information NCRI builds on the following Avaya BCM features e External Call Forward e Call Transfer Call Forward NCRI adds the ability to redirect a call across an MCDN network using Call Forward All Calls No Answer Busy and Call Transfer features The call destination also receives the necessary redirection information This feature allows the system to automatically redirect calls from within a Avaya BCM system to the mail system such as Meridian Mail which resides outside the Avaya BCM system on the Meridian 1 The following figure shows an example where user A calls user B on the same BCM450 If us
417. ure ISDN dial in access Procedure steps Step Action 1 Select Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the ISDN Dial In Parameters tab select Enable ISDN dial in 3 Configure the parameters for ISDN dial in access Refer to the following table for information about each parameter End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Enable ISDN lt check box gt Enable or disable ISDN dial in gars Default disabled Connection State This is a table that shows the current dial in state if connected Note There is a maximum of two entries in this table as there are two ISDN channels This table will display the ISDN channels that are available for ISDN dial in If any channels are being used for ISDN dial out either Automatic or manual then this channel will not be available for ISDN dial in and will not appear in this table User lt read only gt Displays the user that is currently dialed in NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 389 Dial up resources configuration Attribute Value Description Local IP Address lt read only gt Displays the local IP address assigned to the dial in connection Remote IP lt read only gt Displays the remote IP address of the dial in connection Address Callback lt read only gt Displays if callback is enabled for this dial in connection Status lt read only gt The st
418. ure lines in your system to have automatic privacy With a line not programmed with privacy anyone with the line assigned to their telephone can join your call by pressing the line button With a line programmed with privacy one person ata time can use the line Use FEATURE 83 to turn the Privacy feature off and on Privacy control cannot be used for internal or conference calls When another telephone joins a call the participants on the call hear a tone and a message appears on the telephone display It is not possible to join a call without everyone hearing this tone Line access Attention The Auto privacy setting does not apply to target lines PRI lines or VoIP trunking lines There are a number of ways you can configure your lines You can assign each line to one telephone or several telephones or a specific line to a specific telephone You can also pool your lines so that a number of telephones have access to several lines Line availability and assignment Use the following list to learn about making lines available You can determine whether a line will be assigned solely to one telephone or if a group of users will have access to the line Even when you use line pools itis possible that a line pool will be unavailable for outgoing traffic To alleviate this you can determine overflow paths for any routes that you designate Incoming lines can be assigned to telephones as individual lines or through target lines dep
419. usiness Communications Manager 6 0 Planning and Engineering NN40170 200 Process overview The following figure shows the process for configuring BRI loops Loops table Type Protocol Sampling ONN Blocking Suppression bit Details For Loop 301 The following table describes the fields found on the Loop main panel Loops panel parameter values Attribute Value Description Loop lt X01 X04 gt Each BRI module supports four loops eight lines for T loop programming Type T This setting defines whether the loop supports trunks S T loop or device connections S loop This variable can be different for different market profiles Protocol Euro Select the appropriate ISDN protocol QSIG The values displayed depend on both the market NI 2 profile and software keycodes Euro ETSI ISDN standard QSIG also an ETSI standard Only appears if the ETSI QSIG keycode is loaded NI 2 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 155 BRI T loops overview Loops panel parameter values Attribute Value Description Sampling S loops only Adaptive Select a sampling rate for the S loop Fixed Fixed two or more S interface devices use the loop N A and the length of the loop is less than 200 m 650 ft Adaptive two or more S interface devices use the loop and the length of the loop is greater than 200 m 650 ft If one device is using the loo
420. using an external NT1 S Reference Point The S reference point connection provides either a point to point or point to multipoint digital connection between BCM and ISDN terminal equipment TE that uses an S interface S loops support up to eight ISDN DNs which identify TE to the BCM system Fora BCM450 system see the figure S reference point BCM50 system page 454 Fora BCM50 system see the figure S reference point BCM50 system page 454 434 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 S reference point BCM450 system S reference point BCM50 system T Reference Points ISDN reference ISDN TE with terminating resistors point to point ISDN TE ISDN TE with terminating resistors ISDN TE ISDN TE with terminating resistors ISDN TE ISDN TE with terminating resistors ISDN TE The T reference point connections provide a point to point digital connection between the ISDN network and BCM NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 435 ISDN reference A T loop provides lines that can be shared by all BCM telephones peripherals and applications and ISDN TE AT loop can be used in combination with an S loop to provide D packet service for a point of sale terminal adapter POSTA or other D packet device D packet service is a 16 kbps data transmission service that uses the D channel of an ISDN line
421. ut how to set up a VLAN refer to the user documentation that came with your VLAN compatible switch Avaya WLAN Handset Settings TFTP Server IP address The IP address of the TFTP server that holds software images for updating the wireless headsets WLAN IP Telephony IP address A device that manages network telephony traffic on the WLAN system NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 187 BCM DHCP overview Address Ranges tab The Address Ranges tab specifies IP addresses to be provided to DHCP clients The Address Ranges tab has two tables Included Address Ranges and Reserved Addresses The Included Address Ranges specifies a range of IP addresses to be provided to DHCP clients Attention Whenever you make changes to the address range the DHCP server may become unavailable to clients for a brief period of time When making changes consider doing so ata time that will minimize the effect on users DHCP subnets By default the DHCP server on the BCM450 must configure a range of IP addresses to supply the IP sets It defaults to use the top 20 percent of a subnet For example if an external DHCP server supplies the following IP address to the BCM 177 218 21 45 255 255 255 0 then the BCM450 DHCP server configures itself to reserve the following range 177 218 21 200 177 218 21 254 You can use Business Element Manager to check and change this default The Reserved Addresses table l
422. ut interface page 393 e Disconnecting an automatic dial out interface page 393 Adding an automatic dial out interface Use this procedure to add an automatic dial out interface Procedure steps Step Action 1 Create a Modem or ISDN interface See Adding an ISDN interface page 376 or Adding a modem interface page 381 Enable the interface under Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Select the Automatic Dialout check box for the interface Set the Idle timeout s on the Link Parameters tab to a value greater than 60 seconds Add a static route Refer to Static routes configuration page 359 O a Ff WwW ND Associate the route with an application End Disconnecting an automatic dial out interface Use this procedure to a disconnect an automatic dial out interface Auto dial out interfaces are disconnected automatically once data transfer is complete Procedure steps Step Action 1 Select Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 Select the interface to disconnect NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 393 Dial up resources configuration 3 4 Click Disconnect A confirmation dialog box appears Click Yes End Dial up interfaces as primary connections The dial up interfaces on the BCM are used as a Primary or Secondary interfaces The BCM does not have default dial up settings the Administrator must add them The follow
423. uted out of the centralized system to the localized remote nodes For more information see Creating tandem private networks page 33 The following figure shows three types of callers Each type of caller has a specific method of accessing the other two BCM450 systems NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 23 System telephony networking overview Tandem dialing through a BCM450 to from a private network Private Network Node T1 E1 lines Analog lines T1 lines Public Network PRI BRI lines The following figure shows three types of callers Each type of caller has a specific method of accessing the other two BCM50 systems 24 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview Tandem dialing through a BCM50 to from a private network Private Network Node T1 E1 lines Analog lines Analog lines Public PRI BRI lines Callers using Avaya BCM These callers can e call directly to a specific telephone e select an outgoing line to access a private network select an outgoing line to access features that are available on the private network e select an outgoing central office line to access the public network e use all of the Avaya BCM features Callers in the public network These callers use the public lines to e call directly to one or more Avaya BCM DN
424. uto DN on the other system Answer with DISA cannot be administer to voice over IP VoIP since they do not connect systems outside the private network However a user calling in remotely on another system on the network can use the trunk to access the system or a user calling in on a PSTN line can use the trunk to access the private network To provide control for this type of access ensure that you specify remote access packages for the trunk Defining remote access packages The Remote access packages setting allows you to control the remote access to line pools and remote page Create a remote access package by defining the system line pools remote users can access You then assign the package to individual lines and to a particular Class of Service password see Defining CoS passwords page 198 Defining CoS passwords CoS passwords permit controlled access to the system resources by both internal and remote users When an internal user enters a CoS password ata telephone the restriction filters associated with the CoS password apply instead of the normal restriction filters Similarly when a remote user enters a CoS password on an incoming auto answer line the restriction filters and remote package associated with their CoS password apply instead of the normal restriction filters and remote package 198 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Call security and remote access
425. vate networking protocols The Avaya BCM supports the following protocols for private networking PRI ETSI QSIG Avaya Voice Networking MCDN DPNSS BRI ETSI QSIG T1 E amp M VolP trunks with optional MDCN Attention For the DTM PRI configuration protocol MCDN is referred to as SL 1 in Business Element Manager 26 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 System telephony networking overview BCM systems can be networked together using T 1 PRI or VoIP trunks PRI SL 1 lines and VoIP trunks also offer the opportunity to use the MCDN protocol which provides enhanced trunking features and end to end user identification If a Meridian 1 is part of the MCDN network the network can also provide centralized voice mail and auto attendant off the Meridian Attention MCDN networking requires all nodes on the network to use a common Universal Dialing Plan UDP or a Coordinated Dialing Plan CDP Keycode requirements Keycodes are required to activate the protocols that are used to create private networking including e VoIP Gateway keycodes e an MCDN DPNSS orQ Sig keycode if you want to use a networking protocol between the systems You must purchase and install these keycodes before you can create any of the networks described in this chapter Consult with your Avaya distributor to ensure you order the correct keycodes for the type of network you want to create Remote access
426. wer mode set to Auto or if you enable Answer with DISA Disconnect supervision is also required to conference two external callers The line must be equipped with disconnect supervision from the central office for the Supervised option to work ROE ROI These listing only appear for UK analog lines These appear only for Australia Dial mode Loop GS DID E amp M Pulse Specify whether the system uses dual tone multifrequency Tone DTMF or pulse signaling on the trunk Tone does not appear if Signaling is set to Immediate T1 DID amp T1 E amp M trunk types only 140 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Line configuration overview Properties lines settings Loss package Loop analog only Short CO Select the appropriate loss gain and impedance settings for each Medium CO line Long CO Short PBX Long PBX Impedance Loop analog only Ohms 600 ohm 900 ohm The GATM can be set to a specific impedance level Signaling DID E amp M Preferences lines The Preferences tab shows information that may vary from trunk to trunk Most of this information needs to coordinate with the line service provider equipment For more information about a sample of the BC M450 Preferences tab the following table Preferences details panel Details For Line 062 Properties Preferences
427. which dip switches are set to on 1 or off 0 Bus lt read only gt On the BCM50 the bus value determines the 1 XX line and DN range On a BCM450 the administrator determines what line number or DN number range to assign to a position regardless of the bus number State Enabled Indicates the state of the module or bus Disabled Enabled module is installed and working Enabling Disabled module is installed but has been N A disabled or is down for another reason Enabling system is enabling device N A A state value is not applicable to this particular location A module may or may not be installed 80 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Telephony resources configuration Telephony Resources table field descriptions Attributes Value Description Low lt digits gt This field indicates the lowest setting for one of the following The range of lines the module VoIP supports The range of loops the module supports BRI The range of DNs the module IP telephony supports High lt digits gt This field indicates the highest setting for one of the following The range of lines the module VoIP supports The range of loops the module supports BRI The range of DNs the module IP telephony supports Active lt XX gt Lines loops or sets This field indicates the number of active lines loops or DNs that the module supports Busy
428. which is configured in the realm based account credentials under private SIP trunks Optional ITSP Association Method You can configure how the system handles the association of inbound requests through the ITSP Association Method drop down box on the Advanced tab in Business Element Manager ITSP Association Method options Parameter Description From header Domain match ITSP if a match is found The system finds a match based on domain in From header of the incoming request and uses the parent SIP trunk user account of the R URI Domain match ITSP if a match is found The system finds a match based on domain in R URI header of the incoming request and uses the parent SIP trunk user account of the To header Domain ITSP if a match is found The system finds a match based on domain in To header of the incoming request and uses the parent SIP trunk user account of the PAI header Domain ITSP if a match is found The system finds a match based on domain in PAI header of the incoming request and uses the parent SIP trunk user account of the 110 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 IP VoIP trunk configuration Parameter Description R URI Called Number The system finds a match if the ITSP account contains SIP trunk user Username match account with a username matching the userpart of R URI in the incoming reques
429. wing procedure to configure the link parameters for the modem Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 Click the Modem interface to configure NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 383 Dial up resources configuration 3 Click the Link Parameters tab The Link Parameters panel appears 4 Configure the Modem Link Parameters End Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Dial Out Parameters Dial out number lt read only gt Telephone number to use to connect using the modem interface If needed area codes and all necessary digits to dial an external number are included Hardware lt read only gt Hardware compression is always enabled Compression PPP Settings Idle timeout lt 90 36000 gt The interval after which the modem interface disconnects when there is no traffic Default 90 seconds Note Specifying a value of 0 makes the connection persistent Maximum receive unit lt 128 1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that can be received Default 1500 Maximum lt 128 1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that can be transmission unit received Default 1500 IP header lt read only gt IP header compression is always enabled compression Software compression lt read only gt Software compression is always enabled Access Heading Authenticati
430. with 16 and 32 telephone e BRIM connections respectively e Empty e 4X16 Combo A module with 4 analog trunks and 16 digital stations e 8X16 Combo A module with 8 analog trunks and 16 digital stations e BRI ST e DTM T1 e DTM PRI e Empty No module is currently connected NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 79 Telephony resources configuration Telephony Resources table field descriptions Attributes Value Description Configured Device lt read only gt This field indicates the type of module DID4 assigned to each location DID8 DID4 ASM ASM DID8 GATM4 ASM GASM Analog and Global Analog DSM16 Station Modules provide four connections for DSM32 four analog telephones DSM32 GATMB8 Global Analog Trunk Module with 4X16 Combo four trunk line connections 8X16 Combo DSM16 or DSM32 DSM32 Digital Station DTM T1 Module with 16 and 32 telephone DTM PRI connections respectively CTM4 GATM4 4X16 Combo A module with 4 analog trunks CTM8 GATM8 and 16 digital stations BRIM 8X16 Combo A module with 8 analog trunks Empty and 16 digital stations BRI ST DTM T1 DTM PRI Empty No module is currently connected Dip switches BCM450 only N A Indicates that the module is not configured Indicates that the module dip switches are all AllOn set to on Reflects the factory default dip switch setting XXXXXX A combination of 1s and Os reflects
431. with DISA by default e T1DID trunks You cannot configure T1 DID trunks to answer with DISA If you want incoming T1 DID calls to be answered with DISA configure the system with a DISA DN Incoming T1 DID calls that map onto the DISA DN are then routed to a line that has DISA e You cannot program a DISA DN or Auto DN to VoIP trunks because they act as auto answer lines for private networks However you still need to assign remote access packages to the VoIP trunks to ensure that remote access restrictions are properly applied to incoming calls trying to access the system or the system network Also refer to the following information e Remote access line settings page 196 e Remote access on loop start trunks page 197 e Remote access on T1 DID and PRI trunks page 197 e Remote access on DPNSS lines page 197 e Remote access on a private network page 198 Remote access line settings The remote access feature allows callers elsewhere on the private or the public network to access your BCM by dialing directly and not going through the attendant After the remote user is in the system they can use some of the system resources You must enable remote access in programming before callers can use it BCM supports remote system access on a number of trunk types which may require the remote caller to enter a password for DISA The system resources such as dialing capabilities line pool access and feature access that a remote u
432. with a BCM50 system and a PRI line NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 31 System telephony networking overview PRI networking using Call by Call Services on BCM50 New York office Toronto office Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 DID 763 2221 DID 562 622 TIE Connection Public Network To reduce long distance costs and to allow for a coordinated dialing plan between the offices private lines are used to handle inter office traffic If call by call services were not used each BCM system might have to be equipped with the following trunks e 12T1 DID lines needed to handle peak incoming call traffic e eight T1 E amp M lines needed to handle inter office calls e eight lines needed to handle outgoing public calls PRI SL 1 Q Sig DPNSS and VolP trunk networking You can use PRI SL 1 trunks and VoIP trunks to create private networks between Avaya BCM systems or between Avaya BCM systems and larger call servers such as Meridian 1 Succession 1000 M DMS 100 250 and CSE ETSI QSIG and DPNSS private networking is configured very similarly although network features may be supported slightly differently due to local line and network requirements If the MCDN protocol is added to this type of private network the network provides additional network management features as well as allowing centralized voice mai
433. work NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 181 BCM DHCP overview DHCP server on the Main Module with external DHCP server If an external DHCP server is presentin your network the preferred configuration for the Main Module DHCP server is Enabled IP phones only In this case the DHCP server provides configuration data to Avaya IP Deskphones only All other devices like PCs receive the configuration data from the external DHCP server BCM configured as DHCP client is unable to reach external DHCP server In an instance where a BCM is unable to connect the DHCP server it had previously been using it uses configuration information that exists from the previous lease After the BCM is unable to get a dynamic IP address from a server it uses the IP address saved from the previous lease The VoIP information remains unchanged since the IP address for the BCM LAN has not changed The BCM still attempts to renew the dynamic IP address each time it reboots so if the external DHCP server becomes available again it will geta new dynamic IP address BCM using a dynamic address is changed to a static address If you manually change a dynamic IP address to a static IP address the VoIP information for the BCM450 LAN changes as well For example the S1 and S2 IP addresses fora BCM LAN are dynamically assigned to 47 166 50 80 If you change the BCM LAN IP address to the static IP address 47 166 5
434. y The Details for Interface Customer LAN panel appears From the IP Configuration tab click Modify The Modify IP Settings box appears Configure the LAN attributes Click OK N oOo fF End 400 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Configuring virtual LANs Variable definitions Variable Value Allow Network Access Enabling this option allows traffic from the LAN Interface network to traverse to another LAN or VLAN Default gateway The gateway used by the BCM system IP address The IP address of the BCM system IP subnet mask The value for the LAN used to determine the IP range LAN interface Published IP interface The IP address used for BCM applications such as SIP H 323 and IP Set server Adding a VLAN Add a VLAN to your network to logically group ports and endstations such that ports and endstations in the VLAN appear to be on the same physical or extended LAN segment Procedure steps Step Action 1 In Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem 2 Select the VLAN Interfaces tab 3 From the VLAN Interfaces Summary area click Add The Add a VLAN dialog box appears Configure the VLAN attributes Click OK End NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 401 Configuring virtual LANs Deleting a VLAN Variable Value Allow Network Ac
435. y May 2010 Dial up resources configuration Variable definitions Attribute Value Description Channel lt read only gt There are two ISDN channels available for dial out ISDN1 and ISDN2 These channels are assigned automatically Dial out Number lt numeric string gt Enter the primary phone number to use to make an ISDN connection If needed include area codes and all necessary digits to dial an external number The phone number must contain only numerical digits no alphabetical or other characters are allowed Default blank Line Type lt drop down list gt Select either 64K Digital or 56K Digital line BCM50 ISDN supports two types of Unrestricted Digital Information UDI bit streams UDI and UDI 56 With UDI data is transmitted at 64kbps 64K Digital With UDI 56 a 1 bitis inserted in the eighth bit position of each B channel time slot while the other 7 bits form the 56kbps channel 56K Digital Default 64K Digital Negotiate Line Type lt check box gt Choose whether the system selects a line with a slower speed if unable to connect at the previously set speed Default enabled Configuring the ISDN Link Parameters Use the following procedure to configure ISDN link parameters Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 Click the ISDN interface to configure 3 Click the Link Parameters tab The Link Parameters panel appears
436. y on calling set page 267 e Configuring Outgoing Call Identification page 267 e Blocking outgoing name display at the trunk level page 268 e Blocking outgoing name display at the telephone level page 268 266 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Calling line identification configuration Configuring a business name for outgoing CLID display Use this procedure to configure a business name for outgoing CLID display Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration Telephony Global Settings Feature Settings 2 Click the field beside Business Name 3 Type a maximum of 15 characters for a name End Displaying the internal name and extension Use this procedure to see the CLID of internal telephones you call Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences 2 In the Auto Caller Id field select Enable End Setting internal CLID display on calling set Use this procedure to program name display for a phone set Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs 2 Select the DN row you want to change 3 Click on the Name field 4 Enter a new name The maximum name length is 8 characters 5 Click on the DN row again to apply the name change End Configuring Outgoing Call Identification You can configure the number that displays at the other end of a
437. y other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks Appearance Type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this mustbe set to Ring only Model Avaya 7000 Deskphones supported in Europe only VMsg Set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter DASS2 lines configuration DASS2 trunks are specific to the UK Prerequisites for DASS2 lines configuration DTM module is installed and configured e Lines are provisioned NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 239 Lines configuration DASS2 line configuration process Part A 240 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines configuration DASS2 line configuration process Part B NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 241 Lines configuration Configuring DASS2 lines Use the following procedure to configure DASS2 lines Procedure steps Step Action 1 Click on Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines 2 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line
438. y table The Call Routing Summary table provides a read only summary of all active IP trunks The Call Routing Summary table fields are described below Call Routing Summary field descriptions Attribute Description Description The name of the trunk configured when the trunk is added Destination Digits The leading digits that callers dial to route calls through the trunk Type The type of trunk H323 Public SIP or Private SIP Account Public SIP trunks only the name of the ITSP account that the route serves H323 Routing Mode The H323 Routing Mode section indicates the status of the H 323 gatekeeper configuration If Gatekeeper mode is Gatekeeper Resolved or Gatekeeper R outed then a gatekeeper has been configured on the BCM In either of these cases H 323 calls are routed according to the gatekeeper configuration and the H 323 routes are not listed in the Call Routing Summary table All H 323 trunks are listed in the H 323 Routing Table Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking gt Routing Table The H 323 gatekeeper configuration options are configured at Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking gt Settings NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 99 IP VoIP trunk configuration Private SIP Routing Mode Private SIP Routing Mode section indicates if a private SIP trunking is being used to route SIP calls
439. y the modem At the CTI server start up this feature activates The BCM administrator can provision two CLIDs for each platform account that automatically routes to the analog modem ModemCC on box application adds the entries ModemCC application adds the CLID entries to the CTI Server internal tables through the existing CTI Server API When the incoming CLID entry matches the provisioned CLID the call is forwarded to the ModemCC application to be answered ModemCC enhancements ModemCC application identifies the call entries for the modem calls routed by voice mail application or based on the CLID number of the call for modem calls routed by the CTI Server 176 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 LAN packet IP capture The information in this chapter applies to both the BCM50 and the BCM450 platforms running Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Avaya BCM 6 0 You can initiate IP packets capture using the Business Element Manager on the BCM LAN and store captured IP packets in the output file on BCM file system USB drive network drive After you initiate the capture operation the specified port captures the LAN IP packets according to specified filtering rules This feature is available only for users with administrator privileges The Avaya BCM system limits the overall maximum size of all capture files to 50MB for all platforms and size of the single capture file to
440. y wait until applications shut down Details about changes pending can be seen in the details panel Sig Ch lt read only gt The number of signalling channels reserved by the application This can be changed by modifying the minimum and maximum values for the application If the field has a value of N A the application does not require this type of resource 64 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Applications Resources overview Application Resources panel field values Attribute Value Description VDI Ch lt read only gt The number of VDI channels reserved by the application This can be changed by modifying the minimum and maximum values for the application If the field has a value of N A the application does not require this type of resource Media Ch lt read only gt The number of media channels reserved by the application This can be changed by modifying the minimum and maximum values for the application If the field has a value of N A the application does not require this type of resource DSP lt read only gt The number of DSP resources reserved by the application This can be changed by modifying the minimum and maximum values for the application If the field has a value of N A the application does not require this type of resource Details for Application Current minimum assigned The current minimum assigne
441. y will not exceed the total of allowed number of VDI channels This maximum is affected by the number of TDM Trunks The maximum number of TDM trunks is 150 minus the number of allocated IP trunks Note that the BCM50 maximum number of IP Trunks is 12 and the total of VDI channels is 62 There is no need to modify the IP trunks minimum and maximum since the necessary VDI resources are always available The only resource you need to manage on the BCM is DSP which is used by media gateways voice mail and Call Centre Fax and Conferencing Setting values for application resources For all applications you can modify the minimum and maximum values The minimum values reflect the number of resources that will always be reserved for a particular application while the maximum reflects the maximum instances of an application the system will allow at once If an application attempts to use system resources and the system is already supporting the maximum for that application the service will be declined regardless of whether there are sufficient resources available A value of MAX is also acceptable which sets the maximum number of applications allowed to the maximum number possible For example in BCM450 the System Maximum for Media Gateways is 704 If the Maximum value for Media Gateways is set to MAX then the system allows up to 704 Media Gateways at once as long as sufficient resources are available In BCM50 the System Maximum for Media Ga
442. ya BCM 6 0 Overview The remote modem feature allows the support user to logon to the BCM through the modem interface from voice mail interface e by provisioning CLID to be answered by the modem regardless of modem enabled disabled setting Three different classes of user can use this feature e Avaya support e BCM administrators e third party management company Remote modem modules The remote modem feature related to Avaya BCM are Voice mail modem access In Avaya BCM the support personnel can dial in to the BCM voice mail through an external line trunk and transfer the call to the modem DN To support this feature the following menus are active Auto attendant e Leave message The support personnel needs to enter the special sequence after presented with these menus to transfer the call to the modem DN or to transfer to support mailboxes F981 menu When the special sequence is entered the call is transferred to modem and is shown as disconnected in the CDR data In case of modem call the support call does not change the provisioned state of the modem although if you disable the modem the support call is auto answered When the support call is terminated the original modem status is set back NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 175 Remote modem CTI server enhancements This functionality enables adding multiple CLID entries to be auto answered b
443. you include the proper routing information DN Unique Number Appearance Type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model Avaya 7000 Deskphones supported in Europe only NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 209 Lines configuration Appearances Target lines can have more than one appearance so that multiple calls can be accommodated F or telephones that have these lines set to Ring only set to None Caller Id Set Select check box to display caller ID for calls coming in over the target line VMsg Set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter PRI lines configuration PRI are auto answer lines These lines cannot be individually assigned to telephones They must be configured into line pools PRI line pools then are assigned routes and these routes are used to create destination codes Prerequisites for PRI lines configuration e DTM module is installed enabled and configured e Lines are provisioned 210 NN40170 502 Avaya Business Communications Manager 6 0 Configuration Telephony May 2010 Lines
444. yption Authentication and Integrity adds a whole message integrity check Attention This option adds to security but can affect NAT and firewall integration 401 Reason lt alphanumeric gt This character string is sent in authentication challenges Default Unauthorized Actions Add local account On the Local Accounts table of the SIP Authentication panel click Add to add a local account See SIP Authentication Local Accounts field descriptions page 126 Delete local account 1 On the SIP Authentication panel select the Local Account entry to delete 2 Click Delete 3 On the confirmation dialog box click OK Modify local account 1 On the SIP Authentication panel select the Local Account entry to modify 2 Click Modify You can modify the Password and Description only 3 On the confirmation dialog box click OK Add remote account On the Remote Accounts table of the SIP Authentication panel click Add to add a remote account See SIP Authentication Remote Accounts field descriptions page 127 Delete remote account 1 On the Remote Accounts table select the entry to delete 2 Click Delete 3 On the confirmation dialog box click OK Modify remote account 1 On the Remote Accounts table select the entry to modify 2 Click Modify Y ou can modify the User ID Password and the Description only 3 On the confirmation dialog box click OK NN40170 502
445. ystem must provide the User ID and Password combination Password lt alphanumeric gt The administrator supplies each remote domain with a unique User ID and Password If the local system Maximum 50 f challenges incoming calls the remote system must provide the User ID and Password combination Description lt alphanumeric gt Description of remote domain Maximum 50 H 323 trunks To configure an H 323 IP trunk you need to configure the route and specify the H 323 settings and media parameters You also need to configure the options common to all IP trunks Options common to all IP trunks page 99 To find the H 323 trunk configuration panels in Business Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking There are three tabs under the H323 Trunking tab Routing Table Settings and Media Parameters The configuration parameters for each of these are described below H 323 routing table The BCM routes calls directly from entries in the routing table Configuration gt Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Trunking gt Routing Table or uses the services of a gatekeeper if one is configured To add a route you click the Add button at the bottom of the routing table and then complete the fields of the Add Remote Gateway panel To delete a route you select the route and click the Delete button The parameters of the Add Remote Gateway panel are described below For the corresponding procedure see Co

Avaya Business Communications Manager 6.0 - Configuration - Telephony Configuration manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents